VK 

A53 
1916 


iJ£7.''Ri.p 


^,S    ?5U    5ta 


IKSTRUCriONS 

FOR 

UNITED  STATES  COAST  GUARD 
STATIONS 


1916 


Ilfiiillllilliiiiiuiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiu 


TREASURY  DEPARTMENT 
UNITED  STATES  COAST  GUARD 


INSTRUCTIONS 

FOR 

UNITED  STATES 
COAST  GUARD  STATIONS 

1916 


WASHINGTON 

GOVERNMENT  PRINTING  OFHCE 

1917 


:^ 


f'T: 


^t-^^ 


r    •  •  •    •/^i  .      •     •        • 


Treasuky  Department, 
Washington^  October.  25,  1916, 
The   following   Instructions   for   Coast    Guard    Stations    are 
promulgated  for  the  government  of  those  concerned,  and  shall 
be  strictly  observed. 

A.  J.  Peters, 
Assistant  Secretary. 


357435 


I Djg itized  by.  the .  I nte rPiQt  Arch ive 
in  2007  with  funding  from'*    ?' 
"'  ■  '  lyiliprbsoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/coastguardOOunitrich 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

CHAPTER  I. 
General  Instructions. 

1.  The  "Instructions  for  Coast  Guard  Stations"  shall  have 
the  force  and  effect  of  regulations. 

2.  A  keeper  shall  be  responsible  for  the  proficiency  of  the 
crew  in  their  various  duties.  r     i 

3.  In  these  Instructioiis  the  term  "  out  of  commission"  shall 
mean  the  period  during  which  a  station  crew,  except  the  keeper, 
is  discharged  or  granted  leave  of  absence  without  pay.  At  all 
other  times  a  station  shall  be  considered  as  "  in  commission." 

4.  He  shall  keep  on  hand  sufficient  quantities  of  gasoline  and 
lubricating  oils  for  the  station  power  boats  in  order  that  they 
may  be  ready  at  all  times  for  Instant  and  prolonged  service. 
No  excuse  for  a  failure  to  have  power  boats  available  owing 
to  the  lack  of  these  essentials  will  be  accepted.  He  is  enjoined 
to  use  economy  in  the  expenditure  of  gasoline,  but  no  restric- 
tion is  placed  upon  such  expenditure  if  the  interests  of  the 
public  service  would  suffer  thereby. 

5.  He  shall  report  in  writing  to  Headquarters  any  serious 
accident  to  the  station  buildiilgs,  equipment,  station  boats,  and 
motors,  or  any  explosion  of  gasoline  about  the  station  premises 
or  in  any  power  boat,  whether  or  not  the  same  results  in  in- 
jury to  any  person,  either  connected  with  the  Coast  Guai-d  or 
outside  of  it,  or  in  damage  to  any  boat  or  other  property,  private 
01*  public,  setting  forth  the  facts  in  detail,  and  shall  make  an 
entry  of  all  such  matters  in  the  log.  •  r-  : 

6.  Should  additional  assistance  become  imperatively  neces- 
sary on  occasion  of  a  wreck  when  the  station  is  in  commission, 
the  keeper  is  authorized  to  employ  such  additional  number  of 
competent  men  as  are  absolutely  needed,  who  will  be  entitled 
to  receive  such  compensation  as  their  services  are  reasonably 
worth,  the  period  and  value  of  their  services  to  be  stated  and 
certified  to  by  the  keeper. 

7.  (1)  When  necessary  to  facilitate  or  hasten  the  conveyance 
of  the  boat  or  beach  apparatus  to  the  scene  of  a  wreck,  keepers 
are  authorized* ' to ' se^re  the < ikse 'Of -^horses,  « carts,  •  and' other 


6  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

vehicles,  oi*  lugs,  icr  the  services  of  which  reasonahle  compensa- 
tion will  be  allowed.     If  practicable,  keepers  shall   make  ar- 
rangements with  owners  of  horses,  carts,  and  tugs  for  their) 
use  at  reasonable  rates  when  required. 

(2)  When  such  expense  has  been  incurred,  the  keeper  shall 
prepare  one  original  and  four  memorandum  copies  and  transmit 
to  the  district  superintendent  one  original  and  three  memoran- 
dum copies  of  vouchers  therefor,  on  Form  2667,  in  favor  of 
the  persons  or  firms  performing  the  service,  to  which  he  shall 
attach  a  statement  setting  forth  fully  the  necessity  for  and 
extent  of  the  service  rendered.  A  bill  for  the  services  of  a  tug 
shall  not  include  a  charge  for  efforts  to  float  a  stranded  vessel, 
lightering  cargo,  or  other  service  performed  at  the  request  of 
the  master  or  owner  of  the  vessel,  but  shall  be  confined  solely 
to  assistance  in  towing  or  maneuvering  with  the  service  boat, 
under  direction  of  the  keeper. 

8.  He  shall  make  a  full  report  on  Form  2631  of  every  case  of 
resuscitation  or  attempted  resuscitation  of  a  person  apparently 
drowned  or  insensible  from  other  causes,  answering  specifically 
every  question  on  the  blank  and  adding  any  other  pertinent 
information.  Should  a  physician  be  present,  he  shall  be  re- 
quested to  append  to  the  report  any  remarks  and  observations 
that  he  may  consider  in  the  interest  of  medical  science. 

9.  He  shall  make  a  full  report  to  Headquarters  of  any  prop- 
erty cast  ashore  and  recovered  by  his  crew  that  is  of  a  distinctly 
personal  character  or  bears  identifying  marks  by  which  the 
owner  may  be  traced.  Members  of  station  crews  have  no  right 
of  ownership  in  property  recovered  from  the  sea  or  found  on  the 
beach.  All  such  property  for  which  no  rightful  owner  can 
be  found  shall  be  disposed  of  as  directed  by  Headquarters. 

10.  He  shall  not,  except  in  case  of  emergency,  transfer  any. 
article  of  permanent  equipment,  such  as  a  boat  or  beach  wagon, 
to  another  station  for  any  period  without  previous  authorization 
from  Headquarters.  When  any  article  of  equipment  or  supply 
is  transferred  to  another  station  the  keeper  delivering  it  shall 
prepare  five  copies  of  the  invoice  (Form  2556),  retain  one 
copy,  and  forward  three  copies  to  consignee  and  one  copy  to 
Headquarters.  The  consignee  shall  receipt  three  copies  on 
receipt  of  the  articles,  retain  one  copy,  return  one  copy  to  con- 
signor, and  forward  one  copy  to  Headquarters.  The  consignee 
and  consignor  shall  each  file  one  receipted  copy.  The  transfer 
shall  be  entered  in  the  log  and  in  the  "  Record  of  public  prop- 
erty" of  each  station,  giving  dates  of  transfer  and  authority. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  7 

The  temporary  transfer  of  small  quantities  pf  supplies,  such  as 
oil,  forage,  and  the  like,  which  it  is  intended  to  return  shall  be 
entered  in  the  log  only  and  no  receipts  need  be  taken.  The  tem- 
porary transfer  and  use  of  service  horses  and  vehicles  for 
service  purposes  shall  be  entered  in  the  log  only. 

11.  He  shall  be  polite  and  courteous  to  visitors,  but  shall  not 
permit  them  to  handle  any  gear  or  apparatus  nor  deface  or  dam- 
age any  station  property  by  writing,  carving,  scratching,  or 
other  means.  He  shall  detail  a  member  or  members  of  the 
crew  to  show  visitors  about  the  station,  but  shall  not  take  or 
permit  others  to  take  visitors  out  in  a  station  boat  without 
authority  from  a  superior  officer. 

12.  Petty  officers  who  desire  promotion  to  the  grade  of  keeper 
may  make  application  therefor  to  Headquarters,  and  surfmen 
who  desire  to  be  rated  petty  officers  may  make  application 
therefor  to  their  district  superintendent.  All  such  applications 
;shall  be  in  writing,  and  shall  bear  the  recommendations  of  the 
^officers  through  whom  they  are  forwarded. 

13.  The  name  and  residence  of  each  person  attached  to  th^ 
station  and  the  name  and  address  of  his  next  of  kin  shall  be 
entered  on  the  first  page  of  the  log,  and  also  the  address  of  a 
person  who  has  been  granted  leave  of  absence. 

14.  Enlisted  men  shall  be  addressed  eitlier  by  their  last  name 
or  by  number  as  shown  in  the  watch  and  patrol  bill,  as  No.  1, 
No.  2,  etc. 

15.  Enlisted  men  shall  not  be  required  to  perform  any  per- 
sonal services  for  the  keeper. 

DUTIES    OF    KEEPER    AS    INSPECTOR    OF    CUSTOMS. 

24.  A  keeper  shall  exercise  his  power  as  an  Inspector  of 
^customs  with  reference  to  merchandise  presumably  of  foreign 
origin  cast  ashore  from  wrecks  or  forming  the  cargo  of  vessels 
stranded  or  driven  ashore  by  stress  of  weather  or  anchoring 
within  the  customs  limits  of  his  station. 

*2o.  He  shall  promptly  notify  the  collector  of  customs  of  the 
•district  of  any  casualty  to  a  vessel  with  merchandise  presum- 
ably of  foreign  origin  and  exercise  supervision  over  the  cargo 
until  a  regular  customs  officer  arrives  to  take  the  necessary 
action  toward  forwarding  it  to  its  destination  or  to  the  nearest 
port  of  entry,  as  may  be  determined  by  the  owners  or  under- 
writers. 


8  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

;2i6.  He  shall  keep  a  correct  account  of  the  dutiable  cargo  of 
a  strauded  vessel  forwarded  on"  account  of  its  perishable  nature, 
or.  for  any  other  reason,  to  its  destination  or  to  the  nearest 
port  of  entry  in  a  lighter  or  other  vessel  before  the  arrival  of 
a,  ci^stoms  officer,  making  out  and  signing  duplicate  lighter 
manifests  (customs  blank  No.  5913)  of  the  cargo  on  board  of 
si^ch.  lighter  or  vessej,  one  of  which  he  shall  deliver  to  the  master 
thereof  and  the  other  to  the  collector  of  the  port  to  which  the 
lighter  or  vessel  is  bound. 

27.  He  shall  exercise  a  watchful  care  over  such  portions  of 
the  cargo  as  may  be  landed  or  come  on  shore  fi'om  stranded 
,vt?s?.els  in  order  to  preserve  the  same,  as  far  as  possible,  for  the 
^Q^^ers  thereof,  as  also  to  protect  the  Revenue;  and,  with  this 
in  view%  dutiable  goods  and  valuable  merchandise  other  than 
jl^mbustibles  or  explosives  may,  for  security,  be  stored  within 
Uie  station;  but  the  boat  room  must  not  be  encumbered  with 
articles  which  might ,  ^ffect .  the  "instant  availability  of  the 
.apparatus.  _  -<«'m.  ,-".--(   ..•,;,r,:.     <  .  ,  ..  ^l,^^^ 

Action  at  '  wi^eciks. 

31.  Keepers  of  adjacent  stations  when  called  upon  shall  at 
once  proceed  to  render  assistance  unless  actually  engaged  with 
another .  disaster  or  about  to  be  so  engaged.  If  their  assistance 
is  not  requested,  they  shall  keep  themselves  in  readiness  to  re- 
spond promptly  to  any  subsequent  call,  and  the  keeper  of  the 
station  nearest  the  wreck  shall  post  a  lookout  within  signal 
distance  of  the  scene  of  operations  to  receive  and  transmit  sucli 
request.    ,, 

32.  (1)  At  a  station  which  has  telephonic  communication  the 
•{keeper  of  the  station  nearest  to  which  a  wreck  or  other  marine 
'  casualty  occurs  shall  immediately  notify  the  keepers  of  adjacent 
^Stations  of  the  circumstance  arid,  if  necessary,  request  their 
..jassi^tauce.  f 

'      (2)  At  a  station  which  has  no  telephonic  connection  with  an 
,,a(ljacent  station  the  keeper,  upon '  the  occurrence  of  a  marine 
casualty  during  the  day,  shall  notify  the  keeper  of  such  adja- 
cent station  by  flag  or  distant  signal,  if  within  communicating 
distance  by  such  means;  if  the  casualty  occurs  at  night,  he 
,,sUall  immediately  fire  a  red  rocket.     He  then  shall  proceed  to 
\the,  wreck,  firing  red  rockets  at  intervals  of  S  or  10  minutes, 
until  his  supply  is  exhausted  or  until  answered  by  the  patrol 
from  such  adjacent  station  by  hand  lights  or  from  the  station 
by  a  white  rocket.    A  patrolman,  upon  seeing  a  red  rocket, 


INSTKXrCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  ^9 

shall  answer  it  with  a  red  Coston  light  and  immediately  hasten 
to  his  own  station  and  report  to  his  keeper,  who  shall,  if  the 
signal  was  from  another  station,  fire  a  white  rocket  and  hold 
himself  in  readiness  to  respond  to  a  signal  for  assistance,  post- 
ing a  lookout  as  required  in  the  preceding  article. 

33.  The  signal  for  assistance  at  night  from  adjacent  stations, 
where  other  and  better  means  are  not  available,  shall  consist 
of  two  red  rockets  fired  in  quick  succession,  if  the  assistance  of 
one  station  is  desired,  or  of  three  rockets  if  assistance  is 
wanted  from  more  than  one  station.  Each  keeper  of  a  station 
who  is  liable  to  call  for  assistance  in  this  manner  from  adja- 
cent stations  shall  have  a  previous  understanding  with  the 
other  keepers  as  to  which  shall  answer  his  two-rocket  signal 
and  which  shall  answer  his  three-rocket  signal.  The  station  or 
stations  called  shall  answer  with  a  white  rocket  and  proceed 
at  once  to  the  scene  of  the  casualty.  Rockets  shall  not  be 
used  for  any  other  purposes  than  those  specified  in  this  and  the 
preceding  article. 

34.  The  keeper  who  first  arrives  at  a  wreck  with  his  boat  or 
apparatus  shall  at  once  proceed  to  land  the  persons  on  board, 
if  necessary  and  possible,  unless  the  conditions  are  such  that 
the  assistance  of  another  crew  is  indispensable.  If  two  or 
more  units  of  the  Coast  Guard  are  at  the  scene  of  a  disaster, 
the  senior  officer  present  shall  have  charge  of  the  operations. 

35.  In  attempting  a  rescue  the  keeper  shall  select  such  ap- 
paratus— lifeboat  or  surfboat,  breeches  buoy,  or  life  car — as  in 
his  judgment  is  best  suited  to  cope  effectively  with  prevailing 
conditions.  If  the  device  first  selected  fails  after  such  trial  as 
satisfies  him  that  further  attempts  with  it  are  useless,  he  shall 
resort  to  another,  and  shall  not  desist  from  his  efforts  until  by 
actual  trial  the  impossibility  of  effecting  a  rescue  with  any  of 
the  means  at  hand  is  demonstrated.  The  statement  of  the 
keeper  that  he  did  not  try  to  use  the  boat  because  the  sea  or 
surf  was  too  heavy  will  not  be  accepted;  attempts  to  launch 
must  be  actually  made,  unless  the  conformation  of  the  coast- 
as  bluffs,  precipitous  banks,  etc. — is  such  as  unquestionably  to 
preclude  the  use  of  a  boat. 

36.  On  arriving  at  a  wreck  the  preservation  of  life  shall  be 
the  first  consideration  of  the  keeper  or  surfman  in  charge,  and 
he  shall  on  no  account  take  aboard  goods  or  merchandise  which 
may  endanger  the  safety  of  his  boat  or  the  lives  of  those  in- 
trusted to  his  charge.  Should  anything  be  put  into  the  boat 
against  his  remonstrance,  he  is  authorized  to  throw  it  over* 
board. 


10  IKSTRTTCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GTJARD  STATIONS. 

87.  Ill  establishins:  communication  with  a  wreck  by  means  of 
a  gun  throwing  a  line-carrying  projectile,  the  larger  size  shot 
lines  shall  be  used  when  the  distance  and  otlier  conditions  per- 
mit. When  it  is  found  necessary  to  use  a  No.  4  line,  a  larger 
line  shall  be  sent  out  by  it  for  use  in  hauling  off  the  whip ;  and 
if  a  No.  7  line  has  been  successfully  thrown  to  a  vessel  judged 
to  be  300  yards  or  more  from  the  shore,  a  No.  9  or  other 
stronger  line  shall  be  sent  out  to  carry  the  whip. 

38.  The  standard  charge  of  powder  for  the  Lyle  gun  in  prac- 
tice or  drill  with  the  beach  apparatus  is  2  ounces.  In  actual 
service  4  to  6  ounces  of  powder  may  be  used  for  a  No.  4  or 
No.  7  line  and  5  to  6  ounces  for  a  No.  9  line.  The  maximum 
charge  of  6  ounces  shall  not  be  exceeded  except  under  extraordi- 
nary circumstances,  nor  until  at  least  two  trials  with  that 
charge  have  failed  to  carry  the  line  the  required  distance.  In 
such  cases  charges  of  7  to  8  ounces,  but  in  no  case  more  than 
8  ounces,  may  be  used. 

39.  If,  upon  boarding  a  stranded  vessel,  there  is  found  to  be 
no  immediate  danger  of  loss  of  life  and  the  conditions  of  sea 
and  weather  warrant  an  attempt  to  float  the  vessel,  the  keeper 
and  crew  shall  render  the  master  every  assistance  in  their 
power  to  that  end,  bearing  in  mind  that  the  lines  and  gear  be- 
longing to  the  beach  apparatus  are  to  be  used  only  in  landing 
imperiled  passengers  or  crews. 

40.  When  the  master  of  a  stranded  vessel  contracts  or  bar- 
gains with  any  person  or  company  to  get  her  afloat  or  dis- 
mantle her,  or  sells  her  or  turns  her  over  to  the  wreck  commis- 
sioner or  to  any  agent  of  the  owner  or  underwriters,  the  re- 
sponsibility of  the  keeper  as  regards  the  property  shall  cease, 
except  as  to  customs  duties  on  the  cargo,  etc.,  unless  the  services 
of  the  crew  are  required  by  subsequent  danger  or  casualty. 

41.  While  the  saving  of  property  is  an  important  function  of 
the  Coast  Guard,  second  only  to  the  saving  of  human  life,  and 
keepers  and  crews  are  required  to  make  every  reasonable  effort 
to  that  end,  they  shall  not  neglect  the  regular  duties  of  their 
stations,  particularly  the  patrols  and  watches,  in  order  to  per- 
form labor  on  board  a  stranded  vessel  not  in  immediate  danger 
of  total  loss  when  such  labor  can  be  performed  by  her  crew 
or  by  other  persons  available  for  hire ;  and  the  master's  neglect 
or  refusal  to  secure  such  assistance  at  the  earliest  opportunity 
shall  be  deemed  to  relieve  the  station  crew  from  further  re- 
sponsibility. In  no  case  shall  a  station  crew  or  portion  thereof 
remain  on  board  a  vessel,  when  removed  from  the  station  limits, 


INSTICUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUAEB  STATIONS.  11 : 

to  man  the  pumps,  lighter  cargo,  etc.,  imless,  in  the  judgment  of 
the  keeper,  her  crew,  with  the  aid  of  such  other  help  as  is  pro- 
curable, is  unable  to  keep  her  afloat.  In  case  the  vessel  can 
be  kept  afloat  without  their  aid,  they  shall  return  to  the  station 
and  resume  their  regular  duties  as  soon  as  possible. 

42.  When  a  working  party  is  employed  on  board  of  a  wreck, 
keepers  shall,  on  the  approach  of  bad  weather,  exercise  the 
same  vigilance  for  saving  life  as  in  the  case  of  a  vessel  just 
stranded. 

43.  The  bodies  of  drowned  persons  found  in  the  surf,  on  the 
beach,  or  on  a  wrecked  vessel  shall  be  properly  cared  for  until 
they  can  be  turned  over  to  friends  or  to  the  proper  local  authori-  , 
ties.  If  they  can  not  be  positively  identified,  a  description,  as 
complete  in  detail  as  possible,  shall  be  entered  in  the  log,  and  , 
a  copy  immediately  sent  through  the  proper  channel  to  Head- 
quarters, with  any  information  obtainable  as  to  the  possible 
Identity  of  the  drowned  person.  A  station  crew  may  aid  in 
the  search  for  drowned  persons  when,  in  the  opinion  of  the 
keeper,  such  work  will  not  interfere  in  any  way  with  their 
regular  duties. 

44.  If  articles  of  value,  trinkets,  or  anything  else  that  may 
assist  in  its  identification  are  found  upon  a  body,  they  shall  be 
carefully  preserved  and  turned  over  to  the  coroner  or  other 
proper  civil  officer  and  duplicate  receipts  taken  therefor,  one 
of  which  shall  be  retained  by  the  keeper  and  the  other  for- 
warded to  Headquarters. 

PATROLS    AND   LOOKOUTS. 

51.  Where  patrols  are  maintained  in  two  directions,  the  pa- , 
trol  for  the  second  half  of  the  period  shall  ordinarily  be  made  in,, 
a  direction  opposite  to  that  in  which  it  was  made  during  the  , 
first  half.  When  practicable,  the  watch  and  patrol  bill  shall  be 
so  arranged  that  the  same  person  shall  not  make  the  patrol  in  , 
the  same  direction  on  successive  nights.  \\ 

52.  The  lookout  shall  be  stood   at  or  in  the  watch  house,. ^ 
station  lookout,  or  other  place  where  the  best  view  of  the  coast, j 
and   surrounding   waters   may   be   obtained.     This   place   shall^ 
be  designated  by  the  keeper,  with  the  approval  of  the  district 
superintendent.    The  lookout  shall  not  leave  his  post  for  meals 
or  other  purposes  until  properly  relieved,  except  when  neces- 
sary  for   the  purpose  of  giving  alarm  of  a   wreck  or   other 
casualty. 


12  INSTRTTCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

53!  AYhen  t^YO  or  more  stations  are  within  communicating 
distance,  patrols  covering  the  same  or  similar  periods  of  time 
shall  be  mad6  in  the  same  direction  from  each  of  those  stations. 
Where  the  distances  to  be  covered  are  short,  two  or  more 
patrols  each  Way  may  be  required  in  each  watch. 

54.  On  those  portions  of  the  coast  where  the  limits  of  the 
patrol  can  not  be  seen  from  the  station,  the  beach  shall  be  con- 
sidered sufficiently  patrolled  during  daylight  if  the  limits  are 
brought  in  sight  at  least  three  times. 

55.  A  complete  record  of  patrols  and  lookouts  shall  be  made 
bj^  means  of  checks,  time  detectors,  or  telephone,  or  by  such 
other  means  as  may  be  prescribed  by  Headquarters. 

56.  When  a  surf  man  has  made  his  regular  patrol  and  his 
time  has  not  expired,  he  shall  continue  to  patrol  the  beach 
until  it  is  time  to  call  his  relief.     During  his  watch  on  the^* 
beacl;!  a  surf  man  shall  not  remain  at  the  station  longer  than!* 
is  necessary  to  get  warm  or  trim  his  lantern.     Should  any  per*J* 
son  fail  to  return  at  the  expiration  of  his  patrol,   the  next^^ 
patrolman  shall  set  out  fit  the  regular  time,  without  awaiting 
the  arrival  of  his  predecessor. 

57.  (1)  The  station  lookout  shall  make  impressions  on  the 
dial  of  the  time  detector  or  w^atchman's  clock  at  intervals  of 
30  minutes  during  the  hours  of  darkness. 

(2)  The  surf  man  on  patrol  shall  make  impressions  upon  the 
didl  of  the  time  detector  with  keys  located  at  such  points  as 
the  keeper  may  determine,  with  the  approval  of  the  district 
superintendent.  If  two  or  more  points  are  to  be  visited  by  the 
patrol,  a  different  key  shall  be  placed  at  each  and  used  in  turn. 

58.  Where  the  entire  beach  between  two  stations  is  not  cov- 
ered by  the  patrols  a  key  post  shall  be  placed  at  the  limit  of 
each  prescribed  patrol,  and  the  surf  men  shall,  by  use  of  watch-  ■ 
men's  clocks,  make  records  of  their  visits  thereto. 

59.  Where  adjacent  stations  are  so  located  that  their  patrol 
limits  join  each  surf  man  on  patrol  shall  carry  a  check  bearing 
his  crew  number  and  the  name  or  number  of  his  station, 
which  he  shall  deposit  in  the  prescribed  place,  to  be  taken  up 
by  the  next  surfman  from  the  adjacent  station  and  delivered 
to  his  keeper,  except  that  the  last  patrolmari  in  the  morning 
shall  "not  so  deposit  a  check.  The  keeper  of  each  station  shall 
return  the  checks  so  received  to  the  proper  halfway  point  by 
the  ffrst  patrolman  of  the  next  night  reaching  there. 

60.  A  surfman  failing  to  find  the  check  which  should  be  at 
the  halfway  point  shall,  in  the  absence  of  telephonic  connuunica- 


INSTRTTCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  13 

tion  at  that  point,  proceed  to  the  next  station  and  nseertain  the 
cause  of  failure  to  deposit  the  check  and,  if  possible,  notify 
his  keeper  by  telephone  Of  his  action.  If  such  surf  man  be  the 
first  patrolman  of  that  watch,  his  keeper  shall  at  the  appointed 
time  take  the  second  station  lookout  himself  and  send  out  the 
second  patrolman.  Where  telephonic  means  of  communication 
are  provided  between  the  halfway  point  and  the  next  stiation  a 
surfman,  when  unable  to  find  the  required  check,  shall  so  in- 
form the  keeper  of  the  station  concerned,  who  shall  have  th^' 
intervening  beach  patrolled  at  once  in  search  of  the  missing 
patrolman. 

61.  Av^here  telephone  facilities  exist  they  shall  be  used  by  a 
surfman  to  report  his  arrival  at  the  patrol  post  or  halfway 
house  to  the  station  lookout,  as  well  as  any  information  perti- 
nent to  the  service,  such  as  vessels  anchored  or  passing  danger- 
ously near  the  coast.  Should  he,  after  repeated  calls  at  reason- 
able intervals,  fail  to  secure  a  response,  he  shall  return  to  the 
station  and  report  to  the  keeper  immediately  his  inability;  to 
communicate  with  the  station  lookout.  .    .      ,  -    .  . 

62.  The  keeper  shall  preserve  the  patrol  checks  xfc^ith'tii^'tit^ 
most  care  in  a  place  where  they  will  be  accessible  only  to 
himself  or,  in  his  absence,  to  the  surfman  in  charge.  He  shall 
particularly  caution  the  surfmen  against  their  loss  or  abuse, 
holding  them  liable  therefor,  and  in  case  of  loss  he  shall  in- 
vestigate the  circumstances  forthwith  and  report  the  facts  to 
the  district  superintendent.  No  surfman  shall  have  in  his  pos- 
session any  unauthorized  check  or  time-detector  key.  Should 
the  keeper  discover  any  unauthorized  check  or  time-detector 
key  in  the  possession  of  a  surfman,  he  shall  immediately  re- 
port all  the  circumstances  to  the  district  superintendent,  who 
shall  forward  the  report  to  Headquarters  and  recommend  that 
charges  be  preferred  against  such  surfman. 

63.  When  not  in  use  the  time  detectors  and  keys  therefor 
shall  remain  in  a  place  accessible  only  to  the  keeper  or,  in  his 
absence,  the  surfman  in  charge.  He  shall  not  show  the  keys 
nor  communicate  the  numbers  of  those  in  use  to  any  person 
other  than  a  commissioned  officer.  He  shall  frequently  visit 
the  key  posts,  station  lookout,  and  watch  housQ,  and  shall' 
change  the  keys  at  least  once  a  week,  at  irregular  intervals, 
and  oftener  if  deemed  necessary  to  insure  the  integrity  of  the 
patrol.  The  dates  of  such  visits  and  the  condition  of  the  posts 
and  keys  shall  be  noted  in  the  log,  but  not  the  fact  of  exchange 
or  the  number  of  keys  exchanged.    On  each  visit  he  shall  care- 


14  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

fully  inspect  the  posts,  sales,  chains,  and  keys ;  if  any  be  found 
broken,  mutilated,  or  tampered  with,  he  shall  immediately  re- 
port all  ascertainable  facts  to  the  district  superintendent,  who 
shall  forward  the  report  to  Headquarters  with  his  recom- 
mendation. He  shall  make  every  effort  to  discover  the  offender 
and  obtain  proof  of  his  guilt.  Only  one  key  shall  be  kept  in  a 
key-post  safe,  lookout,  or  watch  house  at  a  time,  and  two  keys 
bearing  the  same  number  or  making  identical  impressions  shall 
not  be  in  use  at  the  same  time  at  any  one  station. 

64.  At  4  p.  m.  each  day  the  keeper  shall  wind  the  patrol, 
clocks,  mark  and  remove  the  old  and  insert  and  mark  new 
dial  cards,  using  one  of  the  keys  in  his  possession  for  this  pur- 
pose. Before  inserting  a  dial  card  he  shall  see  that  there  is 
no  surplus  edge  beyond  the  printed  dial,  in  order  that  it  may 
revolve  freely  in  the  case.  He  shall  indicate  by  red  ink  circles 
on  each  card  removed  the  impressions  made  by  himself  and 
mark  on  the  back  thereof,  with  ink,  the  date  and  the  name  of 
the  station.  Having  properly  marked  the  card,  the  keeper 
shall  thoroughly  examine  it  to  see  that  all  required  impres-. 
sions  have  been  made  thereon  by  the  lookout  and  patrol.  At 
the  end  of  each  week  he  shall  forward  all  the  dials  that  have 
been  used,  with  the  transcript  of  the  log  for  the  corresponding 
week,  to  the  district  superintendent. 

65.  If  upon  examination  the  keeper  discovers  any  discrepancyi 
in  the  record  of  lookouts  and  patrols  as  shown  by  the  impres-^ 
sions  on  a  dial  not  properly  accounted  for  by  the  surfman  im- 
mediately upon  its  occurrence  or  upon  his  return  from  patrol, 
as  prescribed  in  article  57,  he  shall  enter  all  the  facts  con- 
nected therewith  in  the  log,  and  if  the  failure  was,  in  his  judg- 
ment, due  to  fault  or  negligence  shall  impose  such  punishment 
in  conformity  with  the  regulations,  as  he  deems  proper.  He 
shall  report  all  the  circumstances  to  the  district  superintendent. 

66.  Each  keeper  and  each  surfman  shall  be  accountable  for 
the  care  and  preservation  of  the  patrol  clocks  in  his  possession,.. 
The  surfman  on  lookout  or  patrol  shall  at  all  times  protect  the- 
clock  from  dampness,  carrying  it  under  his  coat,  if  necessary/ 
and  shall  avoid  jarring  or  striking  it  against  any  object  and 
prevent  sand  entering  the  keyholes.  Upon  each  surfman's  visit 
to  a  key  post  he  shall  carefully  inspect  the  post,  key,  safe,  and 
all  fastenings,  and,  if  any  is  found  broken,  mutilated,  or  tam- 
pered with,  he  shall  report  the  fact  to  the  keeper  immediately 
by  telephone  or  upon  his  return  to  the  station.  The  stopping 
of  ,^  patrplqjocj^,  its  failure  to  sound  the  marking  of  the  diaj, 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  15 

card,  or  any  observed  irregularity   in  or  damage  to   it  shall 
likewise  be  reported  promptly  to  the  keeper. 

67.  A  surfman  on  patrol  shall  not  deviate  from  the  prescribed 
route  along  the  beach,  except  when  necessary  for  his  personal 
safety,  and  he  shall  endeavor  to  retain  an  unobstructed  view  to 
seaward  when  forced  to  retire  inland.  Riding  on  a  bicycle,  on 
cars,  in  boats,  or  other  private  or  public  conveyances  shall  not 
be  permitted  unless  specially  authorized  by  Headquarters. 

68.  A  surfman  upon  his  return  from  patrol  shall  not  retire 
until  his  relief  is  dressed  and  ready  with  the  necessary  equip- 
ment to  take  the  beach.  Ten  minutes  is  sufhcient  for  a  man  to 
prepare  himself  to  go  on  patrol,  and  a  longer  time  shall  not  be 
allowed. 

69.  In  addition  to  the  time  detector  or  patrol  checks  pre- 
scribed in  articles  57,  58,  and  59,  each  surfman  on  patrol  shall 
carry  a  signal  holder  and  not  less  than  three  red  pyrotechnic 
signals  of  approved  type  in  fit  condition  for  use,  a  lantern  hav- 
ing a  clear  glass  globe,  lighted  or  unlighted,  as  he  may  prefer, 
a  supply  of  matches  carefully  protected  from  dampness,  ancl 
such  other  articles  as  may  be  prescribed. 

70.  When  a  surfman  on  patrol  discovers  a  wrecked  or 
stranded  vessel  he  shall  at  once  fire  a  red  pyrotechnic  signal  of 
approved  type  and  shall  immediately  notify  his  station  by  port- 
able telephone  or  flash-light  signals,  using  the  readiest  available 
of  these  means  of  communication.  The  station  lookout  shall 
answer  by  firing  one  red  pyrotechnic  signal,  unless  quicker  re- 
sponse can  be  made  by  telephone  or  flash-light  signals.  A 
surfman  on  patrol  receiving  no  answer  to  his  signal  or  call, 
shall,  if  within  easy  reach  of  a  telephone  call  box,  notify  his 
station  by  that  means  and  hasten  to  the  station  to  assist  with 
the  boat  or  other  apparatus. 

71.  A  surfman  on  patrol  who  discovers  a  vessel  dangerously 
Qear  the  shore  or  a  shoal  shall  immediately  burn  a  red  pyro- 
technic signal  as  a  warning,  and  if  he  be  provided  with  a  flash- 
light torch  he  shall  endeavor  to  get  in  communication  with  heu 
ly  means  of  it  and  inform  her  of  her  position. 

72.  If  a  vessel  be  discovered  dangerously  near  the  shore  or 
i  shoal  during  the  day,  she  shall  be  w^arned  by  hoisting  the 
proper  International  Code  signals.  In  order  that  all  members  of 
;he  crew  may  be  thoroughly  qualified  to  give  such  warnings,  each 
ceeper  and  surfman,  including  temporary  surfmen  and  substi- 
:utes,  shall  make  a  study  of  the  coast  line  embraced  within  the 
latrol  limits  of  his  station,  as  shown  by  Government  charts  and 


16  INSTRirCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GXJAUD  STATIOInTo. 

verified  by  frequent  soundings  and  by  taking  bearings  of  shoals, 
headlands,  lighthouses,  buoys,  and  other  daymarks.  Before 
sending  a  new  surfman  or  a  substitute  upon  patrol  the  keeper 
shall  instruct  him  on  what  bearing  or  at  what  distance  offshore 
an  approaching  vessel  shall  be  warned  of  her  danger. 

SUEFMEN.  ,» 

I 

80.  Surf  men,  temporary  surf  men,  and  substitutes  shall  reside 
at  the  station  while  it  is  in  commission,  and  shall  not  absent 
themselves  therefrom  except  when  on  duty,  leave,  or  liberty. 

81.  A  surfman  on  lookout  shall  keep  a  record  of  all  passing 
vessels,  and  the  number  of  each  class  shall  be  entered  in  the  log. 
He  shall  not  sit  down  or  lie  down,  sleep,  read,  or  receive 
visitors,  or  do  anything  else  that  Will  tend  to  interfere  with  the 
proper  discharge  of  his  duties.  He  shall  immediately  report  to 
the  keeper  or  person  in  charge  of  the  station  all  occurrences 
which  involve  or  seem  lil^ely  to  involve  danger  to  or  loss  of  life 
or  property.  He  shall  not  leave  the  lookout  unless  properly 
relieved.  '  r,  .    i     .  .     '"^    ; 

'  82.  When  any  member  of  h; station* crew Jidisco vers  a.  vessel 
wrecked,  stranded,  or  in  distress  he  shall  at  once  report  the 
fact  to  the  keeper  or  surfman  in  charge ;  if  on  patrol  he  shall  be 
governed  by  the  provisions  of  article  70  and  iiniiiediately  re? 
port  to  the  keeper  or  surfman  in  charge.  • 

■■•:'••■        •'   - ■,■.■■;.  •({ 

CABB'AND  PBESKBVATION  OF  PBOPKRTY.  ^ 

.:..    .:.<    ..:       ,       .-.:    ..,    ,:  ,     ■.  ,^ 

91.  No  unauthorized  changes  sliall  be  made  in  any  building 
at  a  station.  ,  ; 

92.  The  keeper  shall  each  month  make  an  examination  of  the 
foundations  of  all  buildings,  and  shall  see  that  sand  is  kept 
below  the  sills,  joists,  etc.  He  shall  see  that  the  skirting 
around  the  foundations  is  sound,  jiromptly  renewing  any  de- 
cayed boards.  . 

93.  He  shall  see  that  gutters  and;  downspduts  are  kept  cles^d 
of  trash,  leaves,  or  sand.  '  -        >>  ■ 

94.  H^  shall  see  that  the  floors  are  kept  clean  and  oiled  at 
frequent  intervals  with  the  prescribed  preparation.      ^ 

'■'■  95.  He  shall  see  that  all  sashes  are  kept  In  good  operative 
tiondition,  renewing  sash  cords  when  necessary.  •' 

96.  He  shall  see  that  all  locks,  knobs,  and  hardware  gener- 
ally are  set  up  snug,  and  shall  not  permit  anything  to  get  loose. 


INSTEUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  QUABD  STATIONS.  17 

97.  He  shall  fretiuently  inspect  the  roofs  lor  leaks,  and  make 
prompt  repairs  hefore  damage  occurs,  !' 

98.  He  shall  see  that  barns  and  stables  are  kept  in  good  sani- 
tary condition  and  in  good  repair. 

99.  He  shall  see  that  boathouses,  inclines,  etc.,  are  kept  la 
thorough  repair  and  clear  of  sand  and  other  obstructions. 

11)0.  He  shall  see  that  all  buildings  not  continuously  in  use 
are  thoroughly  aireil  at  frequent  intervals. 

101.  He  shall  see  that  the  launchways  are  kept  clear  of  sand 
and  other  obstructions,  and  tliat  the  launching  carriages,  boat 
wagons,  etc.,  have  all  moving  parts  thoroughly  clean  and  oiled. 

102.  The  keeper  shall  immediately  report  to  Headquarters 
the  loss,  theft,  or  destruction  of  any  article  of  value,  giving 
the  attendant  circumstances  and,  if  possible,  the  date  when  the 
article  was  received.  Such  articles  shall  not  be  reported  by  a 
board  of  survey,  but  entered  as  **  lost,"  **  destroyed,"  etc.,  with 
date  of  occurrence,  in  colunm  of  **  Remarks  "  in  the  **  Record  of 
public  proi)erty." 

103.  He  shall  cause  each  shot  line,  hawser,  and  whip  to  be 
caiefully  measured  at  U»ast  once  each  year  and  note  the  meas- 
urements, with  th(»  datt\s  at  which  they  were  made,  in  the 
*' f{(voiNi  of  public  proi^erty  **  opposite  the  names  of  the  re- 
sp.  rfi\.'  articles.  All  new  lines  of  any  kiml  shall  be  measured 
iiiinicUiately  after  they  are  received  and  their  respective  lengths 
entered  in  the  record.  •  J-  '- 

104.  He  shall  see  that  the  screens  furnished  for  windows  and 
doors  of  the  station  and  detached  kitchen  and  pantry  6 re  kept 
In  place  and  screenefl  doors  kept  closed  at  all  times  when  their 
IK'  I'  ill  use  every  effort  to  keep  all  living 

liens,  dining  rooms,  pantries,  and  food 
tree  irom  inrs,  in(>s(|uiin«'s,  roaches,  and  vermin.  He  shall  see 
that  all  screens  for  wlia^ows  and  doors  fit  properly  and  are  kept 
In  good  repair,  and  shall  make  requisition  for  the  material 
necessary  therefor. 

105  (1)  When  a  field  assistant,  construction  and  repair,  for- 
wards to  Heatlquarters  a  recommendation  for  construction  and 
repair  work  which  he  recommends  be  performed  entirely  by  a 
station  crew,  he  shall  submit  therewith  a  full  and  complete  de- 
scription of  the  proposed  work  and  a  schedule  of  materials  re- 
quired for  the  same,  both  in  triplicate.  In  the  absence  of  In- 
structions to  the  contrary,  the  foregoing  procedure  will  termi- 
nate the  field  assistant's  connection  with  the  matter. 

67385''— 17 2 


1«  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

(2)  If  the  recommendation  of  the  tield  assistant  is  approved 
by  Headquarters,  such  description  and  schedule  of  materials 
will  be  forwarded  to  the  district  superintendent  with  instruc- 
tions to  secure  proposals  for  materials  in  conformity  with  the 
requirements  of  the  regulations. 

(3)  If  any  of  these  proposals  is  accepted  by  Headquarters, 
the  district  superintendent  will  be  advised  accordingly,  and 
thereupon  the  keeper  will  be  directed  by  the  district  superin- 
tendent to  have  the  work  performed  by  the  station  crew  as 
soon  as  practicable  after  the  materials  have  been  properly  de- 
livered at  the  station. 

106.  When  so  requested  by  a  field  assistant,  construction  and 
repair,  a  keeper  shall  see  that  the  members  of  his  crew  render 
such  assistance  as  may  be  practicable  to  such  field  assistant  in 
the  prosecution  of  his  work  at  the  station,  when  it  will  not 
interfere  with  the  regular  station  duties,  wTeck  or  rescue  work, 
or  with  reasonable  hours  for  rest. 

107.  He  shall  see  that  the  beach  apparatus  and  every  part 
thereof  is,  after  actual  service  or  drill,  thoroughly  cleaned  and 
free  from  sand  and  dirt  and  restored  to  its  proper  place  in  the 
liouse  in  readiness  for  instant  use;  that  all  metallic  parts  are 
dried  and  wiped  with  an  oiled  cloth  and  all  lines  and  liawsers 
thoroughly  dried  at  the  first  opportunity;  that  lanterns  and 
torches  are  filled  and  trimmed,  and  that  the  proper  number  of 
signals,  water  lights,  charges  of  powder,  etc.,  are  in  their 
places. 

108.  When  a  station  is  placed  out  of  commission,  he  shall 
see — 

,  (a)  That  the  station  and  everything  belonging  thereto  is  in 
the  best  possible  condition  as  to  cleanliness  and  for  preserva- 
tion. 

;  <ft)  That  the  crew  remove  all  their  clothing  and  personal 
effects,  except  the  mattresses,  pillows,  and  bedding  of  those 
members  who  intend  to  return  when  the  station  is  next  placed 
in  commission,  from  the  lockers  and  station  premises  and  de- 
liver the  locker  keys  to  him. 

(c)  That  the  mattresses,  pillows,  and  bedding  left  are  clean, 
protected  from  moths,  inventoried,  neatly  stowed,  and  that  a 
copy  of  the  inventory  is  given  to  him  and  the  other  retained  by 
the  owner  of  the  articles. 

id)  That  toilets  and  privies  are  thoroughly  cleaned  and  dis- 
infected, and  that  the  water  supply  for  toilets  not  in  use  is 
drained  and  shut  off,  and  that  every  precaution  is  taken  to  pre- 
vent water  pipes  freezing  and  bursting. 


rNSTRTJCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  19 

(e)  That  all  refuse  is  burned,  buried,  or  removed  to  a  safe 
distance  from  the  station.  .        .        W,    <'      '       i;    >       '; 

(/)  That  all  bright  and  exposied  metar  ^drtf  ^f  ^l^pai'atus 
and  working  tools  is  free  from  rust,  wiped  off,  and  oiled ;  thn^ 
all  fire  extinguishers  are  ready  for  use  and  placed  where  they 
will  not  freeze  or  deteriorate  from  cold,  and  that,  where  no 
danger  from  freezing  exists,  fire  buckets  and  barrels  are  filled. 

iff)  That  all  water  Is  drained  from  the  water  jackets  and 
pipes  of  the  engines  of  power  boats  dismantled  or  laid  up  and 
of  hoisting  and  pumping  engines  and  pumps,  and  that  all  boat 
<bilges  are  clean  and  dry. 

**•  109.  The  hand  signal  torch  shall  be  protected  from  moisture 
iind  excessive  heat,  as  these  are  detrimental  to  the  dry  batteries 
Und  thig  Operation  of  the  torch.  The  fiber  sleeve  should  be 
Interposed  between  the  metal  case  and  the  contact  spring  when 
the  torch  is  not  in  use  in  order  to  prevent  draining  the  battery. 
The  dry  battery  should  be  removed  from  the  case  as  soon  as  the 
battery  becomes  exhausted  in  order  to  protect  it  from  swelling 
in  the  case.  Spare  dry  batteries  should  be  kept  in  a  moderately 
heated  dry  ^l^ck';  " 

itetoj  '>rtr  hifn  *^;4:  f-.     Painting  Stations.  >! 

:'V>  ■■      ..      ■    '  '.:i 

fyr,jl21^,Tl^^rfQllowing  paints  will  be  used  when  needed  for  re- 

^inting  the  buildings  at  Coast  Guard  stations:  mj 

.,  OUTSIDE.;  j, 

(a)  Outside  white  paint,  mixed:  For  walls  of  buildings,  in- 
cluding trim ;  also  fences  and  fl^agpoles.  The  walls  of  unpainted 
buildings  and  fences  constructed  of  rough  lumber  should  be 
whitewashed.  ,,    ^ 

(&)  Green  paint,  mixed:  For  underside  o?f  pprch  roofs  and 
for  blinds. 

r  ,  (c)  Light  lead-color  paipt,  mixed:  For  porch  floors  and 
treads  of  outside  steps  and  for  repainting  aU  painted  floors  In 
buildings. 

(d)  Red  rppf  paint, mixed  :  For  roofs.  f 

..;•  1 

INSIDE.  .,| 

(a)  Inside  white  paint,  mixed:  For  inside  trim.  / 

(ft)  Regula.tion  straw-color  paint,  mixed:  For  plastered  and 
ceiled  walls  when  painted. 


flO  INSTEtrOTlONS  FOR  COAST  OTTARD  STATIONS. 

(c)  Liuht  green  paint  (Nuvy  No.  34),  mixed:  For  plastered 
and  ceiled  walls  when  painted. 

(d)  Varnish,  hard-oil  finish:  For  ceilings  that  are  to  be  kept 
bright. 

(e)  Floor  oil:  For  all  finished  floors  and  treads  of  stairs  not 
painted. 

X22.  Buildings  which  have  not  been  painted  will  not  now  be 
painted.  Shingles  on  roofs  and  walls  that  have  not  been  stained 
or  painted  will  not  now  be  stained  or  painted. 

123.  Repainting. — Repainting  of  entire  buildings  will  not  be 
done  without  permission  from  Headquarters,  but  touching  up 
should  be  done  when  needed  to  keep  the  surfaces  properly  pro- 
tected from  the  weather.  When  parts  are  dirty  or  dingy  they 
shall  not  be  painted  for  the  purpose  of  giving  a  clean  appearance 
so  long  as  the  old  paint  is  sufficient  to  protect  the  parts.  Such 
parts  shall  be  scrubbed  as  often  as  necessary,  and  no  paint 
shall  be  applied  until  the  old  paint  is  worn  thin.  This  applies 
to  the  exterior  of  buildings  as  well  as  to  the  interior.  In  cases 
where  the  paint  is  at  present  excessively  thick,  cracked,  peel- 
ing, or  blistered  it  shall  be  scraped  off  and  surfaces  sand- 
papered before  any  more  paint  is  applied.  When  a  blowtorch 
is  used  care  shall  be  taken  regarding  fire  risks,  and  the  torch 
must  not  be  inverted  while  lighted. 

124.  Shingles. — Where  shingles  on  buidings  have  been  stained 
by  the  application  of  regular  shingle  stain  the  same  treatment 
will  be  continued. 

125.  Floor  oil. — Floor  oil  should  be  prepared  in  accordance 
with  the  following  formula : 

Formula. 

Commercial  grade  paraffin  oil,  2  gallons. 

Kerosene  oil,  1  gallon. 

Mix  and  apply  to  floors. 
This  mixture  will  form  a  light  oil  which  is  readily  absorbed 
by  the  pores  of  the  wood.  The  oil  can  be  applied  by  means  of 
rags.  In  no  case  should  this  oil  be  applied  to  dirty  floors. 
Before  each  application  the  floors  should  be  thoroughly  cleaned 
and  scrubbed.  For  scrubbing  the  floors  preliminary  to  the  ap- 
plication of  the  floor  oil,  a  strong  solution  of  soap  powder  may 
be  used;  otherwise  soap  may  be  used  in  the  ordinary  manner. 
No  soda  or  cleaning  materials  should  be  used  other  than  those 
above  mentioned.    After  a  floor  has  been  thoroughly  cleaned 


INSTETTCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GtTARD  STATIONS.         21 

and  allowed  to  dry,  the  floor  oil  should  be  applied.  Only  the 
amount  of  oil  that  the  wood  will  absorb  should  be  applied  at 
one  time.  The  floor  should  then  be  given  a  fair  polish.  It 
may  then  be  kept  clean  by  wiping  up  with  a  damp  cloth.  How- 
ever, should  the  floor  become  so  dirty  that  wiping  up  with  a 
damp  cloth  does  not  remedy  the  condition,  it  may  be  scrubbed 
as  above  described  and  the  oil  treatment  renewed.  Cloths  used 
for  applying  the  floor  oil  should  be  burned  after  using  and  not 
left  around  so  as  to  endanger  the  buildings  by  fire. 

126.  Whitetvash. — Whitewash  should  be  prepared  as  follows: 
Slake  half  a  bushel  of  unslaked  lime  with  boiling  water,  keeping 
it  covered  during  the  process;  strain  it  and  add  a  peck  of  salt 
dissolved  in  warm  water;  3  pounds  of  ground  rice  put  in  boil- 
ing water  and  boiled  to  a  thin  paste ;  half  a  pound  of  powdered 
Spanish  whiting  and  a  pound  of  clear  glue  dissolved  in  warm 
water ;  mix  these  well  together  and  let  the  mixture  stand  for 
several  days.  Iveep  the  wash  thus  prepared  in  a  kettle  or 
portable  furnace  and  when  used  put  it  on  as  hot  as  possible 
with  painter's  or  whitewash  brushes. 

127.  Windoivs. — ^AU  window  sashes  must  be  kept  well  puttied. 
When  it  is  found  that  the  old  putty  is  cracked  it  should  be  en- 
tirely removed  and  sashes  allowed  to  become  perfectly  dry, 
after  which  they  will  be  primed  with  white-lead  paint,  and 
when  paint  has  dried  sufficiently  to  become  sticky  the  sashes 
may  then  be  reputtied,  replaced,  and  paint  and  putty  allowed 
to  harden  together.  When  putty  becomes  hard  it  may  then  be 
painted.  In  so  doing  care  must  be  used  not  to  get  paint  on  the 
glass  and  make  a  ragged  appearance. 

128.  Gutters  and  down  spouts. — Gutters  and  down  spouts 
shall  be  painted  outside  the  same  color  as  the  adjacent  parts  of 
the  buildings  to  which  they  are  attached.  The  inside  surface 
of  gutters  shall  be  painted  with  red  roof  paint. 

129.  Scrubbing  and  cleaning. — To  clean  painted  woodwork  or 
otlier  painted  surface,  scrub  with  clean,  fresh  water  and  soap. 
If  necessary,  a  small  amount  of  sal  soda,  ammonia,  or  washing 
compound  may  be  put  in  the  water.  After  scrubbing,  wipe  off 
with  clean  water  and  cloth. 

130.  Preparation  of  work  for  painting. — Paint  will  not  adhere 
to  nor  dry  upon  wood  or  metal  which  is  not  perfectly  clean  and 
entirely  free  from  moisture,  dust,  soot,  and  grease.  The  sur- 
face to  be  painted  must  be  thoroughly  dry,  and  no  painting 
should  be  done  in  rainy  or  foggy  weather  or  just  after  a  frost. 
Dust  and  soot  must  be  removed  by  brushes  and  cloths  and  by 
washing  with  hot  soft  water  and  soap. 


82  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

131.  Puttying. — Before  painting,  all  nail  holes,  cracks,  etc., 
should  be  carefully  puttied. 

132.  Preparation  of  plastered  walls  for  painting. — The  walls 
must  be  thoroughly  dry  and  brushed  free  from  all  dust  and 
loose  particles  of  mortar.  They  should  then  be  primed  with 
two  or  three  coats  of  linseed  oil,  and  when  they  are  dry  the 
colored  finishing  coats  should  be  put  on.         ,-  <rr^ 

133.  Washes. — Before  applying  a  new  coat  of  wash,  all  loose 
or  peeling  sections  of  washes  previously  applied  should  be 
scraped  off.  Surfaces  should  be  scraped  when  necessary  to 
keep  the  wash  from  becoming  excessively  thick. 

134.  Instructions  for  applying  paint. — Paint  should  be  put  on 
by  strokes  parallel  with  the  grain  of  the  wood.  Long,  smooth 
pieces  like  window  and  door  casings  should  be  finished  by 
drawing  the  brush  carefully  along  the  whole  length  if  practi- 
cable or  by  smoothing  on  to  the  painted  surface  as  the  work 
progresses,  so  that  there  may  be  no  breaks  in  the  lines.  If  the 
brush  is  held  too  obliquely  to  the  work  it  will  leave  the  paint 
in  thick  masses  wherever  it  is  first  applied  after  being  dipped 
into  the  pot,  and  the  surface  will  be  daubed  but  not  painted. 
A  second  coat  should  not  be  put  on  until  the  one  previously 
applied  has  become  thoroughly  dry  and  hard,  which  will  never 
be  the  case  so  long  as  it  is  sticky  in  the  least  to  the  touch. 
Each  coat  should  be  of  the  same  thickness  throughout,  other- 
wise the  work  when  completed  will  have  an  unfinished  and 
slovenly  appearance.  Paint  put  on  too  thin  after  priming  will 
crack  in  drying ;  if  put  on  too  thick,  it  will  blister,  wrinkle,  and 
peel  off.  In  using  the  brush  where  there  is  sufficient  space, 
draw  long  strokes  to  extend  the  color  in  a  smooth  and  uniform 
manner.  Where  the  space  is  contracted  or  rough  the  paint 
should  be  laid  on  in  dabs  for  the  purpose  of  getting  it  into  the 
recesses  and  places  where  the  surface  is  unequal,  and  then  care- 
fully smoothed  out. 

135.  Care  of  paints. —  (1)  Paints  shall  be  kept  in  a  dry  place? 
and  driers  or  varnish  in  tins  or  bottles.  The  paint  remaining 
in  a  partially  empty  keg,  pail,  or  tin  can  should  be  covered  with 
oil  and  a  cover  placed  over  the  same.  Paint  shall  never  be  left 
to  dry  or  left  exposed  to  the  air  or  weather. 

(2)  When  paint  is  opened  for  use  it  should  be  thoroughly 
stirred  so  that  there  is  no  thick  paint  remaining  in  the  bottom 
of  the  can.  The  paint  should  be  kept  well  stirred  while  it  i» 
being  applied  in  order  that  it  may  be  kept  of  uniform  thickness;^ 
Should  the  paint  in  the  pot  Jbecome  too  thick  while  it  is  bein^ 


INSTRtrCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GtTAED  STATIONS.         ^ 

applied  it  may  be  thinned  by  the'  addition  of  linseed  oil  and 
turpentine  or  petroleum  spirits  in  proper  quantities. 

136.  Varnishing. — In  using  varnish  great  care  should  be  taken 
to  have  the  surfaces  quite  clean,  washing  them  if  necessary. 
The  cans  should  be  kept  corked,  the  brushes  free  from  oil  and 
dirt,  and  the  work  protected  from  dust  or  sm6ke.  Varnish 
should  be  applied  in'  very  thin  coats  laid  on  in  the  direction  of 
the  fibers  of  the  wood  and  sparingly  at  the  angles.  No  second 
or  subsequent  coat  of  varnish  should  be  applied  until  the  pre- 
vious one  is  permanently  hard,  otlierwise  the  drying  of  the  un- 
der coat  will  be  stopped.  The  surface  of  natural  wood  which 
fs  to  be  varnished  should  be  "filled*^  before  the  varnish  Is 
applied  to  prevent  It  from  be^ri^  waste*  ■%>y-«ln*ing  into  tfee 
pores  of  the  wood.       '^    ^'-t--:  ';■.    f.  '.-f    ^!i    •:■■';;,  Mi 

137.  Use  and  care  of  hrusHes.-^'LA'rge  paint  brushes  should 
be  used  for  pritning  and  painting  ov6r  large  surfaces  which 
require  considerable  quantities  of  paint.  Small  brushes  should 
be  sirnilarly  used  for  smaller  surfaces.  Separate  brushes 
should  be  used  for  each  color.  If  there  is  a  shortage  of  brushes 
and  it  is  desired  to  use  them  for  a  different  color,  wash  them 
in  linseed  oil  and  turpentine  arid  then  with  soap  and  water. 
The  oil  or  turpentine  used  for  washing  should  be  saved  for 
mixing  paint  of  the  same  color.  It  1^  important  to  properly 
swell  a  new  brush  before  putting  it  to  use,  but  under  no  cir- 
cumstances should  it  be  put  into  water  to  soak,  for  this  tvill 
cause  the  brush  always  to  work  flabby,  and  if  the  bristles  are 
of  fine  gi*ade  the  brush  will  twist  out  of  shape.  The  best 
method  of  swelling  the  head  of  a  brush  that  has  dried  out  is 
to  separate  the  bristles  carefully  and  pour  a  tablespoonful  of 
water  on  the  brush  end  of  the  handle  and  then  stand  the  brush 
"With  the  bristles  up  until  the  water  has  been  absorbed.  This 
will  swell  the  head  and  make  it  as  fitm  as  whea  made.  Brushes 
which  have  been  used  must  not  be  left  to  dry  with  the  paint  in 
them.  They  must  be  kept  soft  by  immeri^ing  them  in  enougli 
liuseed  oil  to  Cover  the  bristles  within  one-half  ihCh  of  the 
tlhding.  Place  sufficient  linseed  oil  in  a  can,  pail,  or  jar  and 
tiang  or  suspend  the  brushes  in  the  oil,  the  bristles  to  be  frefe 
of  the  bottom.  Brushes  standing  in  water  with  bristles  iand 
ferrules  wholly  immersed  will  soon  be  unfit  for  use.  When 
'through  using  brushes  and  they  are  to  be  laid  away  for  S6me 
time,  they  should  first  be  washed  in  turpentine,  then  with  soap 
a^d  water  uhtU  all  taint  l^'iitodVW,' land  theti  thor<^^^ 
dried:" "  ■  ■'-'  ^^^"•-  '  '^'''  *■•"''  "^^-'-'  ^  ^^^^■'-    >^  '  '  -  '  -•   -■■■■^n 


^         INSTEtrCTIOKS  FOE  OOAST  OXTAEB  STATIONS. 

i.r  BOATS. 

General  Instbuctions. 

141.  All  boats  shall  be  kept  clean,  in  good  condition,  and 
:properly  fitted  with  all  necessary  equipments  for  performing 
efficient  service  and  securing  the  safety  of  their  crews.  The 
full  equipment  of  boats  shall  be  kept  in  them  at  all  times  and 
neatly  stowed. 

142.  Upon  returning  from  service  or  drill  each  boat  and  its 
equipment  shall  be  thoroughly  dried  and  put  in  order  at  the 
first  opportunity.  Deck  hatches  of  self-bailing  boats  shall  be 
kept  open  during  daylight  and  the  interiors  thoroughly  aired 
and  dried  while  the  boat  is  in  the  boathouse. 

143.  Care  must  be  taken  to  prevent  the  accumulation  of  oil, 
gasoline,  and  water  in  the  bottoms  of  all  power  boats,  and  the 
bilges  must  be  cleaned  out  frequently. 

144.  Boats  that  are  ordinarily  kept  in  the  water  shall  be 
carefully  inspected  each  day  and  the  water  line  kept  free  of 
marine  growth. 

145.  Each  man  shall  keep  his  life  preserver  on  his  thwart. 
Each  man  shall  keep  the  shoulder  strings  of  his  cork  life  pre- 
server crossed  and  knotted  at  the  proper  length  and  the  waist 
strings  tied  loosely  in  front  with  a  slipknot. 

146.  The  keeper  and  every  other  member  of  the  crew,  except 
the  man  operating  the  engine  of  a  power  lifeboat,  shall  wear  a 
life  preserver  on  all  occasions  of  drill  or  a(:jtual  service  in 
boats.  The  life  preserver  for  the  man  operating  the  engine  of 
a  power  lifeboat  shall  be  kept  near  at  hand  when  not  worn. 
If  the  men  are  required  to  w^ork  on  board  a  wreck  and  the  life 
preservers  become  impediments,  they  may  be  removed  while  on 
board,  but  must  be  put  on  before  entering  the  boat. 

147.  The  life  preserver  for  each  person  shall  be  marked  with 
liis  watch  number  on  the  inside  of  the  middle  of  the  back. 

,,  148.  The  after  thwart  of  each  boat  shall  be  designated  as 
No,  1,  the  next  forward  thwart  as  No.  2,  and  so  on.  The  odd- 
numbered  men  will  take  positions  on  the  starboard  side  and 
even-numbered  ones  on  the  port  side.  The  senior  petty  officer 
:»nd  the  No.  2  man  shall  pull  on  the  after  thwart. 
9  149.  The  oars  shall  be  numbered  from  aft  forward,  each 
stroke  oar  being  numbered  I,  the  oars  for  the  thwart  next 
forward  II,  and  so  on.  The  numbers  shall  be  marked  in  roman 
numerals  on  the  loom  3  inches  from  the  handle  on  each  side, 


INSTEUCTIONS  FOE  COAST  GTTAEI)  STATIONS.  25 

,so  that  the  number  shall  be  up  when  the  oar  is  lying  flat  on  the 
blade.  The  oars  for  each  side  shall  be  kept  on  each  outboard 
side  of  the  thwarts,  with  the  blades  forward. 

150.  A  boat  shall  never  be  left  alongside  a  vessel  or  wreck 
without  a  boat  keeper ;  in  rough  weather  there  shall  be  at  least 
two  boat  keepers. 

INSTRUCTIONS  SELF^BATLING  PULUNG  ^URFBOAT  WITH  BOAT  WAGON. 

4,.,  155.  The  boat  wagon,  with  the  boat  loaded  upon  it,  shall  be 
kept  in  the  boat  room  with  the  bow  out  toward  the  doors. 
Drag  ropes  of  2-inch  manila  rope  shall  be  fitted  to  the  eyes  on 
the  rear-axle  braces,  having  one  loop  in  each  rope  large  enough 
to  pass  easily  over  a  man's  shoulder ;  and  tw^o  other  drag  ropes 
shall  be  fitted,  one  on  each  side,  to  the  forward  crosspiece  of 
the  hounds,  with  tw^o  loops  on  each  rope.  Side  lashings  of 
whip-line  stuff  sufficiently  long  to  make  fast  around  the  gun- 
wale of  the  boat  shall  be  fitted  into  the  eyes  on  the  rear  axle. 
A  check  rope  of  whip-line  stuff  li  fathoms  long  shall  be  spliced 
around  the  after  rear  axle  on  the  left  side  for  taking  a  turn 
around  the  bilge  keel  of  the  boat  to  prevent  its  running  down 
the  reach  when  unloading. 

156.  The  boat  shall  never  be  dragged  over  the  ground  with 
the  water-ballast  tank  valve  open,  as  the  sand  will  be  forced 
into  the  tank.  If  sand  accumulates  in  the  tank,  it  must  be  re- 
moved. This  may  be  done  by  taking  out  the  valve  and  using 
a  piece  of  hoop  iron  or  a  long-handled  spoon.  Forward  and  aft 
iPf  the  valve  well  removable  sections  of  the  deck  will  be  found, 
under  which  are  handholes  in  the  tank,  through  which  the  sand 
.can  be  pushed  to  the  valves.  When  allowed  to  accumulate  it 
often  is  impracticable  to  remove  the  sand  from  the  outside, 
therefore  the  tank  should  be  flushed  with  clear  water  after 
each  launching  in  surf  containing  sand.  Securely  screw  in  the 
-^and  plates  before  replacing  the  deck. 

Boat  Equipment. 

self-bailing  pulling  boat. 

■  161.  A  medical  kit,  fitted  into  an  oiled  canvas  bag,  and  a  boat 
compass  shall  be  kept  ready  at  all  times  and  shall  be  carried 
in  the  boat  which  Is  being  used  for  drill  or  service. 

«    162.  Care  shall  be  taken  that  articles  of  equipment  are  se- 

^iBured  so  that  they  can  not  get  adrift. 


26         INStRtJCTIOlTS  FOR  COAST  GITAUB  STATIONS. 

163.  Each  self-bailinsj  pullinp:  boat  shall  be  provided  with  the 
'following  equipment : 

One  set  of  oars. 
'  "*'^wo  si^are  oars. 
'^'■O'ne  steering  oar. 

One  painter. 

Two  boat  hooks — one  forward,  one  aft. 

One  set  of  rowlocks  and  one  si)are  rowlock. 

Two  boat  hatchets,  one  forward  and  one  aft,  kept  iij  pockets 
on  the  inside  of  the  boat  and  secured  with  a  lanyard  2  feet 
long  spliced  in  a  hole  in  the  end  of  the  handle  of  each.  An  eye 
6  inches  long  will  be  spliced  in  the  other  end  of  the  lanyard  to 
slip  over  the  hatchet  after  the  lanyard  is  passed  around  the 
inside  gunwale,  thus  securing  the  safety  of  the  hatchet. 

Two  boat  stretchers  for  each  thwart. 
'    Heaving  stick  and  line,  to  be  stowed  forward. 

One  foghorn. 

One  "water  light.'* 

One  lantern.  '     ' 

y  One  medical  kit  fitted  into  an  biled  canvas  bag. 
'- '  Syars  and  sails,  if  furnished.        "' 

A  life  preserver  for  the  keeper  and  each  member  of  the  crew. 

Eight  spare  life  preservers,  two  secured  on  the  under  side  of 
each  thwart. 

One  anchor  secured  to  the  bottom  boards  amidships. 
'One  anchor  line,  the  length  to  be  according  to  the  depth  of 
water  in  the  vicinity  of  the  station,  but  not  less  than  15  fathoms. 

One  hand  grapnel  with  15  fathoms  of  l^-inch  line  stowed 
forward.,      '        '  " 

One  5-gallon  water  breaker,  filled,  secured  against  the  for- 
ward bulkhead  (not  required  on  the  Great  Lakes). 

Two  canvas  drogues  and  fittings;  one  stowed  aft  and  one 
forward  on  the  rail.  •""' 

One  2^-foot  wigwag  flag  in  a  cover,  secured  aft  (to  be  at- 
tached to  a  boat  hook  when  needed ) . 

Two  semaphore  signal  flags. 

Righting  lines  of  18-thread  manila,  18  feet  long  in  the  clear, 
will  be  spliced  around  the  inside  gunwales,  one  on  each  side 
of  the  boat  abreast  of  each  thwart.  The  ends  of  these  lines  will 
be  provided  with  cedar  floats,  4^  inches  long  by  3  inches  in  di- 
ameter, tapered,  and  confined  at  each  end  by  a  Matthew  Walker 
knot;  one  to  be  worked  before  and  the  other  after  the  float  is 
put  on.  The  righting  lines  will  be  kept  neatly  coiled  on  the 
thwarts,  but  not  stopped. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  S7 

Life  lines  of  15-tliread  mauilti,  without  floats,  will  be  looped 
from  gunwales  at  equal  distances  on  both  sides,  the  bights  to 
be  sufficiently  long  in  the  waist  to  reach  the  water  line,  to  be 
used  as  stirrups  in  climbing  into  the  boat. 

f-  ■■       •-.::        ■   ■'  ■    .  -i:.i-  '.       •; 

SELF'BAILlNG  POWER   SURFBOAT. 

164.  This  type  of  boat  shall  be  provided  with  the  same  equip- 
ment as  is  prescribed  for  the  self-bailing  pulling  surfboat,  and 
the  following  additional:  '  •  »    • 

One  rudder. 
':    One  tiller.  .[«j-iiiv/»l 

One  fire  extinguisher  of  approved  type  for  extinguishing  bum- 
tog  gasoline.  ho.-       . 

Two  side  lights,  one  red  and  one  green. 

One  stern  light,  white.  •  ' 

One  whistle. 

S^LF:eAIIJ]^Q   POWER  jIOIFEBOAT. 

165:  lliis  type' of  l)oai  sWall  be  provided  with  the  same  equip- 
ment, except  the  righting  lines,  as  is  prescribed  for  the  self- 
bailing  pulling  surfboat,  and  the  following  additional : 

One  tdler. 

Two  fire  extinguishers  of  approved  type  for  extinguishing 
burning  gasoline. 

Two  side  lights,  one  red  and  one  green. 

One  white  forward  running  light. 

One  white  stern  light. 

One  bell. 

One  whistle. 

One  3-inch  manila  hawser. 
^^,One  breast  life  belt. 

Painting  Boats. 

171.  All  boats  at  stations  shall  be  painted  in  accordance  with 
these  instructions.  All  woodwork  that  is  finished  bright,  with 
the  exception  of  the  oars,  shall  be  varnished  with  '*  Valspar" 
or  other  approved  varnish. 


POWER   LIFEBOATS. 


■■>•,{ 


)\\>'\i< 


172.  Parts  painted  tchite. — The  outside  of  the  boat  from  4 
inches  above  the  water  line  to  gunwale,  except  the  guards. 


^8         INSTRUCTIONS  70K  COAST  aVARB  STATIONS. 

luside  of  boat  above  top  line  of  thwarts. 

Outside  of  end-boxes  above  top  line  of  thwarts. 
..,.  Tops  of  end-boxes. 

Inside  of  forward  end-box.  m 

Inside  of  after  end-box  (engine  space)  except  the  floor  and 
a  strip  1  foot  wide  just  above  the  floor  and  extending  around 
the  entire  inside. 

All  work  not  visible. 

Parts  painted  regulation  straw  color. — Deck. 

Inboard  side  and  top  of  the  side  air  cases,  including  air-case 
battens. 

Outside  athwartship  bulkheads  of  end-boxes  below  top  line  of 
thwaxts. 

Thwarts  from  inner  edge  of  inboard  battens  on  top  of  side 
air  cases  to  outboard  ends. 

Parts  painted  lead  color. — Deck  of  after  end-box  (engine 
space). 

A  strip  1  foot  wide  just  above  the  deck  and  extending  around 
entire  inside  of  after  end-box  (engine  space). 

Parts  finished  bright. — Thwarts  between  side  air  cases. 

POWER    SURFBOATS     (SELF-BAILING). 

173.  Parts  painted  white. — The  outside  of  the  boat  above  the 
water  line  to  the  gunwale. 

Inside  of  boat  above  the  deck. 

Outside  of  end  air-case  boxes  above  the  deck. 

Inside  and  outside  of  hatch  box  over  engine  space. 

All  work  not  visible. 

Parts  painted  regulation  straw  color. — ^Deck. 

POWER    SURFBOATS     (OPEN). 

174.  Parts  painted  white. — The  outside  of  the  boat  above  the 
water  line  to  the  gunwale. 

Inside  of  boat  fi'om  the  bends  to  the  gunwale. 
Outside  of  end  air-case  boxes  above  the  deck. 
Parts  painted  regulation  straw  color. — Insides  of  bottoms  of 
boats  to  the  bends. 
All  bottom  boards. 
Engine  covers. 

175.  Parts  finished  bright  in  all  boats. — Gunwales. 
Guards. 


r^ 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  29 

Quarter  bollards. 

Spars. 

Oars. 

Stretchers. 

Steering  gratings. 

Water  breakers. 

Thwarts  (except  as  provided  for  power  lifeboats). 

Towing  bitts. 

Stern  sheets  (seats). 

BOTTOMS    OF   BOATS. 

176.  The  bottoms  of  power  lifeboats  which  are  kept  in  salt 
water  shall  be  painted  with  green  antifouling  copper  paint  to  4 
inches  above  the  water  line.  Power  lifeboats  which  are  ordl- 
uarily  kept  in  the  boathouse  and  such  boats  at  stations  on 
fresh  water  shall  have  the  bottom  painted,  as  specified,  with 
ordinary  green  paint.  The  bottoms  of  all  other  boats  shall  be 
j;)ainted  to  the  water  line  with  the  san;ie  J^j^,  .otj  P^^tQt  ^^(}^ 


SELF-BAILING   SURFBOATS. 

174a.  Parts  painted  white. — The  outside  of  boat  above  water 
line  to  gunwale. 

Inside  of  boat  nl)ove  deck. 

Outside  of  end  air-case  boxes  above  deck. 

All  work  not  visible. 

Parts  painted  rcgulntion  stratv  color. — Deck. 

PULL   BOATS    (NOT    SELF-BAILING). 

174b.  Parts  painted  white. — The  outside  of  boat  above  water 
line  to  gunwale. 

Inside  of  boat  from  bends  to  gunwale. 

Parts  painted  regulation  straw  color. — Inside  of  bottoms  of 
boats  to  bends. 

All  bottom  boards. 

174c.  The  instructions  contained  in  arts.  174a,  175,  and  176 
relative  to  painting  l>oats  are  not  intended  to  apply  to  dories, 
skiffs,  scows,  or  ice  scooters.    These  boats  to  be  painted  through- 
out with  regulation  straw-color  paint. 
67385^—17.    (To  face  page  28.) 


|3S         INSTRTTCTIONS  70E  COAST  aUARB  STATIONS. 

Inside  of  boat  above  top  line  of  thwarts. 

Outside  of  end-boxes  above  top  line  of  thwarts. 
^  Tops  of  end-boxes. 

Inside  of  forward  end-box.  !      i, 

Inside  of  after  end-box  (engine  space)  except  the  floor  and 
a  strip  1  foot  wide  just  above  the  floor  and  extending  around 
the  entire  inside. 

All  work  not  visible. 

Parts  painted  regulation  straw  color » — Deck. 

Inboard  side  and  top  of  the  side  air  cases,  including  air-case 
battens. 

Outside  athwartship  bulkheads  of  end-boxes  below  top  line  of 
thwarts. 

Tliwarts  from  inner  edge  of  inboard  battens  on  top  of  side 
air  cases  to  outboard  ends. 

Parts  painted  lead  color. — Deck  of  after  end-box  (engine 
space). 

A  strip  1  foot  wide  just  above  the  deck  and  extending  around 
entire  inside  of  after  end-box  (engine  space). 


.9IHWU0S  Oi  9UiI 

rAo^h  e/otii:  iROd  io  9fKafll 

>ei2:o(t  9;<rr>T!!;  T)fT*>  In  obialnO 
.>w  11 A 

VI 

leJiiw  9Y0dB  iBod  io  abteJoo  sdT     .>V«rt-M  \>^\s«V««i  >vV\\)*\  ^d^TX 

]    .8i-i;;  ill  beniiiiuoo  <<iioil*>ni);iiii  HiVV  .•>Kl 
t  b^baelni  Ion  9ip.  etuml  ^nMiiiwi  o1  sviJiiloi 

Jfiiftct  loloo-w^ril^  (io?hif0^OT  flliw  tno 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOE  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  29 

Quarter  bollards. 

Spars. 

Oars. 

Stretchers. 

Steering  gratings. 

Water  breakers. 

Thwarts  (except  as  provided  for  power  lifeboats). 

Towing  bitts. 

Stern  sheets  (seats). 

BOTTOMS    OF   BOATS. 

176.  The  bottoms  of  power  lifeboats  which  are  kept  in  salt 
water  shall  be  painted  with  green  antifouling  copper  paint  to  4 
inches  above  the  water  line.  Power  lifeboats  wiiich  are  ordi- 
narily kept  in  the  boathouse  and  such  boats  at  stations  on 
fresh  water  shall  have  the  bottom  painted,  as  specitied,  with 
ordinary  green  paint.  The  bottoms  of  all  other  boats  shall  be 
painted  to  the  water  line  with  the  same  kind  of  paint  as  is 
specified  for  power  lifeboats  under  like  conditions. 

MARKINGS    ON    BOATS. 

.  177.  Each  boat  shall  be  marked  on  each  bow  with  the  legend 
.•^U.  S.  COAST  GUARD"  in  solid  black,  plain  block  letters, 
and  on  each  side  of  the  stern  with   the  legend   "  STATION 

NO. "  (the  number  so  painted  on  the  boat  to  be  the  number 

of  the  station).  Small  boats  with  square  sterns  shall  have  the 
station  number  painted  on  the  stern  and  not  on  the  sides  thereof. 
The  size  and  positions  of  the  markings  shall  be  in  accordance 
with  the  standard  instructions  issued  by  Headquarters. 

BOAT-I^UMBEB  PLATES. 

178.  The  boat-number  plates  shall  be  clearly  visible  and 
neatly  screwed  to  the  top  of  the  after  permanent  thwart  at 
Its  starboard  end,  or  for  a  boat  without  thwarts  to  the  bulk- 
head forming  the  after  cockpit,  the  plate  to  be  on  the  after 
side  near  the  starboard  cockpit  coaming.  Boat-number  plates 
may  be  painted  or  varnished  wath  the  same  preparation  as  the 
parts  to  which  they  are  attached,  but  care  shall  be  taken  not 
to  fill  up  the  plates,  and  the  numbering  must  be  kept  dear  and 
legible. 


'Sd  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

BRASS   WORK. 

179.  All  brass  work  not  painted  in  boats  shall  be  kept  bright. 
Gasoline  Engines  for  Boats  and  Other  Purposes." 

181.  Electrical  connections. — ^El^bti^ical  'coVitt^ctlons  must  be 
kept  clean,  free  from  oil,  water,  etc.  The  dynamo  or  spark 
coil  should  never  be  taken  apart,  as  all  necessary  adjustments 
can  be  made  from  the  outside.  Care  should  be  taken  not  to 
short  circuit  the  batteries.  Switches  should  be  left  "  off  "  when 
the  batteries  are  not  in  use.  The  wires  should  be  inspected 
frequently  to  detect  grounding,  as  this  is  often  the  cause  of 
fire.  Dry  batteries  should  be  stowed  in  a  box,  care  being  taken 
to  keep  them  dry. 

182.  Care  of  gasoline  engines, — (1)  Gasoline  engines  shall  be 
kept  covered  in  bad  weather.  In  cold  w^eather  water  jackets 
and  pump,  wiien  not  in  use,  shall  be  drained  to  prevent  freez- 
ing. After  draining  off  the  water  the  engine  should  be  run  a 
few  minutes  to  dry  out  the  jackets,  etc.,  thoroughly.  Good 
judgment  must  be  used  not  to  run  the  engines  so  long  under 
these  circumstances  that  the  cylinders  and  pistons  will  be 
overheated  and  damaged. 

(2)  The  engine  should  not  be  run  if  "missing,"  pounding,  or 
overheating  without  prompt  attempt  to  remedy  the  trouble.  The 
time  of  ignition  should,  if  necessary,  be  changed  gradually, 
and  the  engine  should  be  slowed  down  before  reversing.  Ex- 
haust ports,  pipes,  and  mufflers  must  be  kept  clean.  No  emery 
should  be  used  on  the  engine. 

(3)  Only  good  gasoline  engine  cylinder  oil  should  be  used. 
The  engine  should  not  be  run  with  a  smoking  exhaust,  but  the 
supply  of  oil  or  gasoline  should  be  diminished.  Oil  and  grease 
cups  should  be  kept  cleah  and  in  good  working  order  and  refilled 
at  regular  intervals.  The  oil  cups  should  be  boiled  in  potash 
occasionally  to  clean  them.  .        ' 

(4)  Where  there  is  an  atnple  supply  of  circulatiitfg  w^ter 
available  to  cool  the  engines  they  shall  be  run  a  sufficient  time 
each  day  to  show  that  they  are  in  working  order.  When  they 
are  not  in  use  each  day  they  shall  be  turned  by  hand  at  least 
one  entire  revolution  and  the  sparking  apparatus  tested  to  see 
that  it  is  working  properly. 

(5)  When  a  Nation  on  the  Atlantic  and  Gulf  coasts  is  not  ih 
commission  it  will  be  sufficient  if  the  engines  of  power  boats 


iNSTRirCTIONS  FOR  COAST  aiTARD  STATIONS*  31 

kept  in  condition  for  use  are  turned  and  the  sparking  test  made 
once  in  two  days. 

(6)  The  engines  shall  be  thoroughly  wiped  and  cleaned  after 
each  run  and  all  parts  examined  for  loose  bolts  and  connec- 
tions and  all  grease  and  oil  cups  filled  ready  for  instant  use. 
When  the  engine  does  not  start  upon  first  turning  it,  it  should 
not  be  tampered  with,  but  care  should  be  taken  to  see  that  all 
connections  and  valves  are  in  proper  position ;  then  prime,  and 
continue  to  turn  the  engine  until  it  starts.  Gasoline  engines 
frequently  require  considerable  cranking  when  cpl^, .  >^^(i.  JQ^fjlji 
damage  is  often  done  by  attempting  readjustment;^ }j   ^'l^j,,^   j^.,.,! 


tne  /I 

/ 


PRECAUTIONS  IN  OPERATING  GASOLINE  ENGINES. 

183.  Before  starting:   ((ry'^SeeTpIentJ'bf  oil  and  gasoHne  in 
ttiks. 

dib)  Oil  the  engines  all  around.  / 

^(c)   See  ignition  circuit  in  order,  and  also  the  spark  pl^g. 
'^d)   Set  the  timer  so  that  the  explosion  will  occur  late.  ,' 
(e)  Set  the  carbureter  a  little  more  open  than  the /usual 
running  mark  and  open  all  valves  to  the  fuel  tanks. 
r  if)  Test  carbureter.  ; 

\,Ag)  Turn  on  oil.  i 

^  (h)  Turn  the  engine  over  with  relief  valves  open  .and  note  if 
explosion  occurs  at  the  proper  time  in  all  cylinders.' 

(O  Close  the  relief  valves  and  turn  the  engine  over  through 
one  cycle. 

(j)   Set  carbureter  and  timer  in  proper  position. 
~k)  Whenever  the  engine  is  in  operation  circulating  water 
be  turned  on,  except  when  the  engine  is  run  for  drying 
out  the  jacket,  etc. 

184.  To  stop  the  engine. — ^Throw  out  ignitor  switch;  this 
leaves  the  engine  charged  with  an  explosive  mixture,  and  it  is 
sometimes  possible  to  start  again  by  simply  throwing  in  the 
switch.    Turn  off  oil,  gasoline,  and  circulating  water. 

185.  Engine  tronhles. —  (1)  Failure  to  start:  Fuel  mixture  too 
rich  or  too  lean ;  carbureter  or  needle  valve  plugged  up.        * 

(2)  Ignition:  Broken  connections;  spark  plug  dirty ' oi^  short 
circuited ;  vibrator  improperly  adjusted.  v 

(3)  Engine:  Leaky  piston  or  exhaust  valves  or  leaky  crank 
case ;  loss  of  compression.  > 

(4)  Weak  explosions:  Ignition  set  too  lattb;  Ibss  of  compres- 
sion;  not  enoug:h  fuel ;  weak  spark.      '■    "''■   "     f'  "J^?    i:  .' 


92 


INSTEirCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUAED  STATIONS. 


(5)  Exhaust  passage  explosion:  Leaky  exhaust  valves;  too 
rich  a  mixture. 

(6)  Slowing  down  and  stopping:  Overheating,  due  to  insuffi- 
cient supply  of  water  or  oil ;  weak  mixture ;  loose  connections. 

(7)  Smoky  exhaust:  Too  much  lubricating  oil. 


DIRECTIONS    FOB    FUBNISHINQ    CIBCULATING     WATEB    FOB    BUNNING 
ENGINES   OF   MOTOB  BOATS. 

186.  (1)  An  ordinary  oil  barrel  shall  be  used  as  a  water  con- 
tainer, the  barrel  to  be  raised  so  that  its  bottom  will  be  on  the 
level  with  the  keel  of  the  boat.    The  small,  threaded  nipple 


Boathouse  water  supply  for  motor  boats. 

furnished  with  the  outfit  shall  be  screwed  into  the  barrel  near 
its  bottom,  as  shown  in  the  figure,  for  suction-hose  connection. 

(2)  Fresh  water  shall  be  used. 

(3)  The  pad  over  the  suction  strainer  shall  be  held  in  position 
as  shown  in  the  figure. 

(4)  The  pad  over  the  discharge  opening  shall  be  braced  iu 
position  either  from  the  side  of  the  house,  as  shown  in  the 
figure,  by  a  diagonal  prop  from  the  floor,  or  in  any  other  way 
which  is  practicable. 

(5)  Paragraph  3  of  article  1712,  Coast  Guard  Regulations, 
requires  that  the  engines  be  run  every  day  when  water  is  avail- 


able.    With  t^i^  aj^paratus  .as  shpvvQ  in  the  Qgiire  furnisliqd^to 

,^Jiiitions,  water  will  always  be  availVible,  and  the  en.i?ines  shall 

.'jpe  run  every  day.    Caution  shall  be  exercised  to  have  the  watf^r 

jj^ckets  thoroughly  drained  when  there  is  dan2:er  of  freezing.;) 

*jf,M87.  When  laying  up  for  tcinter. — :When  laying  up  an  en^rie 

all  bright  parts  should  be  covered  with  heavy  pil  or  g^ea^e. 

Vaseline  is  excellent;  for  this  purpose..    Half  a  pini,  pf  .i^eavy 

,l^bricating  oil/shpuld  be  poured  in  eacli  cylinder  pn  top  of  the 

piston,  and  the, engine  should  be. turned  oVer  ^, 'jCe^  ttm^s  sq:^ 

to  spread  it.      '  ''  '  "  "  '      '  '' ' "     '''     '"       •''^;^-^ 

DRILLS. 

191.  (1)  Drills  shall  be  hel^  at  .^11  Coast  Guard  stations  in 

commission  as  follows:  '  •     ^' '' 

Fire  drill.^Once  each  week,  spmetimes  at  night. 
Boat  driU.— Twice  each  week.'         '       *'*  '■"     "'  ' 
Signal  drill.— ^eseti  times  each  week. 
Resuscitation  drill. — Once  each  week. 

Beach  apparatus  drill. — Once  .each  week.  ^' 

(2)  The  crews  of  Coast  Guard  i^tfitl^iis  shall  receive  instruc- 
tion in  the  following  subjects:  ^     '■  ■"'    '''^'    liilJir;   ^'liiT 
'IP:  \Motor-hoat  laics.— Once  each' \veck.  ■   '^^^^  ^o  eufm  orti 
"Tilot  rules,  {regulations  for  preventing  o<5f!fslo*^)i-'-M3nce'^rt^ 
^week..  '.■•'"!;"'"'•'    ^"^■"' '■;   '  "•  '■''".'';■'=' .'^  •.  '^'^\ 
'     iC^oftst  <a^wdr^  JBc5rtf?ffl^fon.<j:— Opce'^f^^'  w 

C(!)mpais.^Once  each  week.  •}:'.'»,  ;. 

192.  No  driljs  shall  be  held  on'  Sa'tiii^ay,.  which'  ^h^l  be  de- 
voted to  general  cleaning  about  the  station:     '  '        '  • 

193.  Sunday   shall   be   observed   in   an  orderly   manner.    (All 
,labor  and  duty.shaU  "be  ;r*educed  to  the  measure  of  necessity." 

^'  '  194.  Drills  stialrbe  held  between  8  a.m.  and  nodn  when  prac- 
;  ticable.  Boat  dpill,  signal  drill,  and  resuscitation  drill  shall 
^ach  consi'ime  n(5t  less  than  1  hour.  Instruction  in  motor-boat 
laws,  pilot  rules.  Coast  Guard ;  regulations,  and  compass  shall 
each  c6nsume  about  one-half  hour.  The  number  designating 
the  person  engaged  in  a^drill  shall  be  the  number  shown  in  the 
watch  and  patrol  bill.*''/'^  *  'v  .[:   ^  '         ;  ;     .;    /.m  '{-  •.,  ,y, ,.. 

195.  If  the  weather"^' ^fejrttlay  be  unsuitable  foi^  aciy  Of- the 

prescribed  drills  the  keeper  ma^  substitute  others  on  the  sehed- 

" 'rile,  but  the  requit-ed  number  of  ea<?h  kind  Cff  drill  must  be  held 

67385°— 17^rxr3» 


84         INSTRTTCTIONS  FOR  COAST  OtlAltD  STATIONS. 

each  week  unless  prevented  by  wreck  work,  foggy  or  stormy 
weather,  or,  in  the  case  of  boat  drills,  by  high  surf.  When 
drills  are  substituted  for  others,  when  they  are  omitted,  or 
when  less  than  the  prescribed  time  is  devoted  to  boat,  signal, 
or  resusciation  drill,  an  entry  of  the  fact  and  the  cause  thereof 
shall  be  made  in  the  log. 

196.  Drills  omitted  on  account  of  wreck  duty  need  not  be 
made  up,  but  all  other  drills  omitted  shall  be  made  up  in  the 
afternoon  in  the  week  in  which  the  omission  occurred,  if  pos- 
sible. 

197.  In  general,  the  afternoons  of  drill  days  shall  be  devoted 
to  the  work  of  upkeep  about  the  station  premises. 

jli   :"-•  -  "-  ■         - 

FiBE  Drill. 

201.  At  fire  drfll  each  member  of  the  crew  shall  at  once  re- 
pair to  his  station  and  quietly  and  rapidly  perform  his  allotted 
duties.  All  unnecessary  noise,  singing  out,  and  confusion  shall 
be  avoided. 

202.  The  signal  for  fire  drill  shall  be  the  verbal  alarm  FIKE! 
This  alarm  will  be  given  by  the  keeper,  who  shall  designate 
the  scene  of  the  supposed  fire  immediately  after  giving  the 
alarm.  (In  case  of  actual  fire,  the  person  discovering  it  shall 
at  once  give  the  alarm,  designating  its  actual  location.) 

203.  At  fire  drill  and  in  case  of  actual  fire  the  following 
duties  shall  be  performed  by  the  members  of  the  crew,  who  are 
designated  by  their  watch  and  patrol  numbers : 

Keeper. — Shall  have  general  supervision  at  the  scene  of  the 
fire ;  direct  operations ;  sees  that  each  member  of  fhe  crew  per- 
forms his  allotted  duties ;  maintains  order ;  and  does  everything 
in  his  power  to  extinguish  the  fire.  He  shall  be  provided  with 
an  ax. 

No.  1. — Shall  provide  and  attach  nozzle  to  hose  and  tend 
nozzle;  assists  in  leading  out  hose. 

No.  2. — Leads  out  hose  and  attaches  to  pump  or  hydrant; 
keeps  hose  clear. 

No.  3. — Provides  fire  extinguisher  at  scene  of  fire. 
;     No.  Jf. — Leads  out  and  attaches  suction  hose ;  mans  brakes. 

No.  5. — Removes  powder  from  station;  mans  brakes. 

No.  6. — Places  pump  in  position;  assists  to  lead  out  and  at- 
tach suction  hose;  mans  brakes. 

No.  7. — Places  pump  in  position ;  mans  brakes. 


INSTRtTCTIONS  FOR  COAST  OTJARD  STATIONS.         *5 

No.  8, — Provides  blanket  and  fire  extinguisher  at  scene  of 
fire/"''-     '   ■   "  ":^:  '';:  '^^  '  \    ,  .  ';     '    ■  ;: 

No.  9. — ^Assisiis  to  l^ad  out  atid  connect  hose;  provides  fire 
extinguisher  at  sc^ne  of  fi're.        '      ' 

'*^204.  Where  stationary  pumps  are  Installed  it  will  not  be  neces- 
sary to  provide  and  attach  the  suction  hose  ot  place  the  pump 
in  position,  but  the  men  assigned  those  duties  shall  at  once  man 
the  brakes. 

205.  Where  fire  hydrants  connected  with  city  water  mains  are 
installed  Nos.  4,  5,  6,  and  7  shall  perform  the  following  duties : 

No.  4' — ^Assists  to  lead  out  and  connect  hose;   keeps  hose 
clear. 
No.  5. — Removes  powder  from  statidn ;  assists  keepef. 
No.  6. — Provides  bucket  of  water  at  scene  of  fire. 
No.  7. — Provides  bucket  of  water  at  scene  of  fire. 

206.  When  the  drill  is  over  or  the  fire  extinguislied  the  keeper 
shall  give  the  command  SECURE!  when  each  man  shall  return 
what  he  provided  to  its  proper  place.  The  crew  shall  then  be 
mustered  by  the  keeper  and  each  man  required  to  recite  his 
duties  at  fire  drill,  after  which  the  crew  sl^all  be  dismissed. 

Bqax  Pbiw-. 

211.  Boat  drills  shall  consist  in, launching  and  landing  through 
the  surf  and  in  at  least  one-half  hour  of  sustained  exercise  of  the 
men  in  handling  their  oars,  as  directed  in  the  prescribed  boat 
drill.  The  drill  shall  include  sailing,  when  practicable.  Drills 
shall  be  held  with  both  the  pulling  and  power  surfboats  an(J 
with  the  power  lifeboat  when  any  or  all  of  these  tji)es  of  boats 
are  furnished  at  a  station.  Preference  shall  be  given  to  drills 
with  the  pulling  surfboats,  in  order  that  the  crew  shall  always 
be  proficient  with  the  oars.  When  the  power  surfboat  is  used 
the  crew  shall  be  exercised  in  pulling  with  the  oars.  Drill 
with  the  pulling  boat  shall  be  held,  when  possible,  in  the  surf- 
boat which  would  be  used  for  dangerous  work. 
.Whenever  practicable,  exercise  shall  be  had  in  the  use  of 
!the  drogue,     r,'.,,  .av/'  ^;•n•I'^'^^^     :  .:^  :s  ' '] 

Drills  with  boats  conyenl(9pt  to  the  ^each  or  elsewhere,  t;p 
avoid  hauling  the  service  boat  from  the  boat  room,  will  be 
permitted  only  as  may  be  authorized  by  Headquarters,  and  then 
only  when  the  drill  boat  conforms  in  the  arrangement  of  oars, 
height  of  seats  above  platform,  etc.,  to  the  pulling  surfboat. 


36  INSTBXTCTIONS  FOE  CQAST  OUAES  STATIONS. 

212.  No  boat  drill  which  is  not  in  accordance  with  these  in- 
structions, and  which  does  not  include  all  the- crew  present  for 
f^jity  at  the  time,  shall  be  recorded  as  a  boat  drill. 
•  ^13.  At  boat  drills,  after  the  keeper  has  exercised  the  crew 
sufficiently,  he  shall  surrender  the  steering  oar  on  alternate 
ijoat-drill  days  to  the  senior  petty  officer  and  to  No.  2,  respec- 
tively, w^ho  shall,  under  his  instruction,  exercise  the  crew  in  th^ 
drill,  including  launching  and  landing  through  surf.  At  such 
times  the  keeper  shall,  whien  practicable,  take  the  oar  of  the 
senior  petty  officer  or  No.  2,  as  the  case  may  be. 

214.  The  crew  of  each  station  supplied  witli  a  self-baiUng 
pulling  boat  shall  be  exercised  once  each  month,  when  t^e 
water  is  not  too  cold  or  the  surf  too  high,  in  capsizing  and 
righting  the  boat,  leaving  all  movable  equipment  on  shore. 

215.  During  the  months  of  December,  January,  February,  and 
J^ar^ch  one  boat  drill  in  each  week  may  be  omitted  at  stations 
on  the  Atlantic  coast  north  of  Cape  Henlopen  and  at  stations 
on  the  Great  Lakes,  but  the  time  assigned  to  them  shall  be 
employed  in  other  drUls.     (See  art  191-1.) 

Drill  WITH  SteLr-BAitiNG  Pulling  Boat  on  Boat  Wagon. 

iNSTHtrci'lONS. 

^hatl  see  that  the  imlve  to  the  water-hallast  iariJc,  the  ventilator^ 
to  the  side  air  cases,  and  the  hatches  are  securely  closed.  .' 
219.  Water  ballast,  if  needed,  should  not  be  let  into  the  tant 
of  a  self -bailing  boat  until  the  boat  is  afloat  and  under  control. 
When  the  tank  is  full  the  valve  shall  be  closed.  The  tank  may 
be  emptied  of  Water  with  the  pump  or  by  opening  the  valves 
^fterthe  boat  is  landed. 

II  220.  Unloading  the  boat  from  the  w^agon  shall  be  practiced, 
'so 'that  it  can  be  done  quickly  find  easily,  and  the  crew  shall  be 
'timed  in  this  evolution  from  the  command  tlnload!  until  the 
oars  are  crossed  and  the  boat  is  ready  to  be  taken  down  to  the 
surf.  Otie-half  minute  is  ample  time  in  which  to  unload  when 
the  crew  is  properly  drilled.  The  crew  will  not  be  drilled  in 
leading  the  boat  on  the  Wagon  quickly. 

'"'221.  When  conditions  are  not  suitable  for  launching,  the 
'^^w  should  be  exercised  in  unloading,  hnt  this  must  l)e  in  nddi- 
'tfbh  t«'tKc  regular  boat  drill.  'I 

.li-':-?  i'f  .  .:   ..      u  -;:;   oi  ..  'it 


INSTRirCSIOK&^^aR  COAST. .GTTARD  STAXIOKS* 


3X 


^I^TT-JO 


DRILL. 


(CSrew  Off  keeper  and  S-jneii.) 
222.   (1)  Leaviiig:ti|e,  station  for  drill  or  service. 
^Commdnda:     •  L^    •   • 


1)1 


1.  IVran  th^  i^umoat. 

2.  Forward.     ~ 

8.  Halt— unload;  -     ' 

4.  Tiike  life  prefer vei*s. 

5.  Take  oar?. 

6.  Go. 

7.  In  bows. 

8.  Way  enough. 


flu  r,  I    COlVrMANDS.  DUTIES. 

Maa  tlie  snrfboat J^fos.  5  and  6  open  and  secure  the  boat- 
room  doors.  If  the  wagon  pole  be 
detached,  Nos.  1  and  2  adjust  it,  No. 
1  holding  it  in  position  while  No.  2 
inserts  the  bolt;  the  men  fall  into 
place  with  the  drag  ropes  over  their 
'Should^h;,  as  shown  in  the  following 
diagram*: 


^  Note.— If  a  hor.se  is  used,  the  man!  who  has  the  care  of  it  shall 
at  once  procj^d  to  harii^ss  and  lead  it  to  where  the  boat  is. 
iTorward— ,p;;,^^«^^^^^J,^^The  wagon  is  run  out  of  the  house  to 
i  (  \vi^'M'm  UuH  IV'  the  most  desirable  place  for  launch- 
ing, a^  hear  the  water  as  possible, 
^  '  -  ',         the  boat's^  bow  toward  the  sur|. ,  (^f. 

y  a  ^lorse  is  to  be  used,  the  surf riian 

'r^  ..,<.-  n  .,:;..»,.     whQ.^iias  the  care  of  the  horse,  as- 

' '  '' " '  '  §isLl;^a,.b^  one  man  on  each  side, 
hitches'  the  horse  to  the  boat 
wagon. ) 


X'misQ^sx^lufsii^  bseifii  im. 


38  INSTRtTCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GTTARD  STATIONS. 

COMMANDS.  DUTIES. 

Halt — unload The  drag  ropes  are  dropped    (or  the 

horse  unhitched,  as  the  case  may  be, 
and  secured  at  a  safe  place)  ;  Nos. 
3  and  4  cast  off  the  side  lashings; 
Nos.  1,  3,  5,  and  7  on  the  starboard 
side  and  Nos.  2,  4,  6,  and  8  on  the 
port  side  run  the  boat  back  over  the 
rear  axle  as  far  as  the  wheels  will 
allow;  No.  7  takes  a  turn  with  the 
check  rope  around  the  bilge  keel  or 
grip  streak,  and  tends  it;  No.  1 
swings  out  starboard  lifting  bar ;  No. 
2  follows  with  the  port  lifting  bar, 
which  he  hooks ;  Nos.  1,  3,  and  5  on 
the  starboard  side  and  Nos.  2,  4,  6, 
and  8  on  the  port  side,  man  the 
bars ;  the  keeper  removes  the  king 
Jw  .  bolt,  the  reach  is  lifted,  the  keeper 

oiL  removes  the  forward  wheels,  and  the 

iK;  reach  is  then  carefully  lowered  to 

?iH  the  ground;  No.  7  slacks  the  check 

rope  and  the  boat  is  slid  down  and 
off  the  reach;  Nos.  3,  4,  and  5  then 
run  the  forward  wheels  and  Nos.  6, 
7,  and  8  the  rear  wheels  up  the 
beach  out  of  the  reach  of  the  tide. 
Each  man  then  takes  his  place  on 
his  proper  side  of  the  boat  and 
abreast  his  thwart. 

rfSSeTlfe  preservers At  the  command  Take,  each  man  lays 

hold  of  his  own  life  preserver.  At 
the  command  LIFE  PRESERVERS, 
which  is  given  shortly  after  the 
command  Take,  the  life  preservers 
are  taken  simultaneously,  the  men 
put  them  on  and  proceed  to  adjust 
them. 

Take  oars At  the  command  Take  each  man  lays 

hold  of  his  oar.  At  the  word  OARS, 
which  is  given  after  a  short  interval, 
the  oars  are  raised  simultaneously 


INSTRtrCTIONS  FOE  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 


COMMANDS. 


eh 


Go- 


-TintbowsiiiJ^ 


wad    Off] 

■-80 


DUTIES. 

on  end,  blade  up,  and  the  men,  got- 
erned  by  No.  1,  drop  them  together 
into  the  rowlocks  on  their  respective 
sides,  the  handles  resting  against  the 
opposite  air  case.  The  oars  will  be 
kept  on  end  long  enough  to  insure 
uniform  action,  and  will  be  dropped 
without  orders.  The  keeper  at  the 
same  time  secures  the  steering  oar 
in  its  rowlock  or  becket,  its  handle 
resting  under  the  after  thwart. 
The  boat  is  launched  into  the  water; 
the  two  bowmen  jump  into  the  boat 
when  it  is  water  borne,  take  their 
oars  and  assist  to  keep  the  boat  head 
to  the  sea ;  No.  1  at  the  stern  assists 
the  keeper. 

_At  this  command,  which  the  keeper 
gives  at  his  discretion,  the  men  give 
the  boat  all  the  headway  possible, 
then,  as  it  becomes  water  borne,  the 
bow  oarsmen,  the  men  amidships, 
and  the  stroke  oarsmen,  in  the  order 
named,  jump  in,  take  their  oars,  and 
give  way  briskly  together,  the  bow 
oarsmen  steadying  the  boat  as  long 
as  the  depth  of  the  w^ater  or  surf 
will  permit,  and  the  keeper  jumping 
in  when  he  deems  it  best  to  do  so. 

-Given  when  the  boat  has  sufficient 
way  and  while  the  blades  are  in  the 
water.  Bowmen  complete  the  stroke, 
toss  oars  simultaneously  to  an  angle 
of  45°,  boat  them  together,  and 
stand  erect  in  the  bow  facing  for- 
ward. If  a  landing  is  to  be  made, 
the  bowman  next  to  the  landing 
shall  use  his  boat  hook  as  needed, 
or  stand  by  painter  or  heaving  stick 
and  line,  or  stand  ready  to  catch  a 
line  as  directed  by  keeper. 


40  UTSTEUCTIONS  S'OE  CQASX  GUAAP.  STATIONS. 

COMMANPS.  DUTIES. 

-Wayuenough— ^1 — — — Given   when   the   boat    has   sufficient 
T^y.;-  -'  headway  and  while  the  blades  are 

9/1  r  in  the  water  at  the  beginning  of  the 

^ff^  stroke.     The  men  finish  the  stroke 

and,   as  the  oars  leave   the   water, 

toss  them  simultaneously  to  an  angle 

of  45°  and  boat  them  quickly  and 

quietly,  placing  the  blades  entirely 

\,:  inside    the    gunwale.      The    stroke 

9l!)i  oarsman  next  to  the  landing  place, 

.  if  one,  takes  up  his  boat  hook ;  each 

;v3isrfr  fjrii  oiai  (  man  unships  his  rowlock;  bowman 

tHf^rf  ^}ih  c-^n]  firiTt  and  stroke  oarsman  on  side  next  the 

landing  place  check  headway,  keep 
.    boat  clear,  etc.,  as  necessary. 

■  Note. — ^When  there  are  six  or  seven  men  in  the  crew,  the  drill 
prescribed  for  8  men  will  be  followed  as  far  as  practicable. 

(2)  Leaving  a  i?«^sel  for  t^e^bieaksh. 

Commands: 

X'  Stand  by  the  oars. 
'/  ^ '■"  '"I^.  Shove  ofe. 
'■'  'V';:?.  Out  oars. 
y\    "*4.  Give  way  together. 
X'-     ^'■5^  ^ay  enough  (or  "til  oars"). 

COMMANDS.  DUTIES. 

!  Stand  by  the  oars Every  man,  except  the  inboard  bow- 

;.  ;  man,   ships  his  rowlock,   seizes  his 

oar  by  its  handle,  and  sees  the  blade 

clear  of  the  other  oars.     The  oars 

liMih    ,i&iiif*goj    oi^iJ;  should  be  shoved  forward  over  the 

-lo'^^aloft'T  wxl  ^rft  i  gunwale   far   enough   to   bring   the 

:     .  handle  in  the  proper  position,  and 

should  be  kept  fore  and  aft. 

Shove  off Inboard     bowman     shoves     the     bow 

smoothly   off  from   the   ship's   side 

.   .  . with  boat  hook,  at  the  same  time 

i^H  X*^  tw3f>^n.  shoving  her  a  little  ahead  if  pos- 
sible;   the   keeper   sheers   off   with 


.INSTKUCTIOJifS  E0£  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.         M 

COMMANJDS.  DUTIES. 

ji^ifi  rudder  or  steering  oar,  assisted  if 

9fit  necessary  by  the  inboard  stroke  oar, 

buj  who  hauls  ahead  by  any  available 

flf  .  means.'    Bowman  places  boat  hook 

fore  and  aft  amidships,  seats  him- 
self, ships  his  rowlock,  and  gets  his 
• '.I ^,'>?o :->'/:  .oar  ready.  ■"  k    if.   ^/rr..--    >-'^ 

Out  oars 1 Given  when  the  boat. i^  q^eaj;.  of  .tlie 

ship's   side. ,    The  crew  throw   the 

'^Tft"*»«tt^     blades  of  the  oars  horizontally  out- 

'     •      ward,  allowing  the  leathers  to  fall 

into  the  rowlocks,  place  both  hands 

on  handle,  and  quickly  trim  blades 

flat  and  directly  abeam.    This  is  the 

position   of    Oars.      Bowmen    throw 

their  oars  out  at  the  same  time  as 

the  rest  of  the  crew,  if  they  are 

^.^    ^^^  ready ;  otherwise  they  swing  their 

P,\fi-j   Ur  ^^^^  ^^^    together,    touching    their 

- '  '  - '  blades  forward  to  insure  making  the 

movei^i^nt  in  unison,  and  bring  them 

to  the  position  of  Oar^  or  take  iip 

the  stroke  with  the   remainder   of 

the  crew,  as  the  case  may  be. 

Give\^^y,,tog?tJ}gip^^P-^.r^-^rAU  the  oarsmen  take  the  full  stroke, 

>(►     I     '      iV  or     -J)      keeping    accurate   stroke   with    the 

,££oitirHxi  iis't>ifit^V  oiil  ^aiau    ^^arbpard  stroke  oar  and  feathering 

ot    ip.\mH    ,:f^2looa    t«od    -I!     t^^  blades.     The  crew  will  pull  a 

,;:    r^.jj.    /,,/:)      strong,  steady  stroke,  always  using 

Way    enou^k  ,  tpr,.   j,i4|      their  backs  and  maintain  silence. 

oars") — - -1 1— .When  landing  in  smooth  water   and 

sufficiently  near  the  beach,  the  com- 
mand, Way  enough  may  be  given,  in 
which  case  the  oars  are  tossed  to- 
gether to  an  angle  of  45°  and  laid 
,..*.  ^i.;  ^j.  i  i    entirely  within  the  boat,  blades  for- 
'.^U\   jj>M  9f!t  ■    warq,  between  the  men  and  the  rail, 
with  as  little  noise  as  possible.    At 
the  command  In  oars,  the  oars  are 
.^<,  i    ,,n,..'  iij,  hauled  inboard,  their  looms  resting 

Y9xtf  ii'jilw    -  ^^  the  opposite  raM,  the  men  jump 

/  0  overboard  on  their  respective  sides. 


42  iNSTHtrCTIOl^S  FOR  COAST  QtTARD  STATIONS. 

COMMANDS.  DUTIES. 

and  run  the  boat  up  on  the  beach. 
The  life  preservers  are  removed,  the 
oars  are  laid  in,  blades  forward,  and 
the  boat  is  loaded  on  the  wagon  in 
the  reverse  order  of  unloading. 

(3)   Going  alongside  a  vessel,  official  occasion. 

Stand  by  to  toss.    ( Given 
instead    of    command 

"Way  enough") Stand  by  to  toss,  the  preparatory  com- 
mand, is  given  as  a  warning  to  the 
crew.  The  command  Toss  is  given 
as  the  blades  enter  the  water,  and 
when  the  boat  has  sufficient  head- 
way to  reach  the  gangw^ay.  The 
oarsmen  complete  the  stroke  and 
then  toss  the  oars  to  a  vertical  posi- 
tion by  pressing  smartly  on  the 
handle  with  the  inboard  hand,  rais- 
ing the  oar  with  the  outboard  hand 
under  the  loom.  Lower  handle  of 
oar  to  bottom  boards  and  hold  the 
oars  in  a  vertical  position  with  the 
blades  fore  and  aft.  The  inboard 
stroke  and  the  inboard  bow  oarsmen 
lay  their  oars  in  the  boat  quickly, 
after  assuming  the  vertical  position, 
seize  their  boat  hooks,  assist  to 
check  headway  and  fend  off  and 
haul  the  boat  alongside  the  gang- 
w^ay.  The  crew  will  remain  at  a 
'^!-  toss  until  officers  leave  the  boat;  if 

^  it  is  then  desirable  to  lay  the  oars 

^j  in  the  boat  it  will  be  done  by  the 

'^''  command  Boat  the  oars,  at  which 

each  man  lays  his  oar  quickly  and 
quietly  in  the  boat,  blades  forward. 
(This  command  should  not  be  given 
when  there  are  overhanging  obstruc- 
tions from  the  ship  which  would  be 
likely  to  foul  the  oars  when  they 
are  in  a  vertical  position.) 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  4» 

(4)   Leaving  a  vessel  after  official  visit,  oars  boated. 
Commaiids:  '[  »'•«   Tv  'fit 

1.  Stand  by  the  oars. 

2.  Up  oars. 

3.  Shove  off. 

4.  Let  fall. 

5.  Give  way  4;ogether. 

6.  Way  enough  (or  "In  oars");^   "^^  ' 

COMMANDS.  DUTIES. 

stand  by  the  oars Same  as  explained  in  paragraph  2  of 

this  article. 

Up  oars The  oars,  except  the  two  bow  and  the 

inboard  stroke  oars,  are  tossed 
quickly  to  a  vertical  position,  blades 
fore  and  aft  and  in  line  with  that 
of  the  stroke  oar,  handles  of  oars 
on  bottom  boards,  outboard  hand 
grasping  loom  of  oar  at  height  of 
chin,  wrist  of  inboard  arm  resting 
on  inboard  thigh,  and  steadying  oar. 

Shove  off This  command  is  executed  as  described 

in  paragraph  2  of  this  article.     As 

soon  as  possible  the  inboard  stroke 

oar  lays  aside  his  boat  hook  and 

;"'V   "     S^^s    ^^P    ^^^    ^^^    without   further 

IS  jA     .    command.    If  time  permits,  the  bow- 

'^'^    '"     men  get  up  their  oars  and  await  the 

command  Let  fall.    If  the  command 

Let  fall  is  given  before  their  oars 

'^'^^^  /   4*^'  are  up,  they  point  their  oars  for- 

fT^rfT  ffoRi^^l  ward    over    the    gunwale,     lightly 

touch  the  blades,  swing  them  out, 
and  take  up  the  stroke. 

Let  fall__li-— JJ.lll:--.---.-Given  when  the  boat  is  clear  of  the 
,  ship's  side.     At  the  command  Let 

^^  '       '  ^       fall  all  the  oarsmen  raise  their  oars 

vertically,  and  drop  the  blades  out- 
board into  the  rowlocks  smartly  and 

*^"'  ^^^^^^ ^i}^V  together,  slipping  the  inboard  hand 

w^o      ^^  ^YiQ  handle  of  the  oar,  and  come 

sm   ,i.j:lJOiiD  j.rc  ^Q  ^jjg  position  Oars  with  both  hands 

.f)l>  911  gn  luiHl  '  ^jj  ^j^g  handle.     Under  no  circum- 

stances should  the  blades  be  allowed 
to  touch  the  water  in  letting  fall. 


4^         INSTRUCTIOiNS  FOR  COAST  GTfARD  STATIONS. 

COMiSANiDSi       ;    .!i  DUTIES. 

Give  way  top^ether Same  as  described  in  paragraph  2  of 

Way    enough     (or     "In       this  article.  •   ^      •     ; 

oars") Same  as  described  in  paragraph  2  of 

this  article.  ''■■'    . 

224.  Self -bailing  pulling  boat  on  boat  carriage  ,a.t  ^^^tijon  pro- 
vided with  inclined  launahing.  ways.  ',.  -^^jy^    q 

Commands:  .  .,..,x 

V)  *":  'iJrF-^^^¥  the  ^snrf |3oat. 

X  Take  life  preservers. 

r'^^'!*}  ^\tOM2iANlis/'l*^^    ^^'\  DUTIES. 

|J^^tL;^;he surfboat^^^^^^  climb  into  the  boat;  each 

_^^;, ,        ,    ;        .  ',"ij.;  V.'       nian  standing  by  his  thwart. 
TlJ^ke  life  preservers_^_-L_Each  man  quickly  and  quietly  puts  on 
*^^  and  adjusts  his  life  preserver,  and 

^'j"  then  takes  his  seat  in  the  boat.    i*he 

keeper  grasps  the  steering  oar. 


gb^ The    starboard   bowman    lets    go   the 

^iUi^  ;lrH>iiliw  im  ^i.  securing  line  and  takes  his  seat  on 
-wod  fM  .BTmrm  eflLcl:r  II  his  thwart.  At  stations  ^yhere  the 
Dili  rimm  fma  mm  ni^^ri)  ,  ^^at^is  kept  on  the  carriage  bow 
baixmixim  eili  H    .Ilni  H^    out  the  keeper  will  let  go  the  secur-, 

tJ|»,^a^|^^-.^^+T---trrtrm-"T'T^^^^^   ^^   ^^^^   ^^  ^^  clear 

Yi 'ii Jill     t?li  '*  '      ^^  ^^^  boatroom  doors.     Each  man 

^Ko  fOdib  grasps  his  oar  and  raises  it  to  the 

•^  position  of  toss,  and  the  keeper  rigs 

9ifi  'to  n/jsb' «t  ^m^mf.  ^t  steering  oar  and  bears  down  on 

^M%itt-r^r,-rn^nT^nTirS^v^^,^a^  «^^?  ^^  the  boat  is  clear 
-4,r/.  ^-'^Kf.fif  Mfi^  >"»ff*  ^*f'       ^^   the ,  boat    carriage.     Each  .man 
.drops  his  oar  smartly  into  the  row- 
lock without  noise,   and   takes  the 
[    .  position  of  Oars. 

way The  crew  j  give  way  as  directed,  the 

keeper  peering  the  boat  as  he  de- 
sires with  the  steering  oar. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  46 

225.  Explanations  and  purposes  of  special  commands. 

COMM  ANB«.*  '^' '      . ' '  *  EXPLANATIONS  AND  PUEPOSES. 

0&^,.jr^^^^^fjf^^^^.^^^^urpqse.—il)  To  stop  pulling,  keeping 

the  oars  out.     (2)  To  salute. 

Tra||j.p^rf-.-T^^— j,iy-^j*^f-^^J^d?pZa.nation. — Given  when  blades  are 

l3^j.,    in  the  water.     Finish  the  stroke,  re- 

m  ino'rt  nsvlb—      lease  the  handle  of  the  oar,,  ajlow- 

>\«IT     .isJiiT.'  bl-i  ii^S  it  to  draw  fore  and  aft  and  trail 

-it*riji;9l  bai  alongside.     If  no  trailing  lines  are 

f,uj^.,jj'^      f,o.  fitted,  retain  the  handle  of  the  oar 

in  the  hand. 
Purpose.— (1)  To  salute.     (2)  To  pass 
j,^^,^,  ,     ,.p   ,  obstructions.     For    the    latter,    the 

.i5.tBw  SIoH  ^^^^  ^^  either  side  may  be  trailed 

(,  .,^.ro  independently. 

JJf^ce  about— hpld^.^ ^^„Ea^lanation. — The;    m^,  fdce    ajbout, 

^Iq\-  passing  around  the  end  of  their  oars, 

^y  and  take  seats  on  the  next  thwart 

^,j  aft,  drop  the  blades  of  their  oars 

j^^j  into  the  water,  and  hold  hard.    The 

^^;  men  on  the  after  thwart  kneel  and 

uOfi'v  10      ^^^^^  hard.    To  get  headway  in  the 
^Q.^jil'^/   opposite   direction,    give   the   order 
Give  way.  ..o 

Purpose. — (1)  To  exert  full  power  in 
checking     headway     and     stopping 
boat.      (2)    To  exert  full  power  in 
drawing  away  from  an  object.     (3) 
,sii  \Hi  !«/    ^9  avoid  a  dangerous  breaker  when 
ojufjH—    V  ^^   is  impossible  or   inadvisable  to 
r;  turn  tbe  boat. 

Hold  ^Skt^v^^^^^,^^^'^^—^^^xplanation. — Given  when  blades  are 
>iii<^  iHMJU  yjH     in  the  water.     Cease  pulling,  drop 
the  oars  in  the  water,  and  hold  the 
,  .T  V .  ?  .V. .-V ; : > -^  -     blades  perpendicular  to  the  keel . Un^. 
With    .considerable    way    bri,    espe- 
cially in  a  loaded  boat,  care  in  hold- 
^j.,  ing   water   is   required    to   prevent 

carrying  away  the  rowlock  or  the 
,,.f  oar.     Under  these   conditions   drop 

the  oars  in  the  water  with  the  upper 
edges  of  the  blades  inclined  forward 


46         INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  OUARB  STATIONS. 

COMMANDS.  EXPLANATIONS  AND  PURPOSES. 

and  gradually  bring  the  blades  ver- 
tical as  way  is  lost.     The  oars  on 

^'.'  either   side   may   hold   water   inde- 

pendently. 

®'';;  Purpose. — To  check  or  stop  headway 

"^^'-  or  sternboard. 

^terttall Explanation. — Given  from  position  of 

Oars  or  Hold  water.  The  oars  are 
backed,  keeping  stroke  and  feather- 
ing as  when  pulling  ahead.  Should 
not  be  given  when  the  boat  has  much 

^^j'  headway.    When  the  boat  has  head- 

way the  command  Stern  all  should 
be  preceded  by  Oars  or  Hold  water. 
Purpose. — To  acquire  sternboard. 

Back  starboard  (or  port )  _ Explanation. — Designated     oars     arb 

backed  as  at  Stern  all.  Should  Hold 
water  before  backing  if  boat  has 
much  headway.    If  quicker  action  in 

•'^^'^     -'  turning    is    desired,    the    command 

^^]^  ^'^'  Face  about  port  (or  starboard),  Give 

'  way  together  should  be  given. 

Purpose. — To  turn. 

Back  starboard,  give 
way  port  {or  Dice 
versa)  ^-^— —..——Explanation. — Given  from  the  position 

LH  I'^HiMi  iiui  3  of  Oars  or  Hold  water. 

ffl)     .?•  'tfil^^  /  J3  Purpose. — To  turn  quickly  when  boat 

\  has  little  or  no  headway. 

Stand  by  to  toss.     Toss Explanation. — Same  as  in  paragraph 

3  of  article  222. 

^sgebfiM  J!  Purpose.— {!)  To  salute.     (2)   In  go- 

"'       •     '■  ing  alongside  upon  official  visits  to 

vessels. 

Boat  the  oars Explanation. — Given  from  the  position 

of  Toss,  OARS,  or  Trail.  Place  the 
oars  quietly  and  quickly  fore  and 
aft  in  the  boat.  This  conmiand  may 
be  given  irom  any  position. 
Purpose. — To  get  the  oars  into  the 
boat. 


INSTRirCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  47 

COMMANDS.  EXPLANATIONS  AND  PTJRPOSES. 

Point  the  oars Explanation. — Stand  facing  aft,  point 

the  blades  of  the  oars  forward  and 
downward  to  the  beach  at  an  angle 
of  30*",  ready  to  shove  off  at  the 
command.  If  the  waves  lift  the 
stern  of  the  boat,  the  united  effort 
to  shove  off  should  be  made  just  as 
her  stern  lifts. 
Purpose. — To  shove  off  a  grounded  or 
beached  boat. 

Stand  by  to Purpose. — When  for  any  reason  it  may 

be  desirable,  the  preparatory  com- 
mand Stand  by  to  may  pre- 
cede any  command  of  execution 
given  in  a  boat.  The  preparatory 
for  Oars  is  Stand  by  to  lay  on  the 
oars. 

Capsizing  and  Righting  Drill. 

Being  under  oars,  the  keeper  commands : 

-•f n  oars The  oars  are  boated  and  placed  amid- 
ships, blades  forward. 

I.ashoars^ All    pulling   oars    are   lashed    to    the 

*  ,  thwarts  amidships,  and  the  handle 

of  the  steering  oar  under  the  after 

Man  starboard  (or  port)       thwart. 

righting  lines The  righting  lines  are  led  across  the 

boat  to  the  opposite  side,  the  men 
on  each  thwart  manning  the  line  be- 
longing to  their  respective  thwarts. 

Capsize The  men  stand  erect  on  the  rail,  haul 

back  on  the  righting  lines,  and  cap- 
size the  boat.  After  the  boat  is 
capsized  the  men  immediately  climb 
up  on  the  bottom,  carrying  the 
righting  lines  with  them,  stand 
erect,  and  brace  their  feet  against 
the  keel. 

Right  boat .The  men  haul  on  the  righting  lines 

and  right  the  boat,  all  climbing  in 
as  soon  as  possible,  and  taking  their 
places  on  their  proper  thwarts. 


COMAJLAiNDS.   p  ,;,yfv         '      EXJ'LANATIONS  AISD  PUUPOSES. 

jP^^sh  9ar^^-,^;^_^^^^^^_Tlie  ours  are  unlashed  and  placed  on 
i,,      '   ,,  '  '  the  outboard  sides  of  thwarts.    The 

,k^^er     shoves    steering    oar     into 

place. 
.,0jitf^^s^^^,5-^-,.,^-jpj__-.]^xecut;ed  as  prescribed  in  article  222, 
1-rono  !v»7!:f].  offt  :tnoii^n^'    paragraph  2. 

■-':  NotE.-^At  each' cfjpsizlng  and  righting  drill  the  boat  shall  be 
capsized  and  righted  se\ieral  times. 
j'>  .»',.{>;,.. li,  ,,    '^jjjj^^^  j^^ljjj  j^Q^rpg  Under  Sail. 

■^26. -^h-e' principles  of  boat  sailing  are  the  same  for  all  rigs. 
The  use  of  the  lee  oars  is  dangerous  when  under  sail;  a  slight 
gust  of  wind  lowers  the  gunw^ale.  so  as  to  prevent  the  oars  being 
lifted  from  the  water,  thus."  catching  a  crab,"  and  the  headway 
of  the  boat  will  cause  the  oars,  to?  fly  violently  fore  and  aft. 

'-11^:227.  Thel^eeper&hall  never  .permit  anyone  to  climb  the  masts 
of  a  boat.  If  halyards,  etc.,  are-  unrove  unstep  the  mast.  No 
person  shall  be  permitted  to  stand  in  a  boat  under  sail ;  this 
does  not  apply  t6  the  .helmsman  of  a  power  lifeboat  under  sail. 

228.  Going  alongside  under  sail  requires  care,  judgment,  and 
experience.  In  the  first  place  it  should  not  be  attempted  if  a 
boat,  '6r  other  obstruction  w^hich  the  masts  could  touch,  over- 
hangs the  gangway, '  nor  in  rough  weather  when  the  rolling 
•motion  of  the  boat  v^ould  cftuse  the  masts  to  strike  the. ship. 

'  In '  stch '  cases  the  masts  should-  be  unstepped   and  the  boat 

•brought  alongside  under  oars. 

^  ,  229.  If  the  ship  is  riding  to  a  windward  tide,  aj^roach  the 

'^^^rigway  irom  abaft  the  beam,  tend  all  gear  and  shorten  sail 

'When  the  boat  has  sufficient  way  to  reach  the  gangway.  The 
bow  and  stroke  oarsmen  tend  boat  hooks,  and  the  other  men 
perform  their  duties  in  shortening  sail. 

'''^30.  if  the  ship  is  riding  to  the  wind,  approach  the  gangway 
frbm  about  abeam,  tend  all  gear,  bow  and  stroke  oarsmen  stand 
by  the  boat  hooks;  when  there  is  sufficient  way  to  make  the 

'  gangway,  command:  Stand  by  to  shorten  sail,  Shorten  sail  (if 
but  one  mast).     If  two  masts,  command:  In  jib  and  foresail. 

'  The  jib  tack  and  sheet  are  let  go,  the  jib  is  smothered  into  the 
foi^emast;  lower  the  forestall,  at  the  same  time  putting  the 
tiller  hard  down,  haul  maih  sheet  amidships  or  a  little  on  the 

'  w^ath(?r  quarter.     This  throws  the  ^boat's  head  into  the  wind, 

'  infl  haulihg  the  main  ^heet  to  windward  deadens  her  headway 
Vi^tien  desirable;  -  IVltett' alongside,  command :  In  mainsail.    Stow 


INSTRtrCTlOKS  FOR  COAST  OtTARB  STATIONS.  49 

sails  and  unstep  if  desirable.  The  above  is  the  surest  and  safest 
method,  but  with  skillful  handling  all  sails  may  be  taken  in 
together,  the  tiller  put  hard  down,  and  the  boat  rounded  up  to 
the  gangway.  This  requires  more  skill  and  judgment  and 
should  not  ordinarily  be  attempted. 

231.  If  there  is  any  current,  make  allowance  for  it  by  head- 
ing for  a  point  farther  forward  or  aft,  as  the  case  may  be. 

PowEB  Lifeboat  ITndee  Sail. 

Hl}Si05.  The  boat  being  .uq^ej?  o«irs  or  power,  to  make  sail: 

COMMANDS.  DUTIES. 

Way  enough ,_--Oars  are  boated  or  engine  stopped. 

Stand  by  to  step The    starboard    oarsmen    launch    the 

main  mast  forward  until  heel  of 
mast  is  even  with  step ;  raise  mast 
head.  Similarly  port  oarsmen 
launch  foremast  to  position  and 
raise  mast  head.  All  crew  remain 
seated  whenever  their  duties  will 
permit. 

Step  the  mast Stroke  oars  guide  heel  of  main  mast 

into  step.  Bow  oars  guide  heel  of 
foremast  into  step.  Starboard  oars- 
men stand  on  deck  and  raise  main 
mast.  Port  oarsmen  stand  on  deck 
and  raise  foremast.  Bow  and  stroke 
oarsmen  secure  mast  clamps  and 
cast  off  shrouds  and  set  them  up. 

Loose  sail No.  1  stroke  oarsman  casts  off  sheet 

from  mainsail  and  takes  place  in 
stern  sheets  with  main  sheet  in 
hand.  No.  2  stroke  oarsman  mans 
the  mainsail  halyards.  No.  1  re- 
ports when  all  is  ready  aft.  No.  7 
casts  adrift  fore  sheet  and  passes 
it  aft  to  No.  3.  No.  5  mans  the  fore- 
sail halyards.  No.  8  casts  adrift 
jib  halyards,  hauls  head  of  jib  down 
to  deck,  hooks  and  mans  jib  hal- 
yards. No.  7  sets  up  jib  tack  and 
p^a^ses  sheets  aft  on  each  side  to 

67385''— 17 4  XtaiW/m,    , 


60         INSTHtTCtlONS  FOJl  OOAST  CUTAllD  gfAMOHS. 

•**^'  COMMANDS.  DUTIES.  -^ 

^\  No.  4.     No.  7  reports  when  all  1^ 

With  starboard  (or  port)       ready  forward. 

sheet.    Make  sail Jib,  foresail,  and  mainsail  are  hoisted 

r>iij{7/t>lfi'    ^^^^^  ^P-    ^^^  ^^^  convenient  to  the 
\:  c.Ai  *!/.      sheets  haul  them  aft  on  designated 
side  and  tend  them.     Bowmen  keep 
bright  lookout  ahead;  fully  inform- 
ing the  keeper  of  the  proximity  of 
:  llji^  e^BJH  obstructions  or  approaching  vessels. 

236.  To  Tack. 

Ready  about Given  as  a  warning  for  the  crew  to  pre- 
pare for  the  evolution.  The  keeper 
gives  the  boat  a  good  full,  waits 
for  a  smooth  time,  then  eases  down 
the  tiller.  At  the  same  time  the 
man  tending  the  main  sheet  hauls 
it  amidships  slowly.  (Do  not  haul 
it  across  the  amidship  line,  for  it 
then  acts  as  a  back  sail.) 

Ease  off  the  jib  sheet Given  when  jib  begins  to  shiver. 

Letgo;f6reshieet__ Given  when  foresail  ceases  to  draw. 

If  boat  seems  inclined  to  stop  head 
to  wind,  haul  jib  sheet  to  windward ; 
the  jib  will  be  taken  aback  and  pay 
her  head  around.  If  the  boat  gath- 
ers sternboard,  shift  the  tiller. 

Shift '6^er  main  isheet AVhen  wind  is  ahead,  shift  over  the 

main  sheet  and  stand  by  to  haul  it 
aft  when  well  around  on  the  new 

Haul    aft   fore   and   jib      tack. 

sheets _1___^_ As  soon  as  the  bow  of  the  boat  has 

passed  the  wind,  haul  aft  fore  and 
jib  sheets,  leaving  the  main  sheet 
slack  until  boat  is  well  around, 
then  trim  by  the  w^ind.  If  the  boat 
falls  off  too  far  from  the  wind,  haul 
aft  main  sheet  and  keep  jib  sheet 
flying  until  she  is  brought  up  by  the 
foresail  and  the  mainsail  and  the 
tiller.     When   nearly   high  enough, 

'^  haul  aft  the  jib  sheet  and  trim  her 

by  the  wind. 


INJ^TltlTCflM^  S-OR  COAST  atTAItd  gtAlS<>K&.         It 

237.  To  Wear,     -r J. 1  .^az;  i<:wv»o 

COMMANDS.  ^  flpUTIES.  » ,,     jjj,^j[ 

Stand  by  to  wear _« Given  as  a  warning  for  the  crew  to 

i  prepare  for  the  evolution.     Keeper 

.  '    i  '  puts  the  tiller  up  when  ready. 

Easeoff  inaln  8h§et-L___«.Given  as  the  boat's  head  pays  off,  in 

order  to  get  the  miximum  effect  of 

the  mainsail  in  increasing  her  head- 

.   '  .         4.     '."     ..     '  way.     Keep  fast  the  fore  and  jib 

Ijliioiif'.   finitihno)  «jrfi    r;      sheets  lihtil  wind  is  abeam,  as  they 

Banf^i  (JlP«'^OFfe'iaiid"jfb'     help  pay  her  head  off. 

sheets Given  when  wind  is  a  little  abaft  the 

beam.     Slack  tliei  sljeets  off  grad- 
ally.  ...T/-.,, 

I^n}^{ns§jI^,y-^^^>^ Given  wheq  wind  comes  nearly  jaf^, 

Ihi  'ir-ii^  bnti   Til  :i  '  Haul  down  the  mainsail. 

Shift  over  sTieets- ^^— Given  ,wl>en  wind  is  aft.    Stand  by  to 

haul  all  sheets  aft  on  the  other  side. 

Set  mainsail ._ Given  when  wind  is  slightly  on  new 

.aaiTtJa         weather  quarter.     Set  mainsail  and 
fr»%o  oili  lol  soluiBv/    haul  It  flat  aft.    Leave  other  sheefcd 
>  Fm>*T     nnHrrJnv^. -*ilt      flying,  or  smothered  in  to  mast,  so 
Haul   aft  fore   and   jib      she  will  come  up  rapidly. 

sheets _i__.Given  as  the  boat  comes  by  the  wind 

on  new  tack.  Haul  both  sheets>  flat 
aft. 
1!  Note.— If  wearing  in  a  light  to  gentle  breeze,  it  is  unnecessary 
to  take  in  the  mainsail,  but  in  a  moderate  breeze,  or  anything 
Stronger,  it  should  always  be  done  on  account  of  danger  froni 
gybing. 

With  a  sprit  rig,  put  tiller  up  and  ease  off  sheets.  When  the 
wind  is  nearly  aft,  trim  in  main  sheet  to  avoid  danger  from 
gybing  violently.  In  anything  stronger  than  a  gentle  breeze, 
sprit-rigged  boats  should  always  be  tacked  to  ayoid  this  danger. 
If  absolutely  necessary  to  gybe  a  sprit-rigged  boat  in  a  fresh 
breeze,  the  peak  should  be  dropped  in  addition  to  hauling  in  ith^ 
main  sheet. 

238.  To  Heave  to. 


i 


COMMANDS.  DUTIES. 


Ijaiid  by  to  h^aye  to ^^«-Gjive?i  as  a  warning  for  the  crew  to 


H         INSTRXrCTIONtS  POR  COAST  GTTARB  STATIONS. 

COMMANDS.  DUTIES. 

Haul  main  sheet  flat  aft.      brings  boat  by  the  wind  and  keeps 
Haul  aft  weather  jib      tiller  a-lee. 

sheet.    In  foresaid These  commands  are  given  simultane- 

D    ,1  i  ■:     ously,  and  are  obeyed  by  the  men 
'/  qis  70)  i     at  their  various  stations.    In  heavy 
11,  •''■'-    *       weather  the  foresail  shall  be  taken 

lo  in;  in  light  breezes  the  fore  sheet 

-[),.  may  be  simply  slacked  off.     If  the 

di  bow  falls  off  slack  away  jib  sheet. 

The  boat  in  this  condition  should 
ini'^a  i->    lie  dead  in  the  water,  wind  about 
^}  bnlY/    abeam. 
239.  To  Get  TTndeTway  from  Heave  to. 

COMMANDS.  DUTIES. 

Make  sail Haul  aft  fore  and  jib  sheets  and  set 

foresail,  ease  the  tiller,  and  ease  off 
^''  the  main  sheet. 

•■^'240.  To  Reef  sail. 

COMMANDS.  DUTIES. 

Stand  by  to  reef Given  as  a  warning  for  the  crew  to 

prepare  for  the  evolution.  Tend  fore 
and  main  halyards.    Keeper  brings 

Slack    down    fore    and      boat  by  the  wind. 

main  halyards Keeper  luffs  slightly,  but  not  enough 

to  cause  boat  to  lose  headway.    Fore 
and  main  halyards  are  slacked  down 
.  V-!       ..   r      about  18  inches. 

Reef  saiUuLU Jta^ui<u.iuis.^Pass  the  reef  earings  from  the  reef 

cringles  to  the  tack  bands.  The 
earings  in  the  leeches  should  be 
tightly  bound  around  the  foot  of  the 
sails.  Pass  reef  points  around  foot 
of  sail.  No.  7,  reports  "All  ready 
...u  i;.v„  t'j  .!     forward." 

Hoist  away-iii-aLi3iMiUjJj.-Oiven  when  sails  are  reefed  and  all  is 

ready.  Men  at  halyards  hoist  sails 
and  keeper  lays  boat  on  desired 
course.  Always  keep  boat  under 
control,  if  possible,  while  reefing. 
Reef  whenever  boat  begins  to  take 

:,^i.rr'*  ''^i^nu^'!^^^     in  water  over  lee  rail      Never  be 

•Kxmyl     .flobiiloya  edr  ..    afraid  of  reefing  too  soon. 


INSTRirCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  53 

241.  To  Douse  Sail. 

COMMANDS.  DUTIES. 

Stand  by  to  shorten  sail Given  as  a  warning  for  the  crew  to 

stand  by  their  stations.  Tend  all 
halyards. 

ghdrtens^ij, Slack   away   all  halyards  until   sails 

,  are  lowered  into  boat.     Men  sit  on 

thwarts  awaiting  next  command. 

Furl  sails Bowmen  and  stroke  oarsmen,  assisted 

by  Nos.  5  and  6,  and  3  and  4,  re- 
spectively, unhook  yard  from  trav- 
eler and  tack  from  tack  band,  and 
then  furl  sails  on  foot,  making 
smooth  skin  and  rolling  sails  up  to 
yards,  which  should  be  left  out  and 
clear.  Use  sheets  for  furling  lines. 
The  jib  should  be  rolled  up  with  the 

,  foresail,  having  unhooked  halyards 

'*^  '*  and  tack.    Secure  traveler  bands  to 

,^^,  ^  tack  bands,  and  lower  jib  halyard 

.  block  to  tack  band  on  foremast. 

prepare  to  tin^tep^ Come  up  shroud  tackles,  and  secure 

shrouds  and  tackles  around  masts. 
Nos.  1  and  7  report  when  all  is 
ready  for  unstepping. 

Stand  by ;  unstep ^^Make   a   slight  pause  between   these 

commands.  The  starboard  oarsmen 
seize  the  mainmast,  and  the  port 
oarsmen  the  foremast.  The  stroke 
and  bow  oarsmen  unclamp  the  main- 
mast and  the  foremast,  respectively. 
The  masts  are  lifted  vertically  (in- 
clining each  in  the  direction  it  Is  to 
be  lowered)  until  heels  are  clear  of 
the  tenons  and  then  lowered  into 
boat,  the  foremast  on  port  side,  and 
mainmast  on  starboard  side.     Men 

^*^  '  quickly  take  seats  on  thwarts. 

d^.  General  Rules  for  Boats  Under  Sail: 

1.  Never  be  afraid  to  reef  In  good  time.  ,    . 

2.  Always  see  sails  well  set,  and  trimmed  according  to 

the  direction  of  the  wind. 


»k  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

242.  General  Rules  for  Boats  Under  Sail — Continued. 

3.  See  that  sheets  are  never  belayed. 

4.  See  that  crew  is  properly  stationed  for  making  and 

shortening  sail,  reefing,  and  tacking. 

5.  Trim  boat  by  shifting  crew  or  ballast  as  required. 

6^.  Make  the  crew  sit  on  the  thwarts.     In  stepping  and 

stiiita    {)  "     iinstepping  masts  and  making  sail,  no  one  will  stand 

up,  except  when  absolutely  necessary,  and  even  then 

only  on  bottom  boards  or  deck  of  the  boat. 

'    '". '7.  JRemember  that  a  loaded  boat  carries  more  way  than 

-91  ,i^  I        ^jj  empty  one. 

-vmi  |S;- In  going  alongside,  allow  plenty  of  room  for  rounding 
Jj^?  •';^^*  ,  to.     Unstep  the  masts  as  soon  as  sail  is  lowered. 
^.nrrrr;:  :      y  j^  y^^  ^j,^  not  likely  to  go  alongside  in  a  seaman- 
like fashion,  tack  or  wear  and  try  again. 

MANAGEMlJNlf  6f   BoA'rS   IN    A    SUEF,    BEACHING   THEM,    ETC. 

'•;243.  The  following  rules  are  published  by  the  Royal  National 
jiifeboat  Institution  of  Great  Britain : 

"I.  Rowing  to  seaward. —  (1)  As  a  general  rule,  speed  must  be 
given  to  a  boat  rowing  against  a  heavy  surf.  Indeed,  under 
some  circumstances,  her  safety  will  depend  upon  the  utmost 
possible  speed  being  attained  on  meeting  a  sea.  For  if  the  sea 
be  really  heavy  and  the  wind  blowing  a  hard,  onshore  gale,  an 
approaching  heavy  sea  may  carry  the  boat  away  on  its  front 
and  turn  it  broadside  on  or  upend  it.  A  boat's  only  chance  in 
such  a  case  is  to  obtain  such  a  way  as  shall  enable  her  to  pass 
end  on  through  the  crest  of  a  sea  and  leave  it  as  soon  as  possible 
behind  her.  If  there  be  a  rather  heavy  surf,  but  no  wind,  or 
if  the  wind  is  offshore  and  opposed  to  the  surf,  as  is  often  the 
case,  a  boat  may  be  propelled  so  rapidly  through  it  that  her 
bow  would  fall  more  suddenly  and  heavily  after  topping  the 
sea  than  if  her  way  had  been  checked ;  it  may,  therefore,  be 
only  when  the  sea  is  of  such  magnitude  and  the  boat  of  such 
character  that  there  may  be  chance  of  the  former  carrying  her 
back  before  it  that  full  speed  should  be  given  to  her. 

(2)  It  may  also  happen  that  by  careful  management  a  boat 
may  be  made  to  avoid  the  sea,  so  that  each  wave  may  break  , 
ahead  of  her,  vrhich  may  be  the  only  chance  of  safety  in  a  small 
boat,  but  if  the  shore  be  flat  and  the  broken  water  extend  to  a 
great  distance  from  it  this  will  often  be  impossible^ 


IKSTBTTCTIOKS  FOE  COAST  GUAEB  STATIONS.  55 

;    The  following  general  rules  for  rowing  to  seaward  may;  be 
jffelied  upon:  ,   .  I      . 

c^    (a)  It  sufficient  command  can  be  kept  over  a  boat, by  the 
skill  of  those  on. board  her,  avoid  the  sea  if  possible,  so  as  i^t 
to  meet  it  at  the  moment  of  its  breaking  or  curling  over.         ;o 
:^n   (b)  Against  a  head  gale  and  a  heavy  surf,  get  all  possible 
/#peed  on  a  boat  on  the  approach  of  every  sea  w^hich  can  not  be 
avoided. 

(c)  If  more  speed  can  be  given  to  a  boat  than  is  sufficient 
to  prevent  her  from  being  carried  back  by  a  surf,  her  way  may 
be  checked  on  its  approach,  which  w^ill  give  her  an  easier  passage 
over  it. 

II.  Running  before  a  broken  sea,  or  surf,  to  the  shore  {fiat 
beach). — (1)  The  one  great  danger  when  running  before  a 
broken  sea  is  that  of  *'  broaching  to."  To  that  peculiar  effect 
of  the  sea,  so  frequently  destructive  of  human  life,  the  utmost 
attention  must  be  directed.  The  cause  of  a  boat's  broaching  to 
when  running  before  a  broken  sea  or  surf  is  that  her  own  motion 
;,J3eing  in  the  same  direction  as  that  of  the  sea  she  opposes  no 
Tresistance  to  it,  but  is  carried  before  it.  Thus,  if  a  boat  be 
running  bow  on  to  the  shore  and  her  stern  to  the  sea,  the  first 
effect  of  the  surf  or  roller  on  its  overtaking  her  is  to  throw 
up  her  stern,  and,  as  a  consequence,  to  depress  the  bow ;  if  she 
then  have  sufficient  inertia  (which  will  be  proportional  to 
weight)  to  allow  the  sea  to  pass  her,  she  will  in  succession  pass 
through  the  descending,  the  horizontal,  and  the  ascending  posi- 
tions as  the  crest  of  the  wave  passes  successively  her  stern, 
her  midships,  and  her  bow,  in  the  reverse  order  in  wldch  the 
same  positions  occur  in  a  boat  propelled  to  seaward  against  the 
surf.  This  may  be  defined  as  the  safe  mode  of  running  before 
a  broken  sea. 

(2)  But  if  a  boat,  on  being  overtaken  by  a  heavy  surf,  has 
not  sufficient  inertia  to  allow  it  to  pass  her  the  first  of  the 
three  positions  alone  occurs — her  stern  is  raised  high  in  the 
air  and  the  wave  carries  the  boat  before  it,  on  its  front  or  un- 
safe side,  the  bow  deeply  immersed  in  the  hollow  of  the  sea, 
where  the  water,  being  stationary,  or  comparatively  so,  offers 
a  resistance;  while  the  crest  of  the  sea,  having  the  actual 
motion  which  causes  it  to  break,  forces  onward  the  rear  end 
of  the  boat.  A  boat  in  this  position  will  sometimes,  aided  by 
careful  oar  steerage,  run  a  considerable  distance  until  the  wave 
has  broken  and  expended  itself.  But  it  will  often  happen  that, 
if  the  bow  be  low,  it  will  be  driven  under  water,  when,  the 


86  rfrsWlJCTIOlfS  f OR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

buoyancy  being  lost  forward,  while  the  sea  presses  on  the  stern, 
the  boat  will  be  thrown  end  over  end ;  or,  if  the  bow  be  high 
or  protected  by  a  bow  air  chamber,  so  that  it  does  not  become 
submerged  the  resistance  forward  acting  on  one  bow  will 
slightly  turn  the  boat's  head,  and  the  force  of  the  surf  being 
transferred  to  the  opposite  quarter  she  will  in  a  moment  be 
turned  broadside  to  the  sea  and  be  thrown  by  it  on  her  beam 
ends,  or  altogether  capsized.  It  is  in  this  manner  that  most 
boats  are  upset  in  a  surf,  especially  on  flat  coasts. 

(3)  Hence  it  follows  that  the  management  of  a  boat,  when 
landing  through  a  heavy  surf,  must,  as  far  as  possible,  be 
assimilated  to  that  when  proceeding  to  seaward  against  one, 
at  least  so  far  as  to  stop  her  progress  shoreward  at  a  moment 
of  being  overtaken  by  a  heavy  sea  and  thus  enabling  it  to  pass 
her.    There  are  different  ways  of  effecting  this  object: 

{a)  By  turning  a  boat's  head  to  the  sea  before  entering 
the  broken  water  and  then  backing  in,  stern  foremost,  pulling 
a  few  strokes  ahead  to  meet  each  heavy  sea,  and  then  again 
backing  astern.  If  a  sea  be  really  heavy  and  a  boat  small  this 
plan  will  be  generally  safest,  as  a  boat  can  be  kept  more  under 
command  when  the  full  force  of  the  oars  is  used  against  a 
heavy  surf  than  by  backing  them  only. 

(&)  If  rowing  to  shore  with  the  stern  to  seaward  by  back- 
ing all  the  oars  on  the  approach  of  a  heavy  sea  and  rowing 
ahead  again. as  soon  as  it  has  passed  to  the  bow  of  the  boat, 
thus  rowing  in  on  the  back  of  the  wave;  or,  as  is  practiced 
in  some  lifeboats,  placing  the  after  oarsmen  with  their  faces 
forward  and  making  them  row  back  at  each  sea  on  its  approach, 
(c)  If  rowed  in  bow  foremost  by  towing  astern  a  pig  of 
ballast  or  a  large  stone,  or  a  large  basket,  or  a  canvas  bag 
termed  a  "drogue,"  or  drag,  made  for  the  purpose,  the  object 
of  each  being  to  hold  the  boat's  stern  back  and  prevent  her 
being  turned  broadside  to  the  sea  or  broaching  to. 

(d)  Heavy  weights  should  be  kept  out  of  the  extreme  ends 
of  the  boat,  but  when  rowing  before  a  heavy  sea  the  best  trim 
is  deepest  by  the  stern,  which  prevents  the  stern  being  readily 
driven  off  by  the  sea.  ' 

(e)  When  running  before  a  sea,  a  bdiat  should  be  steered  by 
an  oar  over  the  stern  or  on  one  quarter. 

(4)  General  rules  for  running  before,  or  attempting  to  land 
through,  a  heavy  surf  or  broken  water: 

(a)  As  far  as  possible  avoid  each  sea  by  placing  the  boat 
where  the  sea  will  break  ahead  of  her. 


INSTRTTCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GTTARlD  STATIONS.  67 

(h)  If  the  sea  be  very  heavy,  or  if  the  boat  be  small,  and 
especially  if  she  has  a  square  stern,  bring  her  bow  round  to 
seaward  and  back  her  in,  rowing  ahead  against  each  heavy 
surf  sufficiently  to  allow  it  to  pass  the  boat. 

(c)  If  it  be  considered  safe  to  proceed  to  the  shore  bow 
foremost,  back  the  oars  against  each  sea  on  its  approach,  so  as 
to  stop  the  boat's  way  through  the  water  as  far  as  possible,  and 
if  there  is  a  drag,  or  any  other  appliance  in  the  boat  which  may 
be  used  as  one,  tow  it  astern  to  aid  in  keeping  the  boat  stem-on 
to  the  sea,  which  is  the  chief  object  in  view. 

(d)  Bring  the  principal  weight  in  the  boat  toward  the  end 
that  is  to  seaward,  but  not  to  the  extreme  end. 

(e)  If  a  boat  worked  by  both  sails  and  oars  be  running  under 
sail  for  the  land  through  a  heavy  sea,  her  crew  should,  unless 
the  beach  be  quite  steep,  take  down  her  sails  and  masts  before 
entering  the  broken  water,  and  take  her  to  land  under  oars 
alone,  as  above  described.  If  she  have  sails  only,  her  sails 
should  be  much  reduced,  a  half-lowered  foresail  or  other  small 
headsail  being  sufficient. 

III.  Beaching  or  landing  through  a  surf, —  (1)  The  running 
before  a  surf  or  broken  sea,  and  the  beaching  or  landing  of  a 
boat,  are  two  distinct  operations ;  the  management  of  boats,  as 
above  recommended,  has  exclusive  reference  to  running  before 
a  surf  where  the  shore  is  so  flat  that  the  broken  water  extends 
to  some  distance  from  the  beach.  On  a  very  steep  beach,  the 
first  heavy  fall  of  broken  water  will  be  on  the  beach  itself, 
while  on  some  very  flat  shores  there  will  be  broken  water  ex- 
tending 4  or  5  miles  from  the  land.  The  outermost  line  of 
broken  water,  on  a  flat  shore,  where  the  waves  break  in  3  or 
4  fathoms  of  water,  is  the  heaviest,  and  therefore  the  most 
dangerous ;  and  when  it  has  been  passed  through  in  safety,  the 
danger  lessens  as  the  water  shoals,  until  on  nearing  the  land,  its 
force  is  spent  and  its  power  is  harmless.  As  the  character  of 
the  sea  is  quite  different  on  steep  and  flat  shores,  so  is  the 
customary  management  of  boats  on  landing  different  in  the  two 
situations. 

(2)  On  the  flat  shore,  whether  a  boat  be  run  or  backed  in,  she 
is  kept  straight  before  or  end-on  to  the  sea  until  she  is  fairly 
aground,  when  each  surf  takes  her  farther  in  as  it  overtakes 
her,  aided  by  the  crew,  who  will  then  generally  jump  out  to 
lighten  her,  and  drag  her  in  by  her  sides.  As  above  stated, 
sail  will,  in  this  case,  have  been  previously  taken  in,  if  set,  and 
the  boat  will  have  been  rowed  or  backed  in  by  the  oars  alone. 


58         INSTRTTCTIONS  FOR  COAST  OTTARl)  STATIONS. 

!4!  (3)  On  a  steep  beacJi,  it  is  the  general  practice,  in  a  boat 
oDf  any  size,  to  sail  right  onto  the  beach,  and  in  the  act  of 
landing,  whether  under  oars  or  sail,  to  turn  the  boat's  bow 
half  around  toward  the  direction  in  which  the  surf  is  running, 
so  that  she  may  be  thrown  on  her  broadside  up  the  beach, 
where  help  is  usually  at  hand  to  haul  her  as  quickly  as  possible 
out  of  the  reach  of  the  sea.  In  such  situations,  we  believe  it 
is  nowhere  the  practice  to  back  a  boat  in  stern  foremost  under 
oars,  but  to  row  in  under  full  speed,  as  above  described. 

LANDING    IN    A    HEAVY   BUBF    IN    A   POWEB    SUBFBOAT. 

.:} 
244.  The  following  general  rules  may  be  relied. on: 
(a)  That  a  power  surfboat  should  enter  the  surf  at  a  mod- 
erate speed  with  the  rudder  unshipped,  steering  oar  in  place, 
and    an   oar   out   on   each   quarter    to   assist    in    steering.     It 
it  safest  to  stop  the  engine  and  land  under  oars,  particularly 
if  the  surf  is  dangerous  and  is  breaking  close  to  the  beach. 
Care  should  be  taken  to  keep  the  boat's  stern  to  the  sea,  qs 
the  propeller,   if  the  sea  gets  on  the  quarter,   increases  the 
itendency  to  broach  to.  >  ,.    ,    .i    ( 

v..  (&)  That  the  drogue  should  be  used  in  landing  In  a  heavy 
surf,  and  that  a  long  drogue  rope  is  preferable  to  a  short  one, 
except  when  working  through  broken  water  as  when  on  a 
shoal.  The  drogue  should  be  tended  by  a  surfman  with  a 
hatchet,  ready  to  cut  the  tripping  line,  and  the  drogue  rope 
also,  if  circumstances  warrant  and  the  drogue  rope  is  not  long 
;enough,  if  slacked  off,  to  permit  the  boat  to  reach  the  beach. 
'It  sometimes  happens,  when  a  boat  is  running  true,  that  the 
drogue,  even  when  tripped,  will  hold  the  boat  back  at  a  time 
when  she  should  go  as  fast  as  possible  on  the  sea  selected  for 
landing.  A  strain  should  be  kept  on  the  drogue  rope,  as -p. 
slack  rope  is  likely  to  foul  the  propeller.  ,     i 

(c)  Backing  the  engine  in  a  surf  is  dangerous,  as  it  wUl 
cause  the  stern  to  deviate  from  a  right  angle  to  the  surf.      j. 

id)  Weights  should  be  so  distributed  as  to  trim  the  boat  by 
the  stern,  so  that  it  will  drag. 

(e)  Oil  will  be  found  to  be  of  great  assistance  in  landing 
through  a  heavy  surf.  Fish  oil  is  best  for  this  purpose.  Oakum 
or  cotton  waste  saturated  with  it  may  be  carried  in  the  conical 
end  of  the  drogue,  or  in  an  oil  bag  made  fast  near  the  drogue. 
The  container  should  be  pricked  with  a  roping  needle  to  permit 
the  oil  to  escape.  .':i7..>i  no 


INSTEUCTIONS  FOE  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.    W 

THE   DROGUE,    OB  DRAG. 

245.  Purpose  of, — The  drogue,  or  drag,  is  used  to  check  a  boat's 
way  and  keep  her  end-on  to  the  sea.  When  running  beforfe  a 
heavy  sea  or  landing  through  a  dangerous  surf  it  will  prove  of 
the  greatest  assistance.  If  caught  in  a  gale  in  an  open  boat 
the  drogue  may  be  used  as  a  sea  anchor  to  keep  the  boat  head- 
on  to  the  sea.  In  such  cases,  if  there  is  oil  in  the  boat,  secure 
a  bag  of  it  to  the  drogue. 

246.  Description. — Drogues  furnished  Coast  Guard  stations 
shall  be  of  two  sizes ;  the  larger  for  use  in  power  lifeboats  and 
the  smaller  for  use  in  surfboats. 

247.  (1)  Large-size  drogue:  To  be  of  No.  5  cotton  canvas, 
cone  shaped,  24  inches  in  diameter  at  the  mouth,  4^  feet  long, 
evenly  tapered  to  a  point,  the  cone  to  be  in  four  equal  sections 
joined  by  round  seams,  the  sewing  to  be  on  the  inside.  Around 
the  inside  of  the  mouth  shall  be  a  1-inch  tabling,  hand  sewed, 
and  roped  with  l^-inch  manila.  Two  bails  of  1-inch  manila  rope 
shall  be  roped  on  to  the  four  seams  of  the  drogue,  passing  the 
whole  length  of  the  drogue  and  crossing  each  other  2  feet  be- 
yond the  mouth,  where  they  will  be  seized  into  a  galvanized 
thimble  with  a  f-inch  opening.  Both  bails  shall  pass  continu- 
ously around  the  drogue,  and  Into  the  bight  of  the  outer  bail 
there  shall  be  seized  close  to  the  apex  a  galvanized-iron  thimble 
with  ^-inch  opening.  The  ends  of  the  lines  forming  the  bails 
shall  be  spliced  with  a  long  splice.  A  holding  line  of  1^-inch 
manila,  10  fathoms  long,  shall  be  spliced  into  the  bail  thimble  at 
the  mouth,  and  a  tripping  line  of  12-thread  manila,  15  fathoms 
long,  shall  be  spliced  into  the  bottom  thimble,  the  ends  of  the 
lines  securely  whipped. 

(2)  Small-size  drogue:  To  be  of  No.  6  cotton  canvas,  cone 
shaped,  15  inches  in  diameter  at  the  mouth,  30  inches  long,  and 
fitted  in  all  respects  as  prescribed  for  the  large-size  drogue. 

248.  Use  of  the  drogue. —  (1)  When  the  drogue  is  used  over 
the  stern  the  senior  petty  officer  (No.  1)  tends  the  drogue  lines. 
Care  shall  be  taken  that  the  holding  and  the  tripping  lines  do 
not  foul  each  other. 

(2)  To  check  the  headway  of  the  boat,  No.  1  sees  the  lines 
clear  and  throws  the  drogue  over  when  directed  by  the  keeper 
(being  careful  that  the  lines  do  not  foul  the  propeller  when 
used  in  a  power  boat).  Slack  out  the  holding  line  to  the  de- 
sired length  and  take  a  turn  with  it  to  a  cleat  on  the  star- 
board  side   as   near   the  sternpost   as   possible    (in   lifeboats, 


60  INSTEirCTIONS  POK  COAST  GTTAED  STATIONS. 

make  the  line  fast  to  the  starboard  bollard  just  forward  of  the 
after  end  box).  Slack  out  the  tripping  line  at  the  same  time 
as  the  holding  line,  keeping  it  free  from  strain,  and  make  fast 
the  tripping  line  forward  of  the  holding  line.  The  ends  of 
both  the  holding  and  the  tripping  line  must  be  secured  to  the 
boat  to  prevent  the  outer  end  from  being  run  out. 

(3)  //  headivay  is  desired^  slack  out  on  the  holding  line  until 
the  tripping  line,  which  is  secured  forward  of  the  holding  line, 
capsizes  and  empties  the  drogue,  towing  it  apex  forward. 
Conversely,  when  it  is  desired  to  check  headway  when  the 
drogue  is  being  towed  by  the  tripping  line,  slack  out  on  trip- 
ping line  until  the  drogue  is  capsized  and  towed  mouth  forward 
by  the  holding  line. 

(4)  Before  entering  a  dangerous  surf  the  drogue  should  be 
dropped  overboard  and  towed  with  the  apex  forward,  the 
tripping  line  being  belayed  on  its  bight.  Should  it  become 
necessary  to  check  the  headway  throw  off  the  bight  of  the 
tripping  line. 

(5)  //  tlie  drogue  is  used  over  the  how  it  shall  be  handled  in 
a  similar  manner,  No.  7  putting  the  drogue  over  and  tending 
the  lines- 

249.  Boat  sail  hent  to  a  yard  used  as  a  drogue. — A  boat  sail 
bent  to  a  yard,  loosed  and  towed  astern,  the  yard  being  at- 
tached to  a  line  capable  of  being  veered,  hauled,  or  let  go,  wall 
act  in  some  measure  as  a  drogue,  and  will  tend  much  to  break 
the  force  of  the  sea  immediately  astern  of  the  boat. 

250.  The  drogue-holding  rope  should  be  marked  with  a  red 
rag  tucked  through  the  lay  at  the  point  where  it  is  belayed. 

BoAEDiNG  A  Vessel  Steanded  oe  Afloat  in  a  Heavy  Sea. 

.251.  (1)  Whenever  practicable,  a  vessel,  whether  stranded 
or  afloat,  should  be  boarded  from  to  leeward,  as  the  principal 
danger  is  that  the  boat  may  collide  against  the  vessel  or  be 
swamped  or  upset  by  the  rebound  of  the  sea,  and  the  greater 
violence  of  the  sea  on  the  weather  side  of  the  vessel  renders 
such  accidents  more  liable  to  occur  on  that  side.  The  danger 
will  be  still  further  increased  when  the  vessel  is  aground  and 
the  sea  breaking  over  her. 

(2)  //  a  stranded  vessel  is  broadside  to  the  sea,  the  chief 
danger  in  boarding  to  leeward  is  the  possible  falling  of  the 
masts,  or  that  the  boat  may  be  stove  by  the  wreckage  along- 
side.   Under  such  circumstances  it  may  be  necessary  to  take  a 


IK8TRITCTI0NS  POR  COAST  GTTAEI)  STATIONS.  61 

wrecked  crew  into  a  lifeboat  from  the  bow  or  stern  of  the 
wreck.  In  boarding  a  wreck  that  is  stranded  on  a  flat  shore, 
lifeboats  usually  anchor  to  windward  with  a  long  scope  of 
cable,  so  that  the  boat  will  drift  either  under  the  bow  or  stern; 
whichever  point  is  advisable,  taking  care  that  the  boat  does 
not  come  abreast  of  the  hull  by  using  all  the  oars  except  the 
two  after  ones,  whose  men  will  send  a  good  line  on  board  the 
wreck  with  a  heaving  stick  for  use  of  the  wrecked  people  as  a 
traveler,  or  to  be  tied  around  their  bodies  before  jumping  over- 
board. The  greatest  care,  under  these  circumstances,  must  be 
taken  to  prevent  actual  contact  between  the  boat  and  the  ship, 
and  the  crew  of  the  latter  sometimes  have  to  jump  overboard 
and  to  be  hauled  to  the  boat  by  ropes.  The  greatest  danger  is 
in  the  anchor  dragging  or  the  cable  breaking ;  to  avoid  this  the 
strain  must  be  relieved  as  much  as  possible  by  use  of  the  oars.  ^ 
(3)  In  every  case  of  hoarding  a  wreck  or  a  vessel  at  sea,  it  is 
important  that  the  lines  by  which  the  boat  is  made  fast  to  the 
vessel  should  be  of  suflicient  length  to  allow  of  her  rising  and 
falling  freely  with  the  sea;  and  every  rope  should  be  kept  in 
hand  ready  to  cut  or  slip  it  tn  a  moment  if  necessary.  On 
wrecked  persons  or  other  passengers  being  taken  into  a  boat  in 
a  seaway,  they  should  be  placed  on  the  thwarts  in  equal  num- 
bers on  either  side,  and  be  made  to  sit  down.  All  crowding  or 
rushing  headlong  into  the  boat  should  be  prevented,  as  far  as 
possible ;  and  the  captain  of  a  ship,  if  a  wreck,  should  be  called 
on  to  remain  on  board  to  preserve  order  until  every  other  person 
has  left  her.  '    ■  '  '       • 

Rescuing  People  from  a  Drifting  Wreck  at  Sea, 

254.  (1)  In  rescuing  people  from  a  drifting  wreck,  approach 
from  leeward,  taking  care  to  avoid  wreckage  floating  alongside. 

(2)  If  there  is  much  wind  and  the  sea  is  breaking  over  the 
wreck,  it  is  advisable  to  send  a  good  line  on  board,  using  the 
heaving  stick.  Have  the  people  secure  the  line  around  their 
bodies  and  jump  overboard,  one  at  a  time.  The  boat's  crew  will 
haul  them  into  the  boat  as  rapidly  as  possible. 

(3)  Should  it  become  necessary  to  go  alongside,  head  bow-on 
for  the  lee  side  of  the  wreck,  selecting  an  unobstructed  part. 
Boat  the  bow  oars  and  have  the  other  men  Face  about,  to  keep 
the  boat  from  touching  the  wreck.  One  bowman  will  use  his 
boat  hook  to  keep  the  boat  clear,  while  the  other  man  will 
assist  the  people  into  the  boat 


62         INSTRtrCTIONS  FOR  COAST  atTARD  STAttONS. 

(4)  An  exception  to  the  rule  of  boarding  a  vessel  to  leeward 
is  a  vessel  with  a  low  freeboard,  with  booms,  etc.,  over  the  side. 
Snch  vessels  should  be  boarded  on  the  weather  quarter,  the 
boat's  crew  being  in  the  same  positions  as  prescribed  in  para- 
graph 3  of  this  article. 

;  Sound  Signals  for  a  Fog.  i 

^6i!  (1)  In  fog,  mist,  falling  snow,  or  heavy  rainstprm^^ 
whether  by  day  or  night,  a  power  boat  makes  tl^e ;  follo>YfJi^ 
signals  at  intervals  of  not  more  than  one  minute:    .  .;,:     ■  *'  .  ' :  i 

(a)  If  underway  and  not  towing  or  being  towed,  a  prolonged 
blast  of  two  or  more  seconds  on  the  whistle  or  fog  horn. 

(6)  If  underway  and  towing,  three  blasts  in  succession  on  the 
whistle  or  fog  horn,  namely,  one  prolonged  blast  followed  by 
two  short  blasts. 

(c)  If  at  anchor,  ringing  of  the  bell  for  about  five  seconds. 

(2)  A  power  boat  is  underway  within  the  meaning  of  these 
rules  when  she  is  not  anchored  or  made  f a^t  to  the  ^hore  or  ^^ 
ship,  or  aground.  r  f 

;.,  MiiW  iiV.  Speed  IN  Fog. 

'  26^.  Bdtfts  shall,  in  a  fog,  mist,  falling  snow,  or  heavy  rain-j 
storms,  go  at  moderate  speed.  '^ 

Steering  and  Sailing  Rules.  '^i 

263.  (1)  When  two  boats  under  sail  are  approaching  one 
another  so  as  to  involve  risk  of  collision,  one  of  them  shall  keep 
out  of  the  way  of  the  other,  as  follows:.  ,  i  ,    .  • 

(a)  A  boat  which  is  running  free  shall  keep  out  of  the  way  of 
a  boat  which  is  close-hauled.  ,.»  '•, 

(&)  A  boat  which  is  close-hauled  on  the  port  tack  shall  keep 
out  of  the  way  of  a  boat  which  is  close-hauled  on  the  starboard 
tack. 

(c)  When  both  are  running  free,  vrith  the  wind  on  different 
sides,  the  boat  which  has  the  wind  on  the  port  side  shall  keep 
out  of  the  way  of  the  other. 

(d)  When  both  are  running  free,  with  the  wind  on  the  same 
side,  the  boat  which  is  to  windward  shall  keep -out  of  the  way 
of  the  boat  which  is  to  leeward. 

(e)  A  boat  which  has  the  wind  aft  shall  keep  out  of  the  way 
of  other  boats.  j  ,     / 

(2)  When  two  boats  under  power  sor  oars  are  meeting  end- 
on,  or  nearly  end-on,  so  as  to  involve  risk  of  collision,  each  shall 


INSTRtTCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GtTARD  STATIONS.  63 

alter  her  course  to  starboard  so  that  each  may  pass  on  the  port 
side  of  the  other. 

(3)  When  two  boats  under  power  or  oars  are  crossing  so 
as  to  involve  risk  of  collision,  the  boat  which  has  the  other 
en  her  own  starboard  side  shall  keep  out  of  the  way  of  the 
other.  I  j 

(4)  When  a  boat  under  power  or  oars  and  a  boat  under 
sail  are  proceeding  in  such  directions  as  to  involve  risk  of 
collision,  the  boat  under  power  or  oars  shall  keep  out  of  the 
way  of  the  boat  under  sail.  . 

(5)  Where  by  any  of  these  rules  one  of  the  two  boats  i^  to 
keep  out  of  the,  wf^f^  th^.  other  ,sJjall  l^jp  jjh^r  c()|Uj^  s^tid 

speed. '  '    '' , .  ''\'[-J    .  >','•';'■  ■'  v.  ;'  ".  ;  ■■'  '"■'"'  .,'  .   '■'  '/   '', 

(6)  Every  boat  which  is  directed  by  these  rules  to  keep  out 
of  the  way  of  another  boat  shall,  if  the  circumstances  of  the 
case  admit,  avoid  passing  ahead  of  the  other.  t,. 

(7)  Every  boat  under  power  which  is  directed  by  these  rul^s 
to  keep  out  of  the  way  of  another  boat  shall,  on  approaching 
her,  if  necessary,  slacken  her  speed  or  stop  or  reverse. 

(8)  Every  boat,  whether  under  power,  oars,  or  .sal^,  whe^ 
overtaking  any  other  shall  keep  out  of  the  way  of  ^i.e  .oV^rjfc'ak^i^ 
boat.  .....      o 

(9)  Any  boat  under  power  approaching  another  which  is  in 
sight  of  her  shall  indicate  w^hat  course  she  intends ,  to.  take 
by  the  following  signals  on  her  whistle:  ,, ' 

(a)  One  short  blast  to  mean  **  I  ^m  dlrec^tin^  m:^  cptii^  to 
starboard."       ^  ,  ,  .  /      ,,'  'f_ 

(&)  Two  short  jblists  to  mean  *a  riin  dlfectlhg 'najr^^cOtir^  1^ 
port."  ■   '  -..'••-.'     -..  _u..    ■  ;■'--'     -    •    -• 

(c)  Three  short  blasts  to  mean  "  My  engines  ate  going  at  full 
^peed  astern." 

.id)  The  words  "short  blast"  to  mean  a  blast  of  aborit;one 
'second's  duration. 

,  (10)  In  a  narrow  channel  every  boat  under  power  or  oars 
.^hall,  when  it  is  safe  and  practicable,  keep  to  that  side  of 
,the  fairway  or  mid-channel  which  lies  pn  the  starboard  sidje 
,of  such  boat.  '     ;         ,  '     ;'  ' 

(11)  Whenever  a  boat  under  power  is  near ing  a  short  bend 
or  curve  in  a  river  or  harbor  she  should  give  a  long  blast  6h 
ihe  steam  whistle. 

^'  (12)  Due  regard  shall  be  had  to  all  dangers  of  navigatl6n 
Jihd  collision  and  to  any  special  circumstances  which  may 
Tender  a  departure  from  thfe;,4ftj>y^  ^Wes'.i^  ofder 

t6  avoid  immediate  danger!    ^'  '■  '  ^'^-       '-^'  ^^''    ''  ■    '-^ 


64  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  OUARD  STATIONS. 

SIGNALS. 

Methods. 

271.  The  United  States  Coast  Guard  Signal  System  com- 
prises tlie  Navy  Flag  Code,  the  Semaphore  Code,  the  Dot  and 
Dash  Code,  and  the  International  Code. 

272.  In  communicating  between  units  of  the  Coast  Guard 
€r  with  units  of  the  United  States  Navy  the  following  methods 
of  signaling  are  employed : 

Wigwag  signals  (day  and  night  signals). — Dot  and  Dash 
Code.  '    . 

Occulting  or  flashing  light  (night). — Dot  and  Dash  Code.  ' 

Two-arm  semaphore   (day  and  night). — Semaphore  Code. 

Flag  signals  (day). — International  Code. 

Flag  signals  (day). — ^United  States  Navy  Flag  Code. 
^  273.  In  communicating  between  units  of  the  Coast  Guard 
and  merchant  vessels  the  International  Code  and  such  other 
of  the  codes  named  in  the  preceding  article  (except  the  United 
States  Navy  Flag  Code)  as  meet  the  needs  of  the  case  may 
be  used.  Call  letters  shall  be  used  only  between  units  of  the 
Coast  Guard. 

Instexjctions. 

275.  The  International  Morse  Code  shall  be  used  in  com- 
municating by  wigwag  and  occulting  or  flashing  light  methods. 

276.  A  signal  drill  shall  be  either  a  recitation,  a  practice, 
or  both.  A  recitation  shall  embrace  the  questions  and  answers 
on  the  wigwag,  occulting  or  flashing  light,  and  semaphore 
methods,  in  the  appendix  of  this  pamphlet,  as  well  as  practice 
with  wands  or  small  flags  indoors. 

277.  Practice  in  the  wigwag  and  semaphore  methods  shall 
be  held  at  least  three  times  a  week  with  the  regulation  flags, 
and  out  of  doors,  the  men  being  paired  off  beyond  ordinary  hear- 
ing distance  of  each  other.  Each  man  shall  be  required  to  send 
to  and  receive  from  the  other  a  collection  of  words  prepared  by 
the  keeper,  and  containing  all  the  letters  of  the  alphabet.  The 
necessary  communications  between  sender  and  receiver  will  be 
carried  on  by  means  of  conventional  signals,  and  no  conversa- 
tion will  be  permitted.  Each  man  will  be  provided  with  a  pen- 
cil and  paper  for  recording  the  words  sent  to  him,  which  record 
he  shall  hand  to  the  keeper  at  the  end  of  the  practice.  The 
keeper  shall  compare  each  record  with  the  words  sent.  Prac- 
tice in  the  occulting  or  flashing  light  method  shall  be  held  twice 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  66 

oach  week,  using  the  practice  set.  At  stations  furnished  with 
two  flashlight  torches,  or  other  equally  efficient  means  for  night 
signaling,  the  keeper  shall  give  each  surfman  going  on  patrol  at 
night  a  written  message  or  collection  of  words  to  be  signaled 
by  him  from  some  part  of  his  route  to  the  station  lookout.  The 
message  received  shall  be  compared  by  the  keeper  with  the  one 
sent,  to  assist  in  ascertaining  the  proficiency  of  the  men  in  sig- 
naling. 

278.  The  crew  shall  become  proficient  in  wigwag,  semaphore, 
and  occulting  or  flashing  light  signaling.  Members  of  the  crew 
who  are  not  proficient  in  these  different  methods  shall  be  re- 
quired to  practice  each  day  except  Saturday  and  Sunday. 
Those  who  do  not  learn  after  a  reasonable  time  shall  be  re- 
ported as  deficient. 

279.  The  tests  for  proficiency  and  expertness  in  the  wigwag, 
semaphore,  and  occulting  or  flashing  light  methods  shall  be  con- 
ducted with  three  men,  namely,  a  sender,  a  receiver,  and  a  re- 
corder. The  receiver  shall  receive  and  call  out  the  meanings  of 
the  signals  sent,  and  the  recorder  shall  record  them.  Test  mes- 
sages for  determining  proficiency  and  expertness  shall  consist 
of  words  of  five  letters  each  and  of  numbers  of  five  figures  each, 
so  selected  that  each  letter  of  the  alphabet  and  each  figure  be- 
tween 0  and  9  shall  be  Included.  The  words  shall  not  form 
sentences.  The  messages  shall  be  of  such  length  as  will  require 
at  least  five  minutes  for  receiving  under  the  rules  for  determin- 
ing proficiency  and  expertness.  Each  figure  in  the  message 
shall  be  counted  as  a  letter.  No  person  shall  be  considered  as 
proficient  or  expert  in  these  methods  unless  he  can  also  send 
correctly  at  the  requisite  speeds.     ( See  arts.  297,  304,  and  315. ) 

280.  No  drill,  except  a  drill  in  night  signals,  shall  be  re- 
garded as  practice,  or  recorded  in  the  log  as  such,  unless  it  be 
held  out  of  doors  with  regulation  flags.  All  other  exercises  in 
signals  shall  be  recorded  in  the  log  as  recitations. 

281.  All  messages,  except  in  regular  signal  drill,  should  be 
recorded  by  a  second  signalman,  or  other  person,  as  the  words 
or  characters  are  called  out  by  the  person  receiving  the  signal. 
This  rule  is  general. 

282.  A  message  in  which  a  few  words  have  been  lost  should 
never  be  guessed  at.  If  only  a  part  of  a  word  has  been  under- 
stood, the  signal  for  "repeat"  should  be  made  immediately. 
The  receiver  should  not  wait  until  the  message  is  complete  and 

67385°— 17 5 


(^  INSTRUCTIONS  :^5r  tJblTST^  fttlA^li^^fXfl^ 

then  depend  on  guessing  the  part  lost.  If  the  message  is  not 
perfectly  clear,  or  if  the  receiver  thinks  he  may  have  made  a 
mistake,  he  should  signal  "  repeat "  after  the  last  word  he  Is 
sure  of,  as  follows :  "  Repeat,"  then  the  last  word  he  has  re- 
ceived. It  will  seldom  be  necessary  to  "  repeat  last  message  " 
if  this  rule  is  observed ;  but  if  the  receiver  fails  to  "  break  "  the 
sender  immediately  after  losing  a  part  of  the  message  he  will 
cause  the  sender  unnecessary  signaling. 

283,  In  all  signaling  skill  and  rapidity  must  always  be  re- 
garded as  secondary  to  accuracy,  though  after  accuracy  has 
been  attained  the  relative  skill  of  signalmen  is  shown  by  the 
rapidity  with  which  they  can  accurately  receive  messages. 

The  Dot  and  Dash  Code. 

285.  The  Dot  and  Dash  Code  comprises  the  alphabet  and 
numerals  of  the  International  Morse  Code,  together  with  certain 
additional  symbols,  as  follows: 

ALPHABET. 


A  .-. 

B 

C 

D 

E  . 

F 

J 

K 

L 

M 

N  — . 
O 

S  •  •  • 
T_ 

U 

V 

W 

X 

G . 

xl    •  .  •  • 

I .. 

P . 

Q 

R 

NUMERALS. 

Y 

Z 

2  innrz-"" 
3 

5 

6 

7 

8 

0  ZZZZL 

4  . .  .  ,  _ 

ADDITIONAL    SYMBOLS. 


Cornet 

Letters  (follow) . 

Signals  (follow) . . 

Code  interval  or  designator  . . 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  67 

286.  Conventional  signals.  (For  use  in  ail  methods  of  sig- 
nals except  flag  hoists.) 

Exception:  Sema- 
phore. 

End  of  word Interval. 

End  of  sentence Double  interval. 

End  of  message Triple  interval. 

Signal    separating   pre- •  •  . Double  interval  (sig- 

amble  from   address;  nature  also  preced- 

address     from     text ;  ed  by  "  Sig.  inter- 

text  from  signature.  val"). 

Acknowledgment •    (R) 

Error A.^ 

Interrogatory ••  O.^ 

Repeat  after  (word) Interrogatory  A 

(word).  .; 

Repeat  last  word Interrogatory  twice.  > 

Repeat  last  message Interrogatory    three 

times. 

Send  faster QRQ. 

Send  slower QRS. 

Cease  sending QRT. 

Wait  a  moment • •  •  •  None. 

Execute IX,  IX. 

Move  to  your  right MR. 

Move  to  yoiu:  left ML. 

Move  up .MU. 

Move  down MD. 

Finished  (end  of  work) .  — .  None. 

287.  Secondary  meanings.  (Used  only  in  flag  hoists,  sema- 
phore, or  in  transmitting  Navy  Flag  Code  by  other  systems. 
The  use  of  Navy  Flag  Code  is  indicated  by  *'  Signals  follow  " 
).  .'i 

■  Ji 

Negative  (K) . Interrogatory  (0) *' 

Preparatory  (L)  . • .  AflBirmative  (P) . •  ^*^> 

Annulling  (N) . 

1  Flags  or  arms  chopped  in  semaphore. 


68         INSTRUCTIONS  FOS.  GQAST  GUAED  STATIONS. 

288.  "  jQteryal^ "  in  the  various  systems  are  expressed  as 
follows:     '^^"'^ 

Interval.  Double  interval.  Triple  interval. 

Wigwag Front.  Twice.  3  times. 

Occulting  or  flashing  light.  • • . . , 

(The  ''interval''  is  not  used  between 
words  in  epelled-out  messages.) 

Semaphore. Flags  crossed  2  chop-chop  3  chop  -  chop, 

or  machine      signals.  withdraw 

closed.  flag  or  close 

machine. 
Wigwag  Method. 

291.  The  wigwag  method  is  directly  applicable  to  signaling 
with  the  hand  flag,  hand  torch  or  electric  portable,  swinging 
hand  lantern,  and  beam  of  searchlight.  The  Dot  and  Dash 
Code  (International  Morse)  is  used. 

292.  Any  wigwag  signal  is  a  spelled-out  message,  unless 
preceded  by  *'  Signals,"  in  which  case  it  is  to  be  sought  in  the 
Navy  Signal  Book.  A  return  to  spelling  is  indicated  by 
"Letters." 

293.  In  the  wigwag  method  there  air'e  one  position  and  three 
motions.  "  Position  "  is  with  the  flag  or  other  signal  appliance 
held  vertically,  the  signalman  facing  squarely  toward  the  sta- 
tion with  which  it  is  desired  to  communicate.  In  the  first 
motion  ("dot"  or  period),  the  flag  is  waved  to  the  right  of 
the  sender,  and  shall  embrace  an  arc  of  90"*,  starting  from  the 
vertical  and  returning  to  it,  and  shall  be  made  in  a  plane  at 
right  angles  to  the  line  connecting  the  two  stations.  The 
second  motion  ("dash"  or  — )  is  a  similar  motion  to  the  left 
of  the  sender.  To  make  the  third  motion,  "interval"  (front), 
the  flag  is  waved  downward  directly  in  front  of  the  sender 
and  instantly  returned  to  "  position."  To  prevent  the  flag 
fouling  on  the  staff,  make  a  scoop  in  making  the  side  motions. 
Make  the  first  part  of  the  scoop  to  the  front  if  the  wind  is 
behind  the  sender  and  to  the  rear  if  the  wind  is  in  front.  Be 
careful  not  to  bring  the  flag  beyond  the  vertical  at  the  end  of 
a  motion  unless  the  immediately  succeeding  motion  is  to  the 
other  side.  . 

294.  It  is  important  to  obtain  a  good  background  and  to 
select  a  color  of  flag  which  will  afford  the  most  marked  con- 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST   GUARD  STATIONS.  69 

trast  with  the  background;  to  this  end  the  red  or  the  white 
flag  shall  be  used  as  found  best  from  the  standpoint  of  visi- 
bility. When  signaling  to  a  considerable  distance  with  the 
hand  torch,  electric  portable,  or  hand  lantern,  a  footlight 
should  be  used  as  a  point  of  reference  to  the  motions;  other- 
wise the  methods  are  the  same  as  for  the  hand  flag.  With  an 
oil  hand  lantern  a  variation  is  permissible,  as  the  lantern  is 
more  conveniently  swung  out  and  upward  by  hand  from  the 
footlight  for  "  dot "  and  "  dash "  and  raised  vertically  for 
"  interval." 

295.  To  call  a  ship  or  station,  face  it  and  make  its  call ;  if 
necessary  to  attract  attention,  wave  the  flag  (or  torch),  making 
the  call  at  frequent  intervals.  The  ship  or  station  called  an- 
swers by  making  its  own  call,  if  it  has  one,  or  by  making  "  ac- 
knowledgment " ;  the  calling  ship  or  station  then  makes  its  own 
call  or  makes  "  acknowledgment "  and  proceeds  with  the  mes- 
sage. At  night,  each  ship  or  station  called  shall  acknowledge 
by  making  its  own  call  letter;  the  calling  ship  or  station  then 
makes  its  own  call  letter,  which  the  receiving  ship  or  station 
repeats ;  the  calling  ship  or  station  then  makes  acknowledgment 
and  proceeds  with  the  message. 

296.  If,  in  the  course  of  a  signal,  the  sender  discovers  that 
he  has  made  an  error,  he  should  make  "  interval,"  *'  error," 
"  interval,"  after  which  he  proceeds  with  the  signal,  beginning 
with  the  word  in  which  the  error  occurred.  If,  in  the  course 
of  a  signal  addressed  to  a  ship  or  station,  the  receiver  does 
not  understand  a  word,  character,  or  display,  he  should  "  break 
in  "  with  the  characters  corresponding  to  *'  repeat  last  word  " ; 
or,  to  have  a  whole  message  repeated,  he  should  make  the 
displays  which  signify  "  repeat  last  message." 

297.  (1)  The  standard  of  proficiency  for  a  person  receiving 
wigwag  signals  in  a  test  for  proficiency  shall  be  14  letters  per 
minute,  85  per  cent  of  the  letters  being  correctly  received  and 
recorded;  the  standard  of  expertness  for  such  person  shall  be 
18  letters  per  minute,  all  the  letters  being  received  and  recorded 
without  error. 

(2)  The  standard  of  proficiency  for  a  person  sending  wig- 
wag signals,  with  regulation  flags,  30  by  30  inches,  shall  be  14 
letters  per  minute,  and  the  standard  of  expertness  for  such  per- 
son shall  be  18  letters  per  minute,  all  letters  being  sent  correctly 
in  either  case.     (See  art.  270.) 


70  INSTKTICTIONS  FOR  COAST  GTTARD  STATIONS. 

(3)  Should  the  tests  be  made  with  \Yauds  or  small  flags  the 
standard  of  proficiency  for  a  person  sending  wigwag  signals 
shall  be  18  letters  per  minute  and  the  standard  of  expertness 
for  such  person  shall  be  24  letters  per  minute.  In  either  case, 
j^ll  the  letters  cony^o^^ng  the  test  shall  be  sent  correctly. 

Hrt  iftlV.  Ill  ^>'n  ■ 

OccimTiN^i'.OB  Flashing  Light  Method. 

301.  The  Dot  ^nd  Da^h  Code  is  used  for  this  method.  Any 
signal  is  a  spelled-out  message  unless  preceded  by  "  Signals," 
in  which  case  it  is  to  be  sought  in  the  Navy  Signal  Book.  A 
return  to  spelling  is  indicated  by  "  Letters."  A  short  flash  1^ 
used  for  "  dot "  and  a  long  flash  for  "  dash."  ^ 

302.  To  call  a  ship  or  station,  make  its  "  call "  or  make 
**  cornet "  until  acknowledged.  Each  ship  or  station  called 
answers  by  making  its  own  call,  if  it  has  one,  or  by  making 
"  acknowledgment."  The  calling  ship  or  station  .then  makes 
its  own  call  or  makes  "  acknowledgment,"  which  the  receiving 
ship  or  station  repeats.  The  calling  ship  or  station  then  makes 
a  steady  light  until  answered  by  a  steady  light,  and  then  pro- 
ceeds with  the  message. 

303.  Keepers  of  stations  with  a  standard  night-signal  set 
shall  require  the  station  lookouts  to  call  adjoining  stations 
within  signal  distance  at  irregular  intervals  during  the  night, 
and  will  note  in  the  log  when  such  calls  are  not  promptly 
acknowledged.  They  will  encourage  men  not  on  lookout  duty 
to  practice  night  signaling  with  men  belonging  to  adjoining 
stations,  but  such  practice  must  not  interfere  with  the  duties 
of  the  lookout. 

304.  (1)  The  standard  of  proficiency  for  a  person  receivirifj 
occulting  or  flashing  light  signals  in  a  test  for  such  proficiency 
shall  be  20  letters  per  minute;  the  standard  of  expertness  for 
such  person  shall  be  40  letters  per  minute.  In  either  case  at 
least  85  per  cent  of  the  letters  sent  ^hall  be  correctly  received 
and  recorded.  '   '       • 

(2)  The  standard  of  proficiency  for  a  person  sending  occult- 
ing or  flashing  light  signals  shall  be  20  letters  per  minute,  and 
the  standard  of  expertness  for  such  person  shall  be  40  letters 
per  minute.  In  either  case  all  the  letters  composing  the  test 
shall  be  sent  correctly.     (See  art.  279.) 


Semaphore  Method. 


Two-arm  semaphore. 


Two-arm  semaphore. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 


73 


Two-arm  semaphore. 


Ma- 
chine, 


Hand  flags. 


Second- 
ary mean- 
ings. 


Two-arm  semapho^e^  i 


»(3 


Ma- 
Chine. 


Hand  flags. 


Second- 
ary mean- 
ings. 


V= 


IT 


•i^ 


Cor- 
net. 


Let- 
ters 
(fol 
low) 


Sic- 

(fol. 
low), 


In- 
ter- 
val. 


/ 


V 


Desig* 
nator. 


305.  Signals  may  be  transmitted  by  the  two-arm  semaphore 
method,  using  either  hand  flags  or  machine.  With  the  machine 
a  third  arm  or  "  indicator  "  is  displayed  on  the  right  of  the 
sender  (the  left  as  viewed  by  the  receiver)  to  indicate  which 
is  the  sender's  right  and  which  is  his  left;  at  night  a  red  light, 
screened  to  the  rear,  indicates  the  direction  of  the  sending.  By 
means  of  electric  lights  installed  on  the  arms  the  machine  is 
made  available  for  night  signaling.  The  arms  of  the  sema- 
phore machine  shall  be  painted  yellow. 

306.  Hand  flags  shall  be  from  12  to  15  inches  square,  of  blue 
with  a  white  square  (similar  to  the  International  Code  flag 
"P").  or  red  and  yellow  diagonally  (similar  to  the  Interna- 
tional Code  flag  "O"),  the  one  to  be  used  depending  on  the 
background.  They  shall  be  attached  to  a  .light  wooden  staff 
about  2  feet  in  length.  .anultir: 


.74  INSTEUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

307.  With  hand  flags  and  machine  all  positions  and  motions 
are  the  same  for  both  methods  with  the  exception  of  "  interval." 

308.  Secondary  meanings  are  imparted  by  holding  the  cliar- 
acter  for  an  appreciable  time  and  agitating  the  arms  or  flags 
in  that  position ;  or,  as  may  be  preferable  at  times  with  the  more 
important  ones,  the  word  may  be  spelled  out. 

309.  There  are  no  numerals;  numbers  shall  be  spelled  out. 

310.  With  the  machine  the  interval  "end  of  word"  is  the 
machine  closed,  but  with  the  indicator  showing;  "end  of  sen- 
tence "  is  the  "  chop-chop  "  signal,  twice,  both  arms  being  placed 
at  the  right  horizontal  and  then  moved  up  and  down  in  a  cut- 
ting motion,  the  indicator  being  displayed ;  the  end  of  the  mes- 
sage is  indicated  by  the  closing  of  both  arms  and  indicator. 
With  the  hand  flags  "  end  of  word  "  is  as  shown  in  the  table ; 
"end  of  sentence"  is  "chop-chop"  signal  twice;  "end  of  mes- 
sage" is  three  successive  "chop-chop"  signals  and  withdrawing 
the  flags  from  view.  Conventional  signals  of  five  or  six  ele- 
ments can  not  be  made  by  the  semaphore  and  must  be  spelled 
out.    Exceptions:     j      i     j  \  \ 

Error _4._J._lfL: \\ __i^_,_^*>^A:  (agitated). 

Interrogatory ^ LI_1J1_^    O  (agitated). 

Signal  separating  preamble  Iroin  address,   ad- 
dress from  text,  text  from  signature.- double  interval. 

(Signature    also    preceded    by    "  Sig.    In- 
terval".) 

'311.  Any  signal  is  a  spelled-out  message  unless  preceded  by 
'^Signals,"  in  which  case  it  is  to  be  sought  in  the  Navy  Signal 
Book.    A  return  to  spelling  is  indicated  by  "  Letters." 

312.  To  call  a  ship  or  station,  face  it  squarely  and  make  its 
call.  If  there  is  no  immediate  reply  wave  the  flags  over  the 
head  or  wave  the  arms  toward  the  upper  vertical  to  attract  at- 
tention, making  the  call  at  frequent  intervals.  The  ship  or 
station  called  answers  by  making  its  own  call  if  it  has  one  or 
by  making  "  acknowledgment."  The  calling  ship  or  station 
then  makes  its  own  call  or  makes  "  acknowledgment "  and 
proceeds  with  the  message.  (With  the  machine  this  call  is  left 
displayed  until  the  message  has  been  received  and  understood.) 
When  the  sender  makes  "end  of  message"  the  receiver,  if  the 
message  is  understood,  extends  the  arms  or  flags  horizontally 
and  waves  them  until  the  sender  does  the  same,  when  both^JLeavje 
their  places  or  stations.  '  i<  IuchIc 


INSTRTTCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  75 

313.  The  general  instructions  in  regard  to  sending  semaphore 
messages  are  the  same  as  those  given  for  the  wigwag. 

314.  Signaling  by  the  two-arm  semaphore  is  the  most  rapid 
method  of  sending  spelled-out  messages.  It  is,  however,  very 
liable  to  error  if  the  motions  are  slurred  over  or  run  together 
in  an  attempt  to  make  speed.  Both  arms  should  move  rapidly 
and  simultaneously,  but  there  should  be  a  perceptible  pause  at 
the  end  of  each  letter  before  making  the  movements  of  the  next 
letter ;  and  care  must  be  taken,  with  the  hand  flags,  to  hold 
the  staffs  so  as  to  form  a  prolongation  of  the  arms.  The 
method  possesses  an  important  element  of  accuracy  in  that 
each  display  may  be  kept  displayed  indefinitely.  Exceptional 
certainty  of  correct  receiving  may  be  effected  by  requiring  the 
receiving  ship  or  station  to  repeat  each  display;  this  shall  be 
called  for  by  sending  the  words  "  Repeat  signals  "  after  the  call. 

315.  (1)  The  standard  of  proficiency  for  a  person  receiving 
semaphore  signals  in  a  test  for  such  proficiency  shall  be  20 
letters  per  minute;  the  standard  of  expertness  for  such  person 
shall  be  40  letters  per  minute.  In  either  case  at  least  85  per 
cent  of  the  letters  sent  shall  be  received  and  recorded  correctly. 

(2)  The  standard  of  proficiency  for  a  person  sending  sema- 
phore signals  shall  be  20  letters  per  minute,  and  the  standard 
of  expertness  for  such  person  shall  be  40  letters  per  minute. 
In  either  case  all  the  letters  composing  the  test  sh^II  be  sent 
correctly.     (See  art.  279.) 

.    '..,  ,■  ...    ■    .      .     •  ,  uU 

Intebnational  Code.  -ao 

INSTBUPTIONS. 

321.  Two  drills  with  the  International  Code  shall  be  held 
each  week ;  one  of  the  drills  shall  be  a  recitation  and  the  other 
a  practice  in  sending  and  receiving  messages.  The  recitation 
shall  consist  of  questions  by  the  keeper  to  each  member  of  the 
crew  upon  the  different  flags  of  the  code ;  upon  one,  two,  three, 
and  four  flag  hoists,  and  the  distinguishing  flag  or  pennant  of 
each ;  the  part  of  the  code  book  necessary  to  turn  to  when  read- 
ing or  in  making  a  signal ;  the  manner  of  opening  and  conducting 
communications  by  the  International  Code;  special  distant  sig- 
nals ;  the  "  List  of  Merchant  Vessels  of  the  United  States " ; 
and  in  actual  communication  by  means  of  the  miniature  sig- 
nals provided  each  station. 


76  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

322.  Practice  with  the  International  Code  shall  be  held  out 
of  doors  with  the  regulation  flags.  The  crew  will  be  divided 
into  two  parts,  one  to  send  and  the  other  to  receive  messages 
prepared  by  the  keeper  with  the  view  of  testing  the  knowledge 
of  the  crew  in  the  various  tables  and  parts  of  the  code,  and  in 
reading  and  making  the  official  numbers  of  vessels.  To  insure 
accuracy  a  message  shall  in  each  case  be  written  out  before 
being  given  to  the  sending  squad,  which  will  be  required  to 
look  up  and  to  record  on  the  same  or  an  attached  sheet  of 
paper  the  corresponding  signals.  A  separate  line  shall  be 
used  for  each  hoist  and  its  meaning,  a  straight  line  drawn 
down  the  sheet  separating  the  two.  The  receiving  squad  shall 
be  required  to  make  a  similar  record  of  each  hoist,  carefully 
checking  the  same  while  the  hoist  in  still  up.  At  the  close  of 
the  exercise  the  keeper  will  compare  the  messages  received 
with  the  ones  sent  to  note  errors  or  discrepancies  and  will  in- 
struct the  crew  regarding  any  that  he  finds.  Each  member  of 
the  crew  should  be  given  an  opportunity  to  find  and  record, 
without  assistance,  one  or  more  hoists  and  their  meanings  at 
each  drill.  The  practice  should  include  making  up  the  flags 
of  a  hoist  as  soon  as  it  is  hauled  down. 

323.  When  two  stations  are  within  signal  distance  of  each 
other  weekly  practice  will  be  held  between  them.  If  atmos- 
pheric conditions,  force  or  direction  of  the  wind,  assistance 
work,  etc.,  prevent  the  drill  being  held  on  the  appointed  day, 
the  respective  keepers  shall  by  mutual  agreement  select  an- 
other day  for  the  drill. 

324.  When  a  station  is  not  within  signal  distance  of  another, 
or  when  circumstances  prevent  a  drill  between  two  crews,  a 
temporary  pole  on  which  to  hoist  the  answering  penant  (which 
may  be  an  improvised  one)  should  be  erected  well  beyond 
speaking  distance  of  the  flagpole  and  the  practice  conducted 
as  prescribed  in  the  preceding  article.  The  two  parts  of  the 
crew  shall  practice  at  both  sending  and  receiving  messages. 
In  the  absence  of  a  second  set  of  international  signal  flags  the 
receiving  party  shall  use  the  wigwag  for  acknowledging  hoists 
and  making  other  necessary  signals. 

325.  No  drill  with  the  International  Code  shall  be  regarded 
as  a  practice  and  recorded  in  the  log  as  such  unless  it  be  held 
out  of  doors  with  the  regulation  flags.  All  other  exercises 
with  this  code  shall  be  recorded  in  the  log  as  recitations. 

326.  The  standard  of  proficiency  in  International  Code  prac- 
tice shall  be  the  ability  to  read  any  signal  displayed  in  one 


INSTETJCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  77 

hoist  and  give  its  meaning  correctly  in  one  and  one-half  min- 
utes and  to  convert  any  given  message  into  its  proper  code 
Signals  at  an  average  speed  of  three  minutes  for  each  hoist  in 
the  message. 

'^'327.  The  standard  of  expertness  in  International  Code  prac-- 
tice  shall  be  the  ability  to  read  any  signal  displayed  in  one 
hoist  and  give  its  meaning  correctly  in  30  seconds  and  to  con- 
vert any  given  message  into  its  proper  code  signals  at  an 
average  speed  of  1  minute  for  each  hoist  in  the  message. 

SIGNALS   FOB   USE   AT   WEECKS. 

331.  The  following  signals  shall  be  used  by  the  keepers  and 
crews  at  Coast  Guard  stations  as  circumstances  may  require : 

(a)  Upon  the  discovery  of  a  wreck  by  night,  a  red  pyrotech- 
nic light  or  a  red  rocket  will  be  burned  to  signify,  "  You  are 
seen ;  assistance  will  be  given  as  soon  as  possible." 

(&)  A  red  flag  waved  on  shore  by  day,  or  a  red  light,  red 
rocket,  or  red  Roman  candle  displayed  by  night,  will  signify, 
"Haul  away." 

(c)  A  white  flag  waved  on  shore  by  day,  or  a  white  light 
slowly  swung  back  and  forth,  or  a  white  rocket  or  a  white 
Roman  candle  fired  by  night,  will  signify,  "  Slack  away." 

(d)  Two  flags,  a  white  and  a  red,  waved  at  the  same  time  on 
shore  by  day,  or  two  lights,  a  white  and  a  red,  slowly  swung  at 
the  same  time,  or  a  blue  pyrotechnic  light  burned  by  night,  will 
signify,  "  Do  not  attempt  tp  land  in  your  own  boats ;  it  is 
impossible."  .  .  -r 

(e)  A  man  on  shore  beckoning  by  day,  or  two  tc^rches  burning 
near  together  by  night,  will  signify,  "  This  is  the  best  place  to 
land." 

332.  Any  of  the  signals  i^ecified  in  the  preceding  article  may 
be  answered  from  the  vessel  as  follows : 

In  the  daytime,  by  waving  a  flag,  a  handkerchief,  a  hat,  or 
even  the  hand ;  at  night,  by  firing  a  rocket,  a  blue  light,  or  a 
gun,  or  by  showing  a  light  over  the  ship's  rail  for  a  short  time 
and  then  concealing  it. 

333.  The  keeper  of  every  station  shall  see  that  there  is  a 
staff  for  each  of  the  flags  carried  on  the  beach  cart  for  use 
at  wrecks.  Each  staff  shall  be  6  feet  long,  1  inch  in  diameter 
at  the  butt,  and  tapering  to  one-half  inch  at  the  top,  where 
the  flag  shall  be  attached.  The  staffs  shall  be  made  of  some 
tough  wood ;  a  crooked  or  condemned  oar  may  be  used  for 


78  INSTRUCTIONS  EOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

this  purpose.  When  properly  fitted  they  shall  be  beckete 
under  the  beach  cart,  the  flags  being  under  the  body  of  th 
cart  to  protect  them  from  the  weather. 

334.  The  torches  shall  be  secured  to  the  headboard  of  th 
beach  cart  by  the  fixtures  supplied  with  them.  The  pot 
shall  be  kept  half  filled  with  mineral  oil  and  the  boxes  in  tli 
handles  kept  filled  with  matches.  The  torch  staffs  shall  b 
becketed  on  the  side  of  the  cart.  To  extinguish  the  tore 
return  it  to  the  pot,  letting  the  cover  attached  to  the  tore 
fall  into  its  place  on  the  pot.  The  extra  cover,  connected  wit 
a  chain,  is  to  cover  the  pot  while  the  torch  is  burning  durin 
rain  or  snow. 

335.  When  the  two  torches  are  used  together,  as  directed  i 
paragraph  e  of  article  331,  they  shall  be  attached  to  thei 
staffs  and,  if  possible,  stuck  in  the  ground  about  10  feet  apai 
in  line  with  the  beach. 

336.  One  red  and  one  white  lantern  (unlighted  until  r( 
quired  for  signaling)  shall  be  carried  on  the  cart,  one  on  eac 
side,  attached  to  the  uprights.  If  a  boat  is  to  be  used  an 
the  beach  cart  is  not  used,  the  necessary  flags  and  lights  t 
make  the  signals  directed  in  paragraphs  a  and  e  of  articl 
331  shall  be  transferred  from  the  cart  to  the  boat  and  take 
to  the  beach  to  be  used,  if  necessary. 

United  States   Storm   Signals. 

341.  Storm  warnings  are  displayed  by  the  United  Stat* 
Weather  Bureau  as  follows : 

rfr  t  &.  £■  * 

Small  craft.  NC.  winds  SE.  winds.  SW.  winds.  NW.  winds.  Hurrica 

Flags  8  feet  square.    Pennants  5-foot  hoist,  12-foot  fly. 

(a)  Small-craft  warnings. — A  red  pennant  indicates  th 
moderately  strong  winds  are  expected. 

(&)  Storm  warnings. — A  red  flag,  with  a  black  center,  inc 
cates  that  a  storm  of  marked  violence  is  expected. 

(c)  The  pennants  displayed  with  the  flags  indicate  the  ( 
rection  of  the  wind :  Red,  easterly ;  white,  westerly.    The  pe 


Navy  Flag  Code 

CALL  FLAGS 


Plate  I 


I? 

IF 

M>    1^    •    •    • 

I^ 

^ 

Ir" 

"h "'j 

S 

U'  L  .  —  .  . 

^ 

N  —  . 

P= 

pi 

^P 

M 

P" 

-1 

9    •    •    • 

^  U 

IXH 

^ 

M 

¥* 

346. 


CALL  PENNANTS  rl^te  II 


Plate  III 


Cornet   

NUMERALS 
None  in  other  Codes 

REPEATERS 

II           FIRST                            SECOND                  ''           THIRD 

347. 

Plate  IV 

ALPHABETICAL  CODE  FLAGS  AND  PENNANTS 


ABLE 


ha- 

"'         EASY 


ITEM 


Ui        BOY 


U  FOX 


i         JIG 


GEORGE 


KING 


I  DOG 


U'         HAVE 


LOVE 


Plate  VI 


DAY 

DAY 

•       Answeriner  and 
Divisional 

ISH  ^ 

■Ml^     Annnllins 

^B      Nearative 

Interrogratory 

Preparatory 

^      ■  Affirmative 

■Him          Ye8 

INSTRTTCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  79 

nant  above  the  flag  indicates  that  the  wind  is  expected  to  blow 
from  the  nortlierly  quadrants ;  below,  from  southerly  quadrants. 

(d)  By  night  on  the  coast  a  red  light  indicates  easterly 
winds  and  a  white  light  below  a  red  light  westerly  winds. 

(e)  By  night,  on  the  Great  Lakes,  a  storm  of  marked  vio- 
lence is  indicated  as  follows :  One  red  lantern,  winds  beginning 
from  the  southeast ;  two  red  lanterns,  one  above  the  other, 
winds  beginning  from  the  northeast;  a  white  lantern  heloiv  a 
red  lantern,  winds  beginning  from  the  southwest;  a  white 
lantern  above  a  red  lantern,  winds  beginning  from  the  north- 
west. 

(/)  Hurricane  tvamings. — Two  red  flags,  with  black  centers, 
displayed  one  above  the  other,  indicate  the  expected  approach 
of  a  tropical  hurricane  or  one  of  those  extremely  severe  and 
dangerous  storms  which  occasionally  move  across  the  Lakes 
and  northern  Atlantic  coast.  By  night,  on  the  Great  Lakes, 
the  approach  of  such  a  storm  is  indicated  by  the  display  of 
two  red  lanterns,  vertically,  with  a  white  lantern  between  them. 

(g)  Small-craft  and  hurricane  warnings  are  not  displayed  at 
night. 

348.  (1)  The  flags  and  pennants  used  in  transmitting  the 
United  States  Navy  Flag  Code  are  as  follows : 

Alphabet  flags. 

Negative  flag  (alphabet  flag  "  K  "). 

Preparatory  flag  (alphabet  flag  "L"). 

Annulling  flag  (alphabet  flag  "N"). 

Interrogatory  flag  (alphabet  flag  "O"). 

Affirmative  flag  (alphabet  fla'g  "  P  "). 
^  J  Numeral  flag. 
^*',Ilepeaters. 

•^^^Answering  and  divisional  point  pennant. 
^'  Cornet. 

Call  flags. 

Ship-call  pennants. 

Indicators. 

Danger  and  designating  flag. 

(2)  Until  such  time  as  the  call  flags  and  ship-call  pennants 
Of  the  Navy  Flag  Code  are  issued  to  Coast  Guard  stations  the 
International  Code  flags  shall  be  used  in  lieu  thereof,  provided 
the  use  of  the  latter  does  not  cause  confusion  to  any  vessel 
or  signal  station  in  the  vicinity. 


80  INSTETTCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

RESUSCITATION  DRILL. 

351.  Resuscitation  drill  shall  be  held  once  each  week  and 
shall  be  had  with  the  whole  crew  when  it  consists  of  a  keeper 
and  six  men  or  less.  The  keeper  is  not  required  to  take  the 
part  of  the  patient.  With  more  than  six  surf  men  present  for 
the  drill,  the  keeper  shall  direct  the  drill  without  taking  part  in 
it.  Each  member  of  the  crew  shall  participate  in  the  drill  and 
be  proficient  in  it. 

352.  One  of  the  crew  shall  take  the  part  of  the  patient  and 
the  others  shall  take  position  astride  the  patient's  hips,  at  the 
arms,  holding  the  tongue,  rubbing  the  limbs,  applying  hot-water 
bottles,  etc.,  and  the  position  of  *'  idle  man."  The  position  of 
"  idle  man,"  on  the  patient's  right,  is  designed  to  provide  a 
breathing  spell  for  the  man  astride  the  hips  before  he  works 
with  the  arms,  as  these  two  positions  are  the  most  tiring  in 
the  drill. 

353.  At  the  beginning  of  the  drill  the  keeper  shall  be  the  first 
man  at  the  chest  movement,  except  when  he  directs  the  drill,  as 
prescribed  in  article  351 ;  No.  1,  the  **  idle  man  " ;  No.  2,  at  the 
arms;  No.  3,  at  the  tongue;  No.  4,  rubbing  the  left  leg;  and 
1^0.  5,  rubbing  the  right  leg.  After  about  three  minutes'  prac- 
tice each  man  shall  move  one  place  to  the  right  and  continue 
the  drill ;  thus  the  keeper  will  move  into  the  position  of  "  idle 
man  " ;  No.  1  will  go  to  the  arms ;  No.  2,  to  the  tongue ;  No.  3, 
to  the  left  leg ;  No.  4,  to  the  right  leg ;  No.  5  will  take  position 
astride  the  body.  After  a  further  practice  of  about  three 
minutes  each  man  shall,  at  the  order  "  Shift,"  move  one  place 
to  the  right  as  before,  the  crew  continuing  to  rotate  until  each 
man  has  been  drilled  three  minutes  in  each  of  the  several  posi- 
tions. A  new  patient  should  be  selected  at  intervals  of  9  or  10 
minutes.  Care  must  be  taken  in  rotating  that  the  count  is  not 
interrupted  or  its  cadence  changed.  After  the  crew  as  a  whole 
has  been  exercised,  each  man  shall  perform  the  resuscitation  of 
a  patient  without  assistance,  repeating  all  the  rules  necessary 
and  indicating  by  motions  the  several  steps  as  he  proceeds. 
^j354.  The  recitation  in  resuscitation  shall  embrace  the  rules, 
Ij^etuding  the  "  modification  of  Rule  III,"  "  Treatment  of  frost- 
bites," and  "  Saving  persons  from  drowning  by  swimming  to 
their  relief." 

355.  At  the  close  of  resuscitation  drill  the  keeper  shall  open 
the  medicine  chest  and  question  each  man  on  the  uses  of  the 
remedies  contained  therein. 


-^^ 


INSTRirCTIONS  TOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  81 

Directions   for  Restoring  the  Ak»abently   Drowned, 

361.  Note. — These  directions  differ  from  tliose  originally  is- 
sued to  the  service,  by  the  addition  of  means  for  seciiring 
deeper  inspiration.  The  method  originally  published,  known  as 
the  Howard  or  direct  method,  has  been  productive  of  excellent 
results  in  the  practice  of  the  service,  and  is  retained  here.  It 
is,  however,  here  arranged  for  practice  in  combination  with  the 
Sylvester  method,  the  latter  producing  deeper  inspiration  than 
any  other  known  method,  while  the  former  effects  the  most 


Fig.  1. — Expelling  water  from  body. 


complete  expiration.  The  combination  therefore  tends  to  pro- 
duce the  most  rapid  oxygenation  of  the  blood — the  real  object 
to  be  gained.  The  combination  is  prepared  primarily  for  the 
use  of  Coast  Guard  crews  where  assistants  are  at  hand.  A 
modification  of  Rule  III,  however,  is  published  as  a  guide  In 
cases  where  no  assistants  are  at  hand  and  one  person  is  com- 
pelled to  act  alone.  In  preparing  these  directions  the  able  and 
exhaustive  report  of  a  committee  of  the  Humane  Society  of  Mas- 
sachusetts, embraced  in  the  annual  report  of  the  society  for 
^>;i      67385^—17 6 


INSTRTJCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GTTARD  STATIONS. 


1895-96,  has  been  availed  of,  placing  the  Department  under 
many  obligations  for  its  valuable  suggestions. 

Rule  I.  Arouse  the  Patient. — Do  not  move  the  patient  un- 
less In  danger  of  freezing;  instantly  expose  the  face  to  the  air, 
toward  the  wind  if  there  be  any ;  wipe  dry  the  mouth  and  nos- 
trils ;  rip  the  clothing  so  as  to  expose  the  chest  and  waist ;  give 
two  or  three  quick,  smarting  slaps  on  the  chest  with  the  open 
hand. 

ni  If  the  patient  does  not  revive  proceed  immediately  as  follows : 
*  Rule  II.  To  Expel  Water  from  the  Stomach  and  Chest 
(see  Fig.  1). — rSeparate  the  jaws  and  keep  them  apart  by  plac- 


FiG.  2. — Movements  1^  prodiic^  inspiration, 

ing  between  the  teeth  a  cork  or  small  bit  of  wood ;  turn  the 
patient  on  his  face,  a  large  bundle  of  tightly  rolled  clothing  be- 
ing placed  beneath  the  stomach ;  press  heavily  on  the  back  over 
It  for  half  a  minute,  or  as  long  as  fluids  flow  freely  from  the 
mouth. 

RuLK  III.  To  Produce  Breathing  (see  figs.  2  and  3). — CTlear 
the  mouth  and  throat  of  mucus  by  introducing  into  the  throat 
the  corner  of  a  handkerchief  wrapped  closely  around  the  fore- 
finger ;  turn  the  patient  on  the  back,  the  roll  of  clothing  being 


INSTRTTCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  83 

so  placed  as  to  raise  the  pit  of  the  stomach  above  the  level  of 
the  rest  of  the  body.  Let  an  assistant  with  a  handkerchief  or 
piece  of  dry  cloth  draw  the  tip  of  the  tongue  out  of  one  corner 
of  the  mouth  (which  prevents  the  tongue  from  falling  back  and 
choking  the  entrance  to  the  windpipe),  and  keep  it  projecting 
a  little  beyond  the  lips.  Let  another  assistant  grasp  the  armj^ 
just  below  the  elbows  and  draw  them  steadily  upward  by  the 
sides  of  the  patient's  head  to  the  ground,  the  hands  nearly 
meeting  (which  enlarges  the  capacity  of  the  chest  and  Induces 
inspiration).     (Fig.  2.)     While  this  is  being  done  let  a  third 


Fig.  3. — Movements  to  produce  expiration. 

assistant  take  position  astride  the  patient's  hips  with  his  elbowi^ 
resting  upon  his  own  knees,  his  hands  extended  ready  for  action. 
Next,  let  the  assistant  standing  at  the  head  turn  down  the 
patient's  arms  to  the  sides  of  the  body,  the  assistant  holding 
the  tongue  changing  hands  if  necessary  ^  to  let  the  arms  pass. 
Just  before  the  patient's  hands  reach  the  gi'ound,  the  man 
astride  the  body  will  grasp  the  body  with  his  hands,  the  balls 


1  Changing  hands  will  be  found  unnecessary  after  some  practice:  the 
tongue,  however,  must  not  be  released.  *   «        '■ 


U         INSTKirCTIONS  FOE  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

of  the  thumbs  resting  on  either  side  of  the  pit  of  the  stomach, 
the  fingers  falling  into  the  grooves  between  the  short  ribs.  Now, 
using  his  knees  as  a  pivot,  he  will  at  the  moment  the  patient's 
hands  touch  the  ground  throw  (not  too  suddenly)  all  his  weight 
forward  on  his  hands,  and  at  the  same  time  squeeze  the  waist 
between  them  as  if  he  wished  to  force  anything  in  the  chest 
upward  out  of  the  mouth;  he  will  deepen  the  pressure  while 
he  slowly  counts  1,  2,  3,  4  (a  period  of  2  to  2^  seconds),  then 
suddenly  let  go  with  a  final  push,  which  will  spring  him  back  to 
his  first  position/    This  completes  expiration.     (Fig.  3.) 

At  the  instant  of  his  letting  go,  the  man  at  the  patient's  head 
will  again  draw  the  arms  steadily  upward  to  the  sides  of  the 
patient's  head  as  before  (the  assistant  holding  the  tongue 
^gain  changing  hands  to  let  the  arms  pass  if  necessary),  hold- 
ing them  there  while  he  slowly  counts  1,  2,  3,  4  (a  period  of  2 
jto  2i  seconds).  This  completes  inspiration. 
J  Repeat  these  movements  deliberately  and  perseveringly 
twelve  to  fifteen  times  in  every  minute — thus  Imitating  the 
natural  motions  of  breathing. 

If  natural  breathing  be  not  restored  after  a  trial,  of  the 
bellows  movement  for  the  space  of  about  four  minutes,  then 
turn  the  patient  a  second  time  on  the  stomach,  as  directed  inj 
Rule  II,  rolling  the  body  in  the  opposite  direction  from  that  in] 
which  it  was  first  turned,  for  the  purpose  of  freeing  the  air 
passage  from  any  remaining  water.  Continue  the  artificial 
respiration  from  one  to  four  hours,  or  until  the  patient  breathes, 
according  to  Rule  III ;  and  for  awhile  after  the  appearance  of 
returning  life,  carefully  aid  the  first  short  gasps  until  deepened 
Into  full  breaths.  Continue  the  drying  and  rubbing,  which 
should  have  been  unceasingly  practiced  from  the  beginning  by, 
assistants,  taking  care  not  to  interfere  with  the  means  em^ 
ployed  to  produce  breathing.  Thus  the  limbs  of  the  patient 
should  be  rubbed,  always  in  an  upward  direction  toward  the 
body,  with  firm-grasping  pressure  and  energy,  using  the  bare 
hands,  dry  flannels  or  handkerchiefs,  and  continuing  the  fric- 
tion under  the  blankets  or  over  the  dry  clothing.  The  warmth 
of  the  body  can  also  be  promoted  by  the  application  of  hot 
flannels  to  the  stomach  and  armpits,  bottles  or  bladders  of  hot 
water,  heated  bricks,  etc.,  to  the  limbs  and  soles  of  the  feet. 

Rule  IV.  Afteb-Treatment. — Externally:  As  soon  as  breath- 
ing is  established  let  the  patient  be  stripped  of  all  wet  clothing, 

lA  child  or  very  delicate  patient  must,  of  course,  be  more  gently 
handled. 


INSTEVCTIONS  FOE  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 


86 


wrapped  in  blankets  only,  put  to  bed  comfortably  warm,  but 
with  a  free  circulation  of  fresh  air,  and  left  to  perfect  restij 
Internally:  Give  aromatic  spirits  of  ammonia  in  doses  of  a  tea/^' 
spoonful  to  a  tablespoonful,  according  to  the  weight  of  the 
patient,  or  hot  tea  or  coffee,  every  10  or  15  minutes  for  the 
first  hour,  and  as  often  thereafter  as  may  seem  expedient. 
Later  manifestations:  After  reaction  is  fully  established  there 
is  great  danger  of  congestion  of  the  lungs,  and  if  perfect  rest 
is  not  maintained  for  at  least  forty-eight  hours  it  sometimes 
occurs  that  the  patient  is  seized  with  great  difficulty  of  breath- 
ing, and  death  is  liable  to  follow  unless  immediate  relief  is 


Fig.  4. — Movements  by  one  person  to  produce  inspii-ation. 

afforded.  In  such  cases  apply,  a  large  mustard  plaster  over  the 
breast.  If  the  patient  gasps  for  breath  before  the  mustard 
takes  effect,  assist  the  breathing  by  carefully  repeating  the 
artificial  respiration. 


iii 


Modification  of  Rule  III. 


,^To  be  used  after  Rules  I  and  II  in  case  no  assistance  is  at  hand.] 


To  Produce  Respiration. — If  no  assistance  is  a^  hand  an^?' 
one  person  must  work  alone,  turn  the  patient  on  the  back,  the 


INSTRTTCTIONS  FOR  COAST  QTTARD  STATIONS. 


roll  of  clothing  being  so  placed  as  to  raise  the  pit  of  the  stomach 
above  the  level  of  the  rest  of  the  body ;  draw  forward  the 
tongue  and  keep  it  projecting  just  beyond  the  lips ;  if  the  lower 
jaw  be  lifted  the  teeth  may  be  made  to  hold  the  tongue  in 
place;  it  may  be  necessary  to  retain  the  tongue  by  passing  a 
handkerchief  under  the  chin  and  tying  it  over  the  head. 

Take  position  astride  the  patient's  hips,  as  in  Figure  5. 
Grasp  the  arms  just  below  the  elbows  and  raise  them  steadily 
upward  by  the  sides  of  the  patient's  head  to  the  ground,  the 
hands  nearly  meeting,  holding  them  there  while  slowly  count- 


FiG.  5. — Movements  by  one  persoi^  to  produce  expiration. 

ing  1,  2,  3,  4  <a  period  of  2  to  2^  seconds).    This  enlarges  the 
capacity  of  the  chest  and  induces  inspiration.     ( Pig.  4. ) 

Next  lower  the  arms  to  the  sides  and  just  before  they  reach 
the  ground  drop  them  and  instantly  grasp  the  body  with  the 
hands,  the  balls  of  the  thumbs  resting  on  either  side  of  the  pit 
of  the  stomach,  the  fingers  falling  into  the  grooves  between  the 
short  ribs ;  now,  using  his  knees  as  a  pivot,  the  operator  will 
throw  (not  too  suddenly)  all  his  weight  forward  on  his  hands, 
and  at  the  same  time  squeeze  the  waist  between  them  as  if  he 
wished  to  force  anything  in  the  chest  upward  out  of  the  mouth ; 


INSTETTCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  87 

he  will  deepen  the  pressure  while  he  slowly  counts  1,  2,  3,  4 
(a  period  of  2  to  2i  seconds),  then  suddenly  let  go  with  a  final 
push,  which  will  spring  him  back  to  his  first  position  as  in 
rule  III.    This  completes  expiration.     ( Fig.  5. ) 

At  the  instant  of  letting  go,  grasp  the  arms  just  below  the 
elbows  and  raise  them  steadily  upward  by  the  sides  of  the 
patient's  head  to  the  ground,  holding  them  there  while  slowly 
counting  1,  2,  3,  4  (a  period  of  2  to  2i  seconds).  This  completes 
inspiration.     (Fig.  4.) 

Repeat  these  movements  12  to  15  times  in  every  minute — thus 
imitating  the  natural  motions  of  breathing.  zv 

Instbuctions  foe   Saving   Drowning   Persons   by   Swimming 
TO  Their  Relief. 

362.  1.  When  you  approach  a  person  drowning  in  the  water 
assure  him  with  a  loud  and  firm  voice  that  he  is  safe.  : ' 

2.  Before  jumping  in  to  save  him,  divest  yourself  as  far  and 
as  quickly  as  possible  of  all  clothes ;  tear  them  off  if  necessary ; 
but  if  there  is  not  time,  loose  at  all  events  the  foot  of  your 
drawers,  if  they  are  tied,  as,  if  you  do  not  do  so,  they  fill 
with  water  and  drag  you. 

3.  On  swimming  to  a  person  in  the  sea,  if  he  be  struggling 
do  not  seize  hira  then,  but  keep  off  for  a  few  seconds  till  he 
gets  quiet,  for  it  is  sheer  madness  to  take  hold  of  a  man  when 
he  is  struggling  in  the  water,  and  if  you  do  you  run  a  great 
risk. 

4.  Then  get  close  to  him  and  take  fast  hold  of  the  hair  of 
his  head,  turn  him  as  quickly  as  possible  onto  his  back,  give 
him  a  sudden  pull,  which  will  cause  him  to  float,  then  throw 
yourself  on  your  back  also  and  swim  for  the  shore,  both  hands 
having  hold  of  his  hair,  you  on  your  back  and  h«  also  on  his, 
and  of  course  his  back  to  your  stomach.  In  this  way  you  will 
get  sooner  and  safer  ashore  than  by  any  other  means,  and  you 
can  easily  thus  swim  with  two  or  three  persons;  the  writer 
has  even,  as  an  experiment,  done  it  with  four,  and  gone  with 
them  40  or  50  yards  in  the  sea.  One  great  advantage  of  this 
method  is  that  it  enables  you  to  keep  your  head  up  and  also 
to  hold  the  person's  head  up  you  are  trying  to  save.  It  is  of 
primary  importance  that  you  take  fast  hold  of  the  hair  and 
throw  both  the  person  and  yourself  on  your  backs.  After  many 
experiments  it  is  usually  found  preferable  to  all  other  methods. 
You  can  in  this  manner  float  nearly  as  long  as  you  please,  or 
until  a  boat  or  other  help  can  be  obtained. 


W  UTSTHTTCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

5.  It  is  believed  there  is  no  sucli  thing  as  a  death  grasp;  at 
least  it  is  very  unusual  to  witness  it.  As  soon  as  a  drowning 
man  begins  to  get  feeble  and  to  lose  his  recollection  he  gradu- 
ally slackens  his  hold  until  he  quits  it  altogether.  No  appre- 
hension need,  therefore,  be  felt  on  that  head  when  attempting 
to  rescue  a  drowning  person. 

6.  After  a  person  has  sunk  to  the*  bottom,  if  the  water  be 
smooth,  the  exact  position  where  the  body  lies  may  be  known 
by  the  air  bubbles,  which  will  occasionally  rise  to  the  sur- 
face, allowance  being  of  course  made  for  the  motion  of  the 
water,  if  in  a  tideway  or  stream,  which  will  have  carried 
the  bubbles  out  of  a  perpendicular  course  in  rising  to  the  sur- 
face. Oftentimes  a  body  may  be  regained  from  the  bottom, 
before  too  late  for  recovery,  by  diving  for  it  in  the  direction 
Indicated  by  these  bubbles. 

i'i7;  On  rescuing  a  person  by  diving  to  the  bottom  the  hair  of 
the  head  should  be  seized  by  one  hand  only  and  the  other  used 
in  conjunction  with  the  feet  in  raising  yourself  and  the  drown- 
ing person  to  the  surface. 

8.  If  in  the  sea,  it  may  sometimes  be  a  great  error  to  try  to 
get  to  land.  If  there  be  a  strong  "  outsetting  "  tide,  and  you  are 
swimming  either  by  yourself  or  having  hold  of  a  person  who  can 
not  swim,  then  get  on  your  back  and  float  till  help  comes.  Many 
a  man  exhausts  himself  by  stemming  the  billows  for  the  shore 
on  a  back-going  tide,  and  sinks  in  the  effort,  when,  if  he  had 
floated,  a  boat  or  other  aid  might  have  been  obtained. 

9.  These  instructions  apply  alike  to  all  circumstances,  whether 
as  regards  rough  sea  or  smooth  water. 

'/''''^'    "  '■'    '■         Treatment  of  Frostbites. 

365.  1.  Do  not  bring  the  patient  to  the  fire,  nor  bathe  the 
parts  in  warm  water. 

2.  If  snow  be  on  the  ground,  or  accessible,  take  a  woolen 
cloth  in  the  hand,  place  a  handful  of  snow  upon  it,  and  gently 
rub  the  frozen  part  until  the  natural  color  is  restored.  In  case 
snow  is  not  at  hand,  bathe  the  part  gently  with  a  woolen  cloth 
in  the  coldest  pesli  water  obtainable — ice  water,  if  practicable. 

3.  In  case  the  frostbite  is  old,  and  the  skin  has  turned  black 
or  begun  to  scale  off,  do  not  attempt  to  restore  its  vitality  by 
friction,  but  apply  boracic  acid  ointment  on  a  little  cotton ;  after 
which  wrap  the  part  loosely  in  flannel. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  89 

4.  In  all  cases,  as  soon  as  the  vitality  has  been  restored,  apply 
the  boraeic  acid  ointment,  prepared  according  to  the  following 
formula : 

Boraeic  acid  ointment — 
Boraeic  acid,  1  part. 
Vaseline,  9  parts. 
Mix. 

5.  In  the  case  of  a  person  apparently  dead  from  exposure  to 
cold,  friction  should  be  applied  to  the  body  and  the  lower  ex- 
tremities, and  artificial  respiration  practiced  as  in  cases  of  the 
apparently  drowned.  As  soon  as  the  circulation  appears  to  be 
restored,  administer  aromatic  spirits  of  ammonia  or  hot  tea  or 
coffee  at  inten^^als  of  15  or  20  minutes  until  the  flesh  feels 
natural.  Even  if  no  signs  of  life  appear,  friction  should  be  kept 
up  for  a  long  period,  as  instances  are  on  record  of  recovery  after 
several  hours  of  suspended  animation. 

BEACH-APPARATUS  DRILL. 

371.  Beach-apparatus  drill  shall  be  so  far  as  practicable  pre- 
cisely the  same  as  at  a  wreck,  using  the  apparatus  on  the  beach 
cart.  The  drill  shall  consist  in  the  mustering  of  the  crew,  the 
recital  by  each  member  of  his  particular  duties,  the  rigging  of 
the  gear  over  a  distance  of  approximately  75  yards  from  the 
sand  anchor  to  the  wreck  pole,  and  the  carrying  out  of  the  drill 
as  prescribed.  If  practicable,  the  range  from  the  gun  to  the 
wreck  pole  should  be  across  water.  Powder  must  be  used  in 
every  case  unless  the  supply  on  hand  is  reduced  to  3  pounds, 
in  which  case  the  district  superintendent  shall  be  notified.  The 
use  of  small  practice  gear  is  forbidden.  A  short  whip  and  haw- 
ser of  regulation  size  will  be  allowed,  but  in  every  other  respect 
the  gear  shall  be  of  service  size  and  kind.  When  a  practice  shot 
line  is  used,  it  shall  be  removed  from  the  pins  and  fired  from 
the  box  precisely  as  in  actual  service.  Once  each  quarter  the 
regulation  gear  on  the  service  beach  cart  shall  be  used.  The 
sand  anchor  shall  be  securely  buried  at  every  drill  and  a  man 
landed  in  the  buoy.  A  post  or  ready-buried  anchor  shall  not  be 
used  except  where  absolutely  unavoidable. 

372.  Beach-apparatus  drill  shall  be  held  twice  each  week  dur- 
ing the  first  month  after  a  station  is  placed  in  commission,  and 
once  each  week  thereafter. 

373.  Practice  with  the  life  car  shall  be  substituted  for  that 
with  the  breeches  buoy  at  least  twice  each  year.  The  car  must 
be  examined  for  leaks  after  each  practice. 


90  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

374..  The  hawser  cutter  shall  be  bent  on  ready  for  hauling  off 
once  each  month,  but  the  hawser  shall  not  be  cut.  The  keeper 
shall,  when  advisable,  demonstrate  the  use  of  the  hawser  cutter 
by  bending  it  on  to  a  condemned  line  or  hawser  and  cutting  it. 

375.  The  senior  petty  officer  and  No.  2  shall  on  alternate 
months  conduct  the  drill  once,  taking  the  keeper's  place,  the 
keeper  falling  out.  When  the  senior  petty  officer  conducts  the 
drill,  he  performs  his  own  duties  and  those  of  keeper  assisted 
by  No.  2;  No.  2  performs  his  regular  duties  and  assists  No.  1. 
When  No.  2  conducts  the  drill  he  performs  the  duties  of  keeper 
and  of  No.  1,  assisted  by  No.  1 ;  No.  1  performs  the  regular  du- 
ties of  No.  2  and  assists  No.  2.  At  such  drills  each  of  the  other 
men  will  perform  his  regular  duties. 

376.  At  each  drill  the  person  in  charge  shall  note  the  time 
elapsing  from  the  moment  the  command  Action  is  given  until 
the  man  is  landed  at  the  crotch.  This  time,  and  the  distance 
of  the  sand  anchor  from  the  pole,  shall  be  noted  in  the  log. 

Words  of  command: 

Open  boat-room  doors — Man  the  beach  cart. 

Forward. 

Halt. 

Action. 

Man  lee  whip,  haul  off. 

Man  weather  whip,  haul  ashore. 

377.  Open  boat-room  doors — Man  the  beach  cart, —  (1)  Nos. 
5  and  6  open  and  secure  the  boat-room  doors.  If  necessary  to 
run  the  boat  out,  Nos.  1  and  2  ship  the  pole  or  shafts  of  the 
boat  wagon;  No.  1  holding  the  pole,  No.  2  inserting  the  bolt. 
The  crew  run  out  the  boat,  No.  1  and  No.  2  guiding  the  pole. 
The  men  then  take  their  stations  at  the  beach  cart,  face  to  the 
front  with  the  drag  ropes  over  their  shoulders,  as  shown  in 
fig.  1. 

i'  (2)  The  keeper  before  giving  the  command.  Forward!  will 
duster  the  crew,  and  each  man  upon  his  number  being  called 
will  make  the  hand  salute  and  recite  his  duties  as  given  below. 
Keeper. — Has  general  supervision;  selects  place  to  bury  sand 
anchor  and  position  for  gun ;  places  firing  plank,  if  one  is  used ;  ^ 
places  gun  in  position ;  provides  cartridge,  primer,  and  lan- 
yard ;  loads  and  sights  gun  and  determines  elevation  with  the 
level;  pricks  cartridge,  primes,  and  fires  gun;  signals  the 
wreck  to  haul  oif  whip ;  lights  hawser  to  the  surf ;  hitches  whip 

1  If  firing  plank  is  used,  keeper  himself  will  train  gun. 


INSTRTJCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 


91- 


around   neck  of  buoy   block  and  bends  buoy -bridle  to  whip; 
raises  center  of  crotch. 

(3)  No.  1. — Assist  keeper  to  place  gun  in  position;  provide 
shot  and  hold  for  No.  2  to  bend  shot  line  to,  then  insert  shot 
in  bore ;  train  gun ;  ^  bend  shot  line  around  whip ;  attend  left 
part  of  whip ;  if  on  lee  side,  bend  whip  to  hawser ;  hold  breeches 
buoy  block  while  keeper  bends  on  whip,  and  then  snap  block 
on  hawser ;  man  fall  and  left  leg  of  crotch. 


Fig.  1. — M^n  the  beach  cart. 


(4)  iVo.  2. — Place  shot-line' box  in  position ;  bend  shot  line  into 
shot ;  train  gun ;  ^  take  a  half-hitch  with  shot  line  over  tail  of 
whip  block ;  attend  right  part  of  whip ;  if  on  lee  side,  bend  whip 
to  hawser,  hold  breeches-buoy  block  while  keeper  bends  on  whip 
then  snap  block  on  hawser ;  man  fall  and  right  leg  of  crotch. 
j,(5)  No.  3. — Place  shot-line  box  in  position;  stretch  tackle 
(outer  block)  ;  haul  whip  from  reel  while  it  is  being  hauled  off 
to  the  wreck,  and  if  on  lee  side  do  the  same  while  hawser  is 


1  If  firing  plank  is  used,  keeper  himself  will  train  gun. 


92 


IKSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GTTAED  STATIONS. 


being  hauled  off ;  haul  in  slack  of  hawser ;  bend  strap  or  chain 
tail  for  outer  block  of  tackle;  man  fall  and  left  leg  of  crotch; 
am  shifting  man  on  whip. 

(6)  No.  4. — Unload  buoy  from  cart;  place  crotch,  hawser,  and 
buoy  in  position;  stretch  tackle  and  hook  inner  block  into  sand- 
anchor  pennant ;  haul  whip  from  reel  while  it  is  being  hauled 
off  to  the  wreck,  and  if  on  lee  side  to  the  same  while  hawser  is 


Fig.   2.— H<«(ilbg«'back. 


being  hauled  off;  haul  in  slack  of  hawser;  hook  outer  block  of 
tackle ;  man  fall  and  right  leg  of  crotch ;  am  shifting  man  on 
whip.  '    . 

(7)  No.  5. — Open  and  secure  boat-room  doors;  unload  sand 
anchor,  shovels,  and  pick,  and  bury  sand  anchor ;  man  weather 
part  of  whip  when  hauling  off  hawser ;  haul  in  slack  of  hawser, 

.aim  tdB'i 


INSTRirCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.  93 

look  inner  block  if  pennant  block  is  used ;  man  and  belay  fall ; 
im  shifting  man  on  whip. 

(8)  No.  6. — Open  and  secure  boat-room  doors;  unload  sand 
inchor,  shovels,  and  pick,  and  bury  sand  anchor ;  man  weather 
3art  of  whip  when  hauling  off  hawser ;  haul  in  slack  of  hawser, 
snatch  hawser,  and  make  cat's-paw  if  pennant  block  is  used; 
nan  fall  and  center  of  crotch ;  am  shifting  man  on  whip. 

(9)  No,  7. — In  drill  go  to  wreck  pole:  in  service  unload  shov- 
jls  and  pick,  and  assist  to  bury  sand  anchor ;  man  weather  part 
)f  whip  when  hauling  off  hawser;  haul  in  slack  of  hawser^ 
nan  fall  and  center  of  crotch ;  am  shifting  man  on  whip.       - 1 

(10)  If  the  crew  consists  of  a  keeper  and  eight  men,  No.  8| 
It  drill,  will  go  to  the  wreck  pole  instead  of  No.  7;  in  service 
lis  duties  will  be  the  same  as  those  of  No.  7.  ' 

378.  Forward. — The  beach  cart  will  be  hauled  from  the  sta4 
:ion  to  the  wreck.  When  going  down  the  skids  or  any  steep 
ieclivity  Nos.  1  and  2  will  guide  the  cart,  while  Nos.  3,  4,  5^ 
ind  6  hold  back  on  the  drag  ropes.     (See  flg.  2.)  - 

379.  Halt. — The  keeper  will  direct  the  cart  to  be  placed' 
)etween  the  surf  and  the  spot  he  selects  for  the  sand  anchoi^ 
ind  a  few  yards  to  windward  (current),  the  cart  facing  thej 
mrf.     (See  fig.  3.)  ! 

380.  (1)  Action. — The  relative  positions  assumed  by  the  menj 
for  the  purpose  of  placing  the  apparatus  are  shown  by  fig.  4.; 
rhe  current  is  supposed  to  be  running  from  the  right,  as  shown 
ly  the  arrow. 

(2)  Keeper  puts  on  his  haversack;  No.  4  throws  buoy  off  the 
2art;  Nos.  5,  6,  and  7  unload  the  shovels,  pick,  and  sand 
inchor,  and  proceed  at  once  to  bury  the  sand  anchor  where  di- 
rected by  the  keeper.  The  sand  anchor  must  be  opened,  its 
sides  at  right  angles  to  each  other,  and  buried  upon  its  flat  in 
a  narrow  trench  of  sufficient  depth,  say  2  feet,  and  the  trench 
bhen  filled  in  solidly  about  it.  Nos.  2  and  3  remove  the  shot-line- 
box.  Keeper  and  No.  1  remove  the  gun,  and  place  it  in  position; 
four  or  five  paces  to  windward  of  the  cart ;  Nos.  2  and  3  place 
the  shot-line  box,  inverted,  on  a  line  with  the  muzzle  of  the  gun, 
and  3  feet  to  windward  (wind),  unless  the  wind  is  directly  on 
shore,  when  they  will  place  it  to  the  right,  and,  after  lifting 
the  pins  clear  of  the  line,  will  cant  the  box  in  the  direction  of 
the  wreck. 

(3)  If  through  carelessness  the  shot  line  has  been  faked  too 
tightly  upon  the  pins,  it  should  not  be  forced  off  the  pins  by 
the  bottom  board,  which  is  liable  to  split,  but  the  frame  should 


94 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  OTTARD  STATIONS. 


be  raised  and  a  few  of  the  bottom  fakes  removed  with  the  hand, 
when  the  remainder  will  fall  off  into  its  place  in  the  box. 

(4)  Keeper  loads  with  cartridges,  No.  1  provides  the  shot, 
wipes  and  holds  it  while  No.  2  wets  a  fathom  of  the  shot  line 


K(K«fMf. 


rjl^TJH  m 


\S-^.___  _ 


V^ 


'^Jnac^  for  Sand  Anchor. 


Fig.    3. — Halt. 


and  bends  it  into  the  shank  with  three  half  hitches.     No.  1  then 
inserts  the  shot  into  the  bore  from  side  of  gun,  forcing  it  gently 
but  firmly  down  upon  the  charge  without  disturbing  the  fakes 
and  without  any  slack  line   between  the  gun  and   the  shop-  I 
line  box. 


96 


INSTEUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GTTARD  STATIONS. 


(5)  Nos,  1  and  2  take  position  on  their  knees  on  the  left  and 
right  side  of  the  gun,  respectively,  and  train  the  muzzle  to  the 
right  or  left  by  the  rear  handles,  as  directed  by  the  keeper,  who 
pricks  the  cartridge,  leaving  the  priming  wire  in  the  vent,  steps 
2  or  3  yards  to  the  rear,  sights  over  the  gun,  and  commands 
'•  Right,"  "  Left,"  or  "  WeU,"  as  required,  giving  his  orders  in 
a  sharp,  distinct  tone. 

(6)  The  lateral  training  obtained,  due  allowance  being  made 
for  the  wind,  the  keeper  gives  the  gun  the  necessary  elevation 
with  the  combination  level,  withdraws  the  priming  wire,  inserts 
the  primer,  bending  the  loop  at  a  right  angle  to  the  tube,  hooks 


PiO.  5. — Manner  in  wbich  shot  line  is  bent  to  whip  and  tall. 


the  lanyard  into  the  loop,  stands  off  on  the  weather  side,  gives 
the  cautionary  word  **  Ready,"  and  fires. 

(7)  When  firing  the  gun,  the  keeper  reeves  the  lanyard 
through  the  rear  handle  of  the  carriage  and  gives  a  sharp, 
strong  pull  in  a  direction  below  the  level  of  the  vent,  to  avoid 
disturbing  the  elevation. 

(8)  In  the  meanwhile  No.  4  unloads  and  carries  the  crotch 
to  a  point  on  a  line  between  the  sand  anchor  and  wreck,  at  a 
suitable  distance  from  the  water,  on  the  bluff  of  the  bank,  if 
possible,  and  opens  it  wide,  span  on  the  left,  the  legs  forming 
a  straight  line  parallel  with  the  beach,  and  then  carries  the 
breeches  buyy  and  en^  of  hawser  to  a  point  in  front  of  the 


rlTSTRirCTIONS  FOR  COAST  OTARi)  STATIONS.'  '^  d7 
,  and  as  near  the  water  as  possible.  If  the  wooden  buoy 
block  is  used,  he  reeves  the  end  of  the  hawser  through  it  and 
attaches  the  tally  board. 

(9)  Nos.  3  and  4  stretch  tlie  tackle  from  the  sand  anchor 
toward  the  crotch  (3  at  outer  block,  4  at  inner  or  white  block), 
remove  the  straps,  leaving  it  clear  and  ready  to  be  placed  upon 
the  hawser. 

(10)  If  a  threefold  tackle  is  used,  No.  4  hooks  the  inner 
(white)  block  into  the  sand-anchor  pennant. 

(11)  Communication  being  made  with  the  wreck,  No.  1 
takes  a  round  turn  and  two  half  hitches  with  the  shot  line 
around  both  parts  of  the  whip  immediately  behind  the  block, 
while  2  makes  a  half  hitch  over  the  end  of  the  tail  of  whip 
block  with  the  bight  of  the  shot  line.     (See  fig.  5.) 

Fig.  6  shows  the  position  of  the  men  and  apparatus  at  this 
stage. 

(12)  The  keeper  makes  a  signal  to  the  wreck  to  haul  on 
board ;  No.  1  tends  to  the  left  and  No.  2  the  right  part  of  the 
whip,  separating  them  a  distance  of  50  or  more  yards;  Nos.  3 
and  4  haul  the  whip  from  the  reel  as  fast  as  it  is  needed,  No.  3 
standing  on  the  left,  No.  4  on  the  right.     (See  fig.  7.) 

(13)  When  the  tail  block  has  been  made  fast  on  board  the 
wreck,  the  lee  man  (No.  1  or  No.  2)  bends  the  bight  of  the  lee 
part  of  the  whip  to  the  hawser  just  inside  the  tally  board, 
with  a  round  turn  around  the  hawser  and  a  half  hitch  around 
the  standing  part  of  the  whip,  the  end  of  the  hawser  hanging 
loose.  Fig.  8  shows  the  method  of  bending  the  lee  part  of 
the  whip  to  the  hawser. 

(14)  The  men  man  the  weather  part  of  the  whip,  excepting 
the  lee  man  (No.  1  or  No.  2),  who  tends  the  lee  part  of  the 
whip,  keeping  it  clear  of  the  hawser,  which  will  drift  to  lee- 
ward of  it,  and  the  lee  man  (No.  3  or  No.  4),  who  hauls  the 
whip  from  the  reel.  The  keeper  hauls  the  hawser  from  the 
cart  and  lights  it  to  the  surf.     (See  fig.  9.) 

(15)  The  hawser  having  reached  the  wreck,  the  lee  man 
(No.  1  or  No.  2)  holds  the  breeches-buoy  block  while  the  keeper 
throws  over  it  a  clove  hitch  with  the  bight  of  the  weather  part 
of  the  whip,  and  hauls  it  snug  around  the  neck.  The  block  is 
then  snapped  on  the  hawser  by  the  holder,  and  the  keeper 
bends  the  buoy  bridle  into  the  whip,  inshore  of  the  buoy,  with 
a  bowline  knot. 

67385"— 17 7 


Ob 


:1 


3   f 
w,0 


1*^ 


■ifT 


100 


INSTRTrCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GTTARD  STATIONS. 


(16)  If  the  wooden  buoy  block  is  used,  the  buoy  is  passed 
down  through  the  loops  of  the  clove  hitch  and  the  hitch  hauled 
very  snug  around  the  neck  of  the  block.     (See  fig.  10.) 

(17)  When  a  threefold  purchase  is  used  the  pennant  block  is 
dispensed  with,  and  as  soon  as  the  hawser  is  made  fast  to 
the  wreck  the  men  who  have  been  manning  the  weather  part 
of  the  whip  haul  in  the  slack  of  the  hawser,  No.  5  holding  the 


r:;;®^-- 


^-"'^f^-'^V--^ 


Fig.  8. — Manner  in  which  bight  of  whip  is  bent  to  hawser. 

turn  around  the  sand-anchor  pennant  of  pennant  cleat,  No. 
3  adjusting  the  strap  or  chain  tail  around  the  hawser,  and 
No.  4  hooking  the  outer  block  of  the  tackle  into  the  strap. 
The  proper  manner  of  adjusting  the  strap  is  shown  in  figure  11. 
(18)  The  hawser  is  then  hauled  moderately  taut  by  the 
keeper  and  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  4,  5,  6,  and  7.  No.  5  takes  a  turn 
with  the  fall,  while  Nos.  3  and  1  at  the  heel  of  the  left  leg  of 
the  crotch  and  Nos.  2  and  4  at  the  heel  of  the  right  leg,  with 
the  keeper  and  Nos.  6  and  7  in  the  center,  raise  the  crotch  by 
raising  the  center,  bringing  the  heels  as  near  together  as  neces- 
sary, No.  3  passing  and  securing  the  span.     (See  fig.  12.) 


102        INST^mCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GTTARD  STATIONS. 

(19)  The  crotch  is  inclined  otitward  sufficiently  to  allow  the 
hawser  to  be  bauled  well 'taut  upon  its  gaining  a  perpendicular 
position.'  •  '  \       '    ;' 

(20)  The  tackle  is  again  manned  and  the  hawser  hauled  taut 
when  the  fall  is  belayed  by  No.  5  around  the  neck  of  the  inner 
block  or  pennant  cleat   (being  careful  not  to  choke  the  luff) 


Manner  in  which  whip  Is  attached  to  breeches  buoy. 


and  the  whip  is  manned.  If  it  becomes  necessary  to  fleet  the 
threefold  tackle  when  the  pennant  block  is  not  used,  No.  5 
takes  a  turn  with  the  hawser  around  the  sand-anchor  pennant 
or  pennant  cleat,  No.  3  fleets  the  strap,  and  No.  4,  with  the 
necessary  assistance,  overhauls  and  hooks  the  outer  block  of 
the  tackle. 


INSTRTTCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.        103 


(21)  To  fleet  tackle  when  pennant  block  is  used,  the  keeper 
with  a  strap  and  heaver,  racks  both  parts  of  hawser  together 
near  pennant  block,  and  the  tackle  is  then  overhauled  and 
hooked  by  the  men  assigned  to  those  duties. 

(22)  When  a  twofold  purchase  and  a  pennant  block  are  used. 
No.  6,  as  soon  as  the  hawser  is  attached  to  the  wreck  snatches 
the  bight  into  the  pennant  block  and  locks  it,  and  the  men 
on  the  weather  part  of  the  whip  haul  in  the  slack  of  the 
haw^ser,  when  Nos.  3,  4,  5,  and  6  put  the  tackle  on  Nos.  3  and 
4  at  the  outer  block,  No.  3  with  the  strap,  Nos.  5  and  6  at  the 


r' 

t 
1 

^  ^ 

'-""^iSS^^^^^^^K**^^ 

g?«maa»-—               ""HJJi^ 

Fig.  11. — Manner  of  adjusting  strap  to  hawser. 

inner  block,  No.  6  making  a  cat's-paw  fai  the  hauling  part  of  the 
hawser,  into  which  Nos.  5  and  6  hook  the  inner  block. 

381.  Man  lee  whip— Haul  off.— Nos.  1  and  2  have  charge  of 
the  left  and  the  right  side  of  the  whip,  respectively.  Nos. 
3,  4,  5,  6,  and  7  are  shifting  men,  man  the  lee  part,  and  haul 
the  buoy  off  to  the  wreck.     (See  fig.  13.) 

382.  (1)  Man  weathsr  whip — Haul  ashore. — Nos.  3,  4,  5,  6, 
and  7  shift  to  the  weather  part  of  the  whip  and  haul  ashore, 
the  keeper  superintending  and  assisting  when  necessary.  (See 
fig.  14.) 


€01 


bar.  ^ 


^ff^^l 


I.,    :     mi     ' 
,1/    •    IHfM 


I 


104 


DSrSTKUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.        107 

(2)  The  keeper  and  No.  7  assist  the  rescued  persons  out  of 
the  buoy  when  they  reach  the  shore.  .  , :. 

383.  Odd  numbers  are  on  the  left,  even  numbers  are  on  thei 
right  when  stationed  at  the  beach  cart;  and  throughout  the 
exercise,  when  two  numbers  work  in  company,  as  in  training 
the  gun,  tending  the  whip,  hauling  the  whip  from  the  reel, 
etc.,  the  odd  number  is  on  the  left,  the  even  number  on  the  right. 

384.  The  exercise  must  be  considered  as  a  whole,  and  when  a 
man  has  performed  one  duty  he  will  proceed  to  execute  the 
next  assigned  him.  All  must  work  together.  While  the  keeper 
and  Nos.  1  and  2  are  opening  compiunication  with  the  gun  and 
shot  line,  Nos.  3,  4,  5,  and  6  will  have  the  hawser  and  its  con- 
nections ready  for  sending  off  and  hauling  taut. 

385.  When  practicing.  No.  6  or  No.  7  will  go  to  the  wreck 
pole  as  soon  as  the  gun  is  discharged,  and  haul  off  and  make 
fast  the  whip  and  hawser. 

386.  When  the  individuals  of  the  crew  have  become  expert  in 
the  performance  of  their  several  special  duties,  they  are,  in 
drill,  to  be  successively  transferred,  temporarily,  to  the  per- 
formance of  the  duties  of  each  of  the  other  members,  until 
every  man  becomes  proficient  in  the  particular  duties  of  every 
position.  This  change  is  effected  by  making  each  man,  ex- 
cept the  keeper,  shift  his  station  at  the  beach  cart  one  place, 
proceeding  in  the  same  direction  as  the  hands  of  a  watch  move. 
Thus,  in  the  first  change,  No.  7.  acts  as  No.  1,  No.  1  as  No.  3, 
No.  3  as  No.  5,  No.  5  as  No.  6,  No.  6  as  No.  4,  No.  4  as  No.  2, 
and  No.  2  as  No.  7.     (See  Fig.  1.) 

387.  In  many  instances,  after  communication  is  made  with  a 
wreck,  as  many  as  two  or  three  hundred  yards  of  shot  line 
will  be  left  in  the  box.  The  keeper  must  be  governed  by  cir- 
cumstances as  to  the  best  method  of  handling  the  surplus  line. 
If  there  is  no  danger  of  the  wreck  going  to  pieces,  the  spare 
line  may  be  hauled  on  board  the  wreck,  the  shore  end  being 
bent  around  the  whip;  but  where  great  haste  is  necessary  it 
must  be  cut. 

388.  In  service  at  a  wreck  the  bight  of  the  shot  line  should 
not  be  bent  around  the  whip,  as  the  portion  inshore  is  liable  to 
foul  the  whip. 

389.  Instances  may  occur  when  a  wreck  is  breaking  up 
rapidly,  and  there  is  not  sufficient  time  to  send  off  the  whip 
and  hawser,  or  the  crew  are  too  much  exhausted  to  haul  the 
gear  off.  In  such  cases,  after  communication  is  made  by  means 
of  the  shot  line,  that  line  should  be  cut,  and  the  shore  end  bent 
to  a  single  part  of  the  whip;  when  the  end  of  the  whip  has 


i6^       INStRtrCTIONS  POR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

reached  the  wreck,  the  bight  of  the  whip  should  be  bent  into  the 
slings  of  the  buoy  (block  removed)  so  that  the  buoy  may  be 
pulled  off  through  the  surf  by  the  people  on  the  wreck. 

390.  Work  can  be  facilitated  if,  after  the  gear  is  set  up  and 
in  working  order,  a  good  man  from  one  of  the  adjacent  crews 
be  sent  off  to  the  wreck  in  the  breeches  buoy  to  superintend  thef 
work  at  that  end,  assist  the  people  into  the  buoy,  etc. 

391.  When  more  than  one  crew  are  present,  the  adjacent 
crews  will  assist  in  hauling  off  and  setting  up  the  hawser,  haul- 
ing the  buoy  off  and  on,  and  assisting  the  people  from  it. 

392.  Keepers  are  particularly  directed  to  allow  no  interfer- 
ence in  the  management  of  the  apparatus  from  outside  parties, 
but  may  accept  their  assistance  in  hauling  on  ropes,  etc. 

393.  When  the  life  car  is  to  be  used  in  drill,  where  the  drill 
grouhd  is  over  water,  it  should  be  substituted  for  the  breeches 
buoy,  and  be  hauled  to  and  from  the  wreck  pole  upon  the 
hawser  in  the  same  manner  as  the  buoy,  the  hawser  being  rove 
through  the  eye  of  each  bail  and  the  whip  line  made  fast  to 
the  bails  as  follows:  Take  two  half  hitches  with  a  bight  of 
the  whip  around  the  outer  bail  under  the  eye,  carry  the  whip 
to  the  inner  bail  and  make  it  fast  with  a  bight  as  before,  hav- 
ing the  bail  upright,  and  the  whip  between  them  taut,  for  a 
span.  In  addition  to  this,  the  practice  at  a  drill  should  include 
the  hauling  of  the  car  back  and  forth  through  the  water  as 
follows : 

394.  The  shot  line  having  fallen  over  the  wreck  pole,  bend  the 
whip  line  into  the  rings  at  the  ends  of  the  life  car  in  the  same 
manner  as  described  above,  except  that  the  line  between  the 
rings  should  be  left  sufficiently  slack  not  to  obstruct  the  hatch 
of  the  car.  The  car  should  then  be  hauled  back  and  forth  over 
the  water.  This  maneuver  should  be  repeated  two  or  three 
times.  Where  this  can  not  be  done  on  account  of  the  absence 
of  w^ater  at  the  drill  ground,  two  men  will  go  out  in  the  surf- 
boat  and  anchor  it  at  the  usual  practice  distance  from  the 
shore.  The  line  will  then  be  fired  across  the  boat,  and  the 
drill  will  be  carried  out  as  last  above  directed. 

.  <[  lion-^i']    ■■[■.>.     :  ■■'.'■'■. 

'  ,   ,  TO  LOAD  THE  BEACH  CART. 

401.  The  !^^Ws  al^e  hot  to  be  iexferciised  in  loading  the  carts 

expeditiousty,  but  rather  in  compactly  stowing  the  apparatus, 
following  the  instructions  herein  contained. 


INSTEUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.         109 

402.  The  apparatus  must  be  placed  upon  the  cart  in  the  fol- 
lowing order: 

(a)  The  reel  is  to  be  unshipped.  One  man  lights  along  the 
hawser  while  four  men,  one  at  each  corner  of  the  cart,  proceed 
to  coil  it  down,  right-handed  and  from  the  outside  toward  the 
center,  in  a  Flemish  coil.  Having  completed  the  first  layer, 
carry  the  bight  to  the  outside  of  the  coil  and  coll  toward  the 
center  again.  This  is  done  in  order  that  the  hawser,  wheU  in 
use,  may  run  from  the  center  of  the  coil.  • 

(&)  Tally  board  No.  2  is  to  be  spliced  or  bent  on  the  top  end  of 
the  hawser  and  stowed  away  in  the  center  of  the  coil. 

(c)  Ship  the  reel.  Reeve  the  whip  through  the  tail  block, 
make  each  end  of  the  whip  fast  with  a  slight  stop  at  each  side 
of  the  reel,  and  reel  up,  working  toward  the  middle  of  the 
spindle ;  when  both  parts  meet,  work  back  to  the  end,  and  so  on 
until  the  whip  is  on  the  reel,  when  the  tail  block  will  hang  in 
the  middle  of  the  whip  over  the  front  of  the  reel. 

(d)  Tally  board  No.  1  is  to  be  spliced  permanently  into  the 
tail  of  the  whip  block  just  above  the  splice. 

(e)  The  inner  block,  or  that  next  the  sand  anchor,  should  be 
painted  white,  the  outer  one  left  bright.  The  tackle  is  to  be 
overhauled  its  full  length,  and  a  strap  placed  around  all  parts 
of  the  fall,  under  each  block.  The  outer  block  is  to  be  placed 
under  the  reel,  on  the  left  side,  and  all  parts  of  the  fall,  coiled 
right-handed  around  upon  the  hawser,  laying  them  down  flat, 
leaving  olf  with  the  inner  block  under  the  reel,  opposite  the  first. 

(/)  The  gun  Is  to  be  placed  athwart  the  hawser,  immediately 
over  the  axle,  muzzle  to  the  right.  Stops,  3  feet  long,  are 
spliced  into  the  top  of  the  sides  of  the  cart  body,  and  are  made 
fast  through  the  front  and  rear  handles  of  the  right  side  of  the 
gun  carriage. 

(g)  Shot-line  box  A,  containing  No.  9  line,  is  to  be  placed 
across  the  cart  in  the  rear  of  the  gun,  filling  the  space  between 
the  gun  and  the  tailboard.  Stops,  3  feet  in  length,  are  spliced 
into  the  top  of  the  sides  of  the  cart  body,  and  are  made  fast 
into  the  handles  of  the  shot-line  box,  and  No.  7  and  No.  4  lines 
in  their  respective  boxes  are  secured  on  top  of  all. 

(h)  The  shot  lines  must  be  faked,  as  shown  in  the  diagram 
(fig.  15),  and  hauled  as  closely  around  the  pins  as  can  be  done 
without  springing  them.  ♦ 

(i)  The  rammer  is  to  be  placed  between  the  gun  and  the  sh6f- 
llne  box.  ''^ 


110        INSTETTCTIONS  FOE  COAST  GTJAEI)  STATIONS. 

(;)  The  tailboard  is  cut  away  sufficiently  on  the  top  under 
the  rails  to  admit  of  its  being  raised  to  drive  under  the  tail- 
board and  hawser  two  pieces  of  wood,  one-half  inch  thick,  2 
inches  wide,  3  and  3  feet  long,  one  on  each  side,  leaving  4  inches 
projecting.  The  sand  anchor  is  to  be  placed  across  the  rear  end 
of  the  cart,  upon  its  edge,  resting  upon  these  projecting  pieces, 
the  pennant  hooked  into  it  and  moused. 

(k)  The  stops  spliced  into  the  eyes  of  the  tailboard  rods  are 
to  be  passed  down  outside  of  the  anchor,  around  the  horns  of 
the  cross  frame  of  the  cart  body,  back,  up  outside  the  anchor, 
and  made  fast  in  the  eye  again.  'li  \ 

(7)  The  pennant  is  to  be  kept  up  in  place  by  the  same  stops,  i 
The  sharp  point  of  the  pickax  is  to  be  stuck  between  the  sand 


,         Fig.  15. — Method  pf  faking  the  shot  line. 

anchor  anil  tlie  tailboard,  on  the  left  side,  the  handle  to  the 
right,  the  point  of  the  pick  resting  upon  the  sand-anchor  support. 

(m)  The  loops  of  the  shovel  handles  are  to  be  placed  over  the 
upper  horn  of  the  pick,  blades  of  the  shovels  to  the  right,  and 
kept  in  place  by  a  stop  spliced  around  the  right  rear  brace  oi 
the  cart  body  and  brought  up  oyer  and  around  the  shovel  han 
dies.  / 

(n)  A  f-inch  hole  is  bored  through  both  legs  of  the  crotch,  at 
a  distance  from  the  bolt  equal  to  the  extreme  length  of  the  cart 
A  span  of  1^-inch  rope,  3  fathoms  long,  is  spliced  into  one  o 
these  holes.  The  crotch  is  to  be  secured  under  the  cart  on  th( 
left  side  by  taking  a  half  hitch  around  both  legs  with  this  span 
making  the  span  fast  around  the  horn  of  the  after  crosspiee* 
of  the  cart  body,  the  head  of  the  crotch  being  made  fast  at  th( 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUAED  STATIONS.        Ill 

breast  piece  with  a  two-legged  stop  spliced  tliere  for  that 
purpose.  "  ' ' 

(o)  Three  shot  and  a  heaving  stick  and  line  are  to  be  placed 
upon  the  hawser  in  front  of  the  gun,  a  piece  of  bagging  being 
put  under  them. 

(p)  Upon  the  gun  there  is  to  be  placed  a  haversack  contain- 
ing three  6-ounce,  three  5-ounce,  and  three  4-ounce  cartridges, 
filled  and  marked,  and  two  dozen  primers. 

(q)  The  breeches  buoy  is  to  be  laid  upon  its  flat,  resting  upod 
the  reel  and  gun.  The  speaking  trumpet  is  to  be  hung  over  thej 
left  headboard  rod.  i 

(r)  The  gun  worm  and  ax  are  to  be  hung  in  leather  becketi^ 
on  the  left  and  right  sides  of  the  cart  body,  respectively.  < 

{s)  The  tarpaulin,  stopped  at  the  corners  and  sides,  is  to  bd 
spread  over  all. 

(t)  A  water  light  shall  always  be  carried,  suspended  from 
the  underside  of  the  cart.  A  life  preserver  also  shall  be  carried 
on  the  cart  for  the  use  of  the  man  who  might  be  sent  into  the 
surf  with  the  lines.  Signal  fla?:s  shall  be  becketed  underneath; 
the  beach  cart  and  a  lantern  shall  be  carried  suspended  from 
the  underside  of  the  cart. 

403.  Loaded  as  above,  the  reel  stanchions  placed  6  inches 
from  the  headboard,  the  cart  should  exactly  balance.  If, 
through  difference  in  size  and  weight  of  crotch  and  sand  anchor, 
the  cart  does  not  balance,  it  can  be  adjusted  by  moving  the  gun! 
a  few  inches  forward  or  aft.  j 

404.  While  standing  In  the  house  the  cart  should  have  a' 
support  under  the  center  of  the  axle.  1 


sup 


HAWSES   CUTTER. 


411.   (1)  After  the  crew  is  landed  from  a  stranded  vesssel,  it: 
may  be  necessary  to  detach  the  hawser  from  the  wr^ck,"- either 
for  the  purpose  of  using  it  elsewhere  or  because  the  wreck  is 
rapidly  breaking  up.    In  either  case  the  hawser  cutter  should  be 
used.    To  do  this,  the  breeches  buoy  is  first  removed,  and  then, 
facing  the  wreck  and  standing  on  the  left  of  the  hawser,  the 
cutter  is  placed  upon  it  by  grasping  it,  as  shown  in  figure  16, 
the  white  end  of  the  cutter  being  inshore,  the  eyes  of  the  knives  . 
inclined  toward  the  wreck.    The  cutter  is  then  closed  and  the] 
clasp  secured.  "^ 

(2)  The  becket  in  the  outer  end  of  the  cutter  should  have  two 
eyes  formed  in  the  bight  by  passing  a  seizing  around  both  parts. 


lu     nrsTistvcTioiis  *or  coast  oirAitT)  wawoits. 


Fio.  16. — Applying  hawser  cutter. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GTTARD  STATIONS. 


113 


2  inches  from  the  bight,  and  a  second  seizing  2  inches  from  the 
first.  The  method  of  bending  the  whip  to  the  hawser  cutter  is 
as  follows  (see  fig.  17)  : 


Fig.  17. — Hawser  cutter  arranged  for  hauling  oflf. 


(3)  Bend  a  bight  of  the  weather  part  of  the  whip  into  the 
outer  eye  of  the  becket,  leading  from  the  outer  end  of  the  cut- 
ter, with  a  sheet  bend,  as  at  A,  and  the  tail  of  the  ^if^  Ijan- 
67385-— 17 8 


•Liil  yxii  *:io 


Wl        UrSTRTTCTrONS  FOE  COAST  GTTARD  STATIONS. 

yards  into  another  bight  of  the  same  part  of  the  whip  with  a 
bowline  linot,  B,  allowing  sufficient  slack  line,  C  (say,  2 
fathoms),  to  permit  the  knives  to  work. 

(4)  About  2  feet  inshore  of  the  last  knot,_  take,  up  another 
bight,  D,  of  the  whip,  and  pass  it  up  through  the  second  eye  in 
the  outer  becket,  toggling  it  with  another  bight,  E.  This  trans- 
fers the  weight  of  the  whip  from  the  knives  to  the  becket,  thus 

'relieving  the  hawser  from  their  pressure  while  the  cutter  is 

I  being  hauled  off  to  the  wreck. 

(5)  Haul  the  cutter  out  as  close  as  possible  to  the  spar  to 
I  which  the  hawser  is  secured,  letting  tlie  part  of  the  whip,  F, 
'fast  to  the  knives,  hang  as  loosely  as  possible. 

.,  (6)  When  the  cutter  reaches  the  spar,  hold  fast  to  the  haul- 
.  ing-out  part,  haul  on  the  hauiing-in  part,  F,  attached  to  the 

knives,  which  will  remove  the  toggle  bight  E,  freeing  bight  D 
ifrom  the  eye,  allowing  the  strain  to  come  on  the  knives,  which 

will  cut  the  hawser. 

I      (7)  Haul  the  hawser  in  as  quickly  as  possible,  to  prevent  its 

{unlaying.     Haul  back,  and  unbend  the  whip  from  the  cutter. 

Unreeve  the  whip.    Keep  the  knives  sharp,  and  all  ironwork  of 

the  cutter  oiled. 
I 

!         MUSTER  AT  A  STATION  BY  AN  INSPECTING 
:  OFFICER. 

!  421.  (1)  The  muster  shall  be  held  in  the  most  suitable  place 
at  the  station,  as  directed  by  the  inspecting  officer.     The  uni- 

i  form  shall  be  clean  blue. 

i  (2)  The  keeper  shall  form  the  line,  giving  the  commands, 
Fall  in,  Right  dress,  and  Front,  and  when  the  line  is  dressed, 

;  he  shall  take  position  as  near  as  possible  in  front  of  the  center 
of  it  and  shall  command.  Right  hand,  SALUTE.    The  keeper 

ithen  faces  about,  salutes,  and  reports  to  the  inspecting  officer, 

'"Sir,   tlie  crew  is  mustered.^'     The  inspecting  officer  returns 

;  the  salute  and  commands,  "  Call  the  roll,  sir."  The  keeper 
faces  about  and  commands,  Two,  at  which  the  men  drop  th^r 
hands.  He  then  calls  the  roll.  Each  petty,  officer  as  his  name 
is  called  answers  with  his  rating,  and  each  of  the  other  men 
shall  answer  with  his  watch  number.    The  senior  petty  officer 

.  answers  for  each  absentee  by  stating  that  he  is  "  On  lookout," 
"  In  hospital,"  "Absent  without  leave,"  etc.,  as  the  case  may  be. 
After  the  roll  is  called  the  keeper  takes  position  to  the  right 
of  the  line. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.        116 

(3)  The  inspecting  officer  inspects  the  uniforms,  obtains  re- 
quired data,  and  aslis  the  usual  questions  as  to  complaints,  and 
when  he  finishes  commands  Dismiss. 

(4)  The  keeper  salutes,  steps  2  paces  to  the  front,  faces  left, 
marches  to  the  center  of  the  line,  faces  left  again,  and  com- 
mands DISMISSED. 

EXPLANATION    OF    COMMANDS. 

422.  (1)  FALL  IN. — At  this  command  the  crew  form  at 
Attention  in  the  order  of  precedence  (senior  petty  officer  on  the 
right),  heels  on  the  same  line,  feet  forming  an  angle  of  60°, 
knees  straight  without  stiffness,  body  erect  on  the  hips,  inclined 
a  little  forward,  shoulders  square  and  falling  equally,  arms  and 
hands  falling  naturally,  back  of  hand  outward,  thumbs  along 
seams  of  trousers,  elbows  near  body,  head  erect  and  square  to 
the  front,  chin  slightly  drawn  in  without  restraint, 'eyes  straight 
to  the  front.     (This  is  the  position  of  Attention.) 

(2)  RIGHT  DRESS. — ^At  this  command,  the  men,  except  No.  1, 
look  to  the  right,  just  touching  elbows,  and  dress  in  line  with 
No.  1. 

(3)  FRONT. — Given  when  the  men  are  in  a  straight  Una  All 
look  to  the  front. 

(4)  Right  hand,  SALUTE. — ^At  the  command.  Salute,  the  right 
arm  is  raised  sm.artly  till  the  tip  of  the  forefinger  touches  the 
headdress  above  the  right  eye,  thumb  and  forefinger  extended 
and  joined,  palm  to  the  left,  forearm  inclined  at  about  45°,  hand 
and  wrist  straight.  The  hand  is  held  in  this  position  until  the 
command  Two  is  given,  when  the  hand  is  dropped  smartly  by 
the  side. 

(5)  About,  FACE. — At  the  first  command,  carry  the  toe  of  the 
right  foot  about  8  inches  to  the  rear  and  3  inches  to  the  left 
of  the  left  heel,  without  changing  the  position  of  the  left  foot. 
At  the  second  command  turn  upon  the  left  heel  and  right  toe, 
face  to  the  rear,  and  replace  the  right  heel  by  the  side  of  the 
left. 

(6)  DISMISSED. — At  this  command,  the  crew  salute  with  the 
right  hand  and  fall  out  of  the  line. 


iio%  ^^(^rmtjrmTo: 


llA 


^  APPENDIX. 


Treasuby  Department, 
Washington,  October  25 ,  1916, 
The  questions  and  answers  contained  In  tlie  appendix  are^ 
for  the  purpose  of  assisting  the  district  superintendents  anct* 
keepers  in  t^e  instruction  of  the  crews,  of  Coast-Guard  stations.* 

A.  J.  Peters, 

Assistant  Secretary, 
Uy. 

fir  

QUESTIONS  AND  ANSWERS. 

Boats  UndbTe  Oaes. 

Question.  What  general  rules  govern  a  good  oarsman? 

Answer.  A  good  oarsman  In  a  well-drilled  crew  sits  erect  on 
his  thwart,  foet  toprether  on  his  stretcher,  hands  together  oA' 
handle,  with  backs  up,  oar  level  with  rail,  blade  trimmed  with 
blade  of  stroke  oar. 

At  "Give  way  together"  the  first  motion  is  to  lean  well  for- 
ward, keep  back  straight,  shove  both  arms  out  perfectly  straight 
in  front,  point  blade  forward  and  down,  and  turn  it  so  that  as 
it  is  about  to  enter  the  water  the  flat  part  of  the  blade  is  per- 
pendicular.    The  second  motion:  With  feet  on  stretcher,  eyes 
looking  straight  aft  (not  watching  blade),  keep  arms  perfectly 
rigid,  and  lean  back  beyond  the  vertical.    Always  lay  back  on 
your  oar  and  pull  it  through  the  water.    Do  not  attempt  to  puUV 
ivith  the  arms  alone,  but  always  bring  the  muscles  of  the  bactf 
into  play.     The   third   motion    is   known   as   the   "  recovery.**- ' 
When  leaning  back  beyond  the  vertical,  by  bending  the  arms 
quickly,  the  blade  is  pulled  through  the  water  and  a  sudden 
force  is  applied  to  the  oar;  this  is  the  most  efficient  part  of  the' 
stroke.    The  oar  is  withdrawn  from  the  water,  and  the  wrlsti^ 
are  dropped  until  the  blade  is  parallel  to  the  water.    Take  the 
next  stroke  without  stopping.  '/ 

Question.  Wh^t  arel  the  general  rules' for  boats*  cijews? 


118        INSTRirCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GXTARD  STATIONS. 

Answer.  (1)  When  the  boat  is  called  away  move  on  the  ruUt 
and  man  the  boat  as  soon  as  possible.  (2)  Always  pull  a  good 
strong  stroke  and  pay  strict  tittentiou  to  orders.  Paddling  and 
slouchiness  in  a  station  boat  shall  not  be  permitted.  (3) 
Never  stand  up  in  a  boat  if  it  can  be  avoided.  (4)  The  crew  of 
a  boat  shall  always  be  in  uniform  and  clean.  (5)  Never  engage 
in  conyersa^ioji  in  a  .bop.t  during  drills  or  in  performance  of 
duty;,!  (6)  Always  get  into  a  boat  ahead  of  an  officer,  and  leave 
it  after  hin^  unless  he  gives  orders  to  the  contrary.  If  you  are 
a  passenger,  always  rise  and  salute  when  an  o:fficer  enters  or. 
lei^ves  a  boat  in  which  you  are  seated.         ,..  I, 

Question.  What  precautions  should  be  taken  in  going  into  a 
crowded  landing  ?        ^ 

Answer.  The  boat  should  be  pulled  easily,  kept  under  control 
with  oars  as  long  as  possible,  laying  on  oars  if  necessary,  and 
boating  them  only  at  the  last  minute. 

Question.  Whajt  <pjrepaut;ions  japQ  necessary  in  gging  through  a 
narrow  entrance?' ^ 

Answer.  Get  good  way  on  the  boat,  then  trail  or  toss  the  oars. 

Question.  What  precautions  are  necessary  in  i^uUing  across 
the  current? 

^ns\Ye'r.  Try  to  get  a  range  on  two  objects  in  line,  and  steer 
by  these  to  keep  from  being  set  down  by  the  current. 

Question.  Which  holds  her  way  longer,  a  loaded  or  a  light 
boat?  ,.      -   ,.  .  ^,  „^ 

^swer.  A  loaded  boat.      v  .     m,,;  -  .        .^    ■>;!••  1/ 

Question.  What  is  the  tet  .t}\ip^,i^p -^a.  whea  jbuhave  a  longr. 
puj^  against  the  tide?  /-,/,;,';;;  (.Vw''  ; 

Answer.  Run  inshore  wliei^  ti^^^^  ^lacjiier  than  it  is  in 

midstream  and  where  there  is  sometimes  an  eddy. 

Question.  What  about  carrying  a  lantern? 
,  Answer.  Always  see  that  there  is  a  lantern,  filled  and 
trinmied,  in  the  boat.  If  the  lantern  is  not  provided  with  a 
shutter,  it  shall  be  fitted  with  a  canvas  screen.  When  lighted 
jind  not  in  use  the  lantern  shall  be  kept  so  that  it  will  not  get 
adrift  or  capsize. 

Question.  What  precautions  must  be  taken  regarding  going 
alongside? 

^n^wer.  Never  go  alongside  a  vessel  that  has  sternboard,  or 
which  ^backing  her  engines.  In  going  alongside  in  a  seaway  or 
when  a  strong  tide  is  running  warn  the  bowmen  to  look  out  for 
the  boat  .Hue,  whicji  should  be  hove  from  the  vessel. 

Question.  How  would  you  run  a  line  with  a  pulling  boat? 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOE  COAST  GUABD  STATIONS.        Itt 

Answer.  Coil  most  of  tlie  line  in  the  stern  sheets,  but  take 
end  enough  in  the  bow  to  make  fast  when  you  reach  the  re- 
quired place.  Pull  away  and  let  the  vessel  pay  out  more  line 
until  you  are  sure  of  having  enough  in  the  boat  to  reach  the 
place,  then  pay  out  from  the  boat.  If  laying  out  with  the  tide, 
take  less  line  in  the  boat  than  otherwise.  If  against  the  tide, 
and  if  practicable,  take  all  the  line  in  the  boat,  pull  up  and  make 
fast,  then  bring  end  to  ship.  W  ith  a  long  line  to  be  laid  out  in 
a  strong  current,  it  will  usually  be  necessary  tx)  have  several 
boats,  one  to  run  away  with  the  end,  the  others  to  underrun 
the  line  at  intervals,  floating  it  and  pulling  against  the  current 
with  the  bight.  If  the  end  is  to  be  secured  to  a  bollard,  put  a 
bowline  in  the  end  before  stai-ting  and  throw  this  over  the 
bollard.  Bend  on  a  heaving  line  and  let  one  of  the  bow  oars- 
men throw  this,  if  hands  are  standing  by  to  receive  it,  or  j\imp 
ashore  with  it  himself  if  necessary. 

Boat  Sailing.  ' 

Question.  What  is  meant  by  the  trim  of  a  boat? 

Answer.  The  way  she  sits  in  the  water.  She  is  said  to  trim 
by  the  head  or  by  the  stern,  according  as  to  whether  she  Is 
deeper  in  the  water  forward  or  aft.  »• 

Question.  What  effect  does  the  position  of  weights  have  i  to 
sailing  a  boat?  '  < 

Answer.  If  most  of  the  weight  is  forward  she  will  trim  by 
the  head.  In  this  case  her  stern  is  light  and  not  deep  in  the 
water;  consequently,  the  stern  will  tend  to  go  off  to  leeward, 
throwing  her  head  up  into  the  wind.  She  will  need  weather 
tiller  to  keep  her  by  the  wind.  Similarly,  if  weights  are  well 
aft  her  stern  will  be  deep  in  the  water  and  her  bow  light.  The 
wind  will  blow  the  bow  off,  the  boat  will  tend  to  fall  off,  and  it 
V,  ill  require  more  lee  tiller  to  keep  her  by  the  wind. 

Question.  What  is  meant  by,  "  By  the  wind  "  ? 

Answer.  A  boat  is  on,  or  by,  the  wind  when  she  is  sailing  as 
close  to  the  wind  as  she  can  and  still  keep  good  headway. 

Question.  What  is  meant  by  weather  tiller  and  by  lee  tiller? 

Answer.  Weather  tiller:  When  the  tiller,  looking  forward, 
points  to  the  weather  side.    Lee  tiller  is  just  the  opposite. 

Question.  What  do  you  mean  by  the  weather  side? 

Answer.  Side  toward  the  wind ;  that  on  which  the  wind  first 
strikes.    The  lee  side  is  the  side  away  from  the  wind.        vol 

Question.  What  is  the  tiller? 


120        INSTETTCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Answer.  The  bar  fitted  fore  and  aft  in  the  rudder  head,  by 
means  of  which  the  rudder  is  moved. 

Question.  Wliat  is  tacking? 

Answer.  When  a  boat  is  close-hauled  on  one  tack,  by  putting 
the  tiller  down  and  letting  go  the  head  sheets,  she  is  brought 
up  head  to  wind;  then  by  properly  working  the  sails  she  is 
made  to  fall  off  on  the  other  tack.  This  is  tacking.  The  head 
goes  through  the  wind. 

Question.  What  Is  the  object  of  tacking? 

Answer.  To  work  a  boat  to  windward. 

Question.  What  is  meant  by  putting  a  tiller  down? 

Answer.  Putting  the  tiller  over  to  the  lee  side. 

Question.  What  is  meant  by  putting  the  tiller  up? 

Answer.  Putting  the  tiller  over  to  the  weather  side. 

Question.  What  is  meant  by  wearing? 

Answer.  Getting  a  boat  on  the  opposite  tack  by  putting  the 
tiller  up,  running  off  from  the  wind  and  gradually  bringing 
her  to  the  wind  on  the  other  tack.  The  head  goes  away  from 
the  wind ;  the  stern  goes  through  the  wind. 

Question.  Which  is  the  better  method  of  working  to  wind- 
; ward,  tacking  or  wearing? 

h:  Answer,  Tacking,  because  if  properly  performed  the  boat  will 
lose  nothing  to  leeward.  On  the  contrary,  she  will  head  reach 
and  gain.  That  is,  she  will,  while  in  stays  (while  in  process 
of  tacking)  run  several  boats*  lengths  to  windward.  In  wear- 
ing, on  the  contrary,  as  a  boat  is  run  to  leeward  a  part  of  the 
time,  much  distance  is  lost.  The  only  advantage  of  wearing 
■lies  in  the  fact  that  there  is  always  possibility  of  failure  in 
tacking,  and  greater  certainty  about  wearing.  ■>  ;•  s>' 
ii  Question.  What  is  "  leeway  "  ? 

•J'  Answer.  The  drift  a  boat  makes  away  from  the  wind  when 
l:flose-hauled. 

Question.  What  is  meant  by  "  heaving  to  "  ? 

Answer.  Bringing  a  boat's  head  to  the  wind,  and  so  adjusting 
her  sails  that  she  will  make  no  headway  through  the  water. 

Question.  What  is  "gybing"? 

Answer.  A  boat  gybes  when  the  wind  shifts  around  the 
stern,  causing  the  main  boom  to  fly  over  rapidly  from  one  side 
to  the  other. 

Question.  Is  it  ever  safe  to  gybe? 

Answer.  Only  in  moderate  breezes.  If  the  breeze  is  fresh, 
lower  the  mainsail  before  letting  the  wind  shift  from  one  quar- 
ter to  the  other. 


INSTKTTCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GTTARD  STATIONS.        121 

Question.  What  is  meant  by  "  luffing  *'  ? 

Answer.  Putting  tiller  down,  tlirowing  boat  up  into  the  wind. 

Question.  When  is  it  time  to  reef? 

Answer.  When  a  boat  begins  to  take  in  water  over  the  lee 
rail.    Never  be  afraid  of  reefing  too  soon. 

Question.  What  is  meant  by  "wing  and  wing"? 

Answer.  When  a  boat,  sailing  before  the  wind,  rigs  foresail 
out  on  opposite  side  from  mainsail  she  is  sailing  wing  and  wing. 

Question.  Is  this  safe? 

Answer.  Yes,  in  moderate  weather. 

Question.  If  it  is  found  necessary  to  carry  ballast  in  a  sta- 
tion's boat,  what  should  it  be? 

Answer.  Ahvays  water  in  breakers.  Never  carry  sinking  bal- 
last; that  is,  ballast  heavier  than  water.  Boats  fitted  with 
water-ballast  tanks  need  no  other  ballast  when  the  tanks  are 
filled.     Stow  w^eights  as  low  as  possible. 

Question.  What  are  the  general  instructions  regarding  trim? 

Answer.  To  do  her  best  under  sail  a  boat  must  be  trimmed 
according  to  her  build  and  rig.  If  she  carries  much  head 
sail  she  will  have  to  be  deeper  forward  than  would  otherwise 
be  desirable.  If  she  has  little  or  no  head  sail  she  would  trim 
by  the  stern.  Weights  should  be  kept  out  of  the  ends  of  the 
boats.  Too  much  weather  tiller  can  be  corrected  by  shifting 
weights  aft ;  too  much  lee  tiller  by  shifting  them  forward. 

Question.  What  precautions  should  be  observed  in  handling 
sheets? 

Answer.  Never  belay  a  sheet  in  any  weather.  In  a  moderate 
squall  the  boat  should  be  luffed  sufficiently  to  shake  without 
spilling  the  sails,  thus  keeping  headway  enough  to  retain  con- 
trol, but  with  the  sheets  in  hand  (as  ahvays).  If  it  becomes 
stronger  luff  more  decidedly  and  slack  sheet.  The  sheet  may, 
of  course,  be  let  go,  and  in  a  sudden  emergency  this  must  be 
done  at  once,  in  addition  to  putting  the  tiller  down,  and.  If 
necessary,  reducing  sail.  But  the  longer  you  can  keep  the  boat 
under  control  the  better,  and  to  let  go  the  sheet  is  to  give  up 
control.     The  above  instructions  are  for  use  when  on  the  wind. 

In  running  free  different  instructions  hold  good.  Here  the 
sail  can  not  be  spilled  by  a  touch  of  the  tiller ;  consequently, 
slack  the  sheet  while  luffing.  The  force  of  the  wind  would 
be  reduced  by  running  off,  but  if  it  becomes  too  strong  you  can 
do  nothing  but  lower  the  sail,  and  the  chances  are  that  it 
will  bind  against  the  shrouds  and  refuse  to  come  down.  There 
1?  also  danger  that  the  wind  will  shift  in  a  squall,  causing 
the  mainsail  to  gybe  with  violence. 


122        INSTRITCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Handling  Power  Boats.  ^J 

Question.  What  study  should  a  keeper  make  concerning  ^h 
handling  of  power  boats  at  his  station? 

Answer.  He  should  make  a  special  study  of  his  boat  with 
view  of  getting  perfectly  familiar  with  her.  He  should  lear 
by  practice  the  turning  circle  and  the  effect  of  the  screw  unde 
different  conditions.  He  should  inform  himself  of  the  amour 
of  gasoline  required  to  run  a  given  distance  at  ordinary  spee 
under  usual  conditions.        •-^:    ■     ":  .. 

Question.  What  is  the«effect  of  the  screw  in  steering? 

Answer.  Generally  speaking,  a  right-handed  screw  when  g< 
ing  ahead  tends  to  throw  the  stern  to  starboard ;  when  backinj 
to  port.  In  other  words,  the  stern  is  dragged  around  in  th 
direction  the  propeller  is  turning,  and  this  effect  is  notice 
whether  the  boat  itself  has  begun  to  answer  the  motion  c 
the  propeller  or  not.  In  attempting  to  turn  a  power  boat  th 
rudder  should  be  shifted  when  the  propeller  is  shifted  instea 
of  waiting  for  the  boat  to  lose  its  headway,  for  the  rudder  hs 
the  same  general  effect  on  the  steering  of  the  boat  when  th 
propeller  is  backing,  w^hether  the  boat  itself  is  moving  aster 
or  has  not  yet  lost  its  headway  and  is  still  forging  ahead.  Th] 
rule  is  not  strictly  applicable  to  all  boats,  but  it  is  a  good  gei 
eral  rule  for  boats  with  a  single,  right-handed  screw. 

Question.  How  would  you  make  a  landing  with  a  power  boat 

Answ^er.  Make  landings  with  slow  speed.  In  making  a  lam 
ing  it  is  a  common  mistake  to  keep  too  much  headway  on  and  t 
rely  upon  backing  the  engine  full  speed  to  stop  the  boat.  Thi 
is  poor  seamanship,  as  the  engines  may  fail  to  back  promptl: 
causing  a  collision  or  smash  up,  and  if  they  do  back  hard  i 
throws  unnecessary  strain  on  them. 

Question.  How  w^ould  you  make  a  landing   alongside  of 
ship  in  a  strong  current? 

Answer.  Do  not  let  the  current  catch  the  boat  on  the  outwar 
bow,  as  this  might  sweep  her  with  force  against  the  ship's  sid 
or  gangway.  The  painter  or  a  line  from  the  ship  may  be  usee 
the  boat  being  kept  off  a  little  from  the  side  until  it  is  fast,  an 
then  sheered  in  by  the  rudder.  A  boat  may  lie  alongside  safel 
in  a  strong  current  with  a  line  from  the  inner  bow^'and 'th 
rudder  slightly  over  for  sheering  out.  '       '*  '   "*^  •;'  '      '     '^  ^ 

Question.  How  should  a  power  boat  be  trimmed  for  towing? 

Answer.  In  tOwing  the  stern  of  the  towing  boat  should  be  ker 
well  dow^n  by  shifting  weights  aft  if  necessary.  This  keeps  th 
propeller  well  immersed  and  gives  it  a  good  hold  on  the  water. 


IKSTRtrCTIONS  FOR  COAST  OTTAUD  STATIONS.        128 

Question.  What  precautions  should  be  taken  when  running  iu 
a  seaway? 

Answer.  When  running  in  a  seaway  speed  should  be  reduced' 
somewhat,  not  only  to  avoid  shipping  seas  but  to  reduce  the' 
strain  on  the  machinery  due  to  the  racing  of  the  screw.  In 
running  into  a  sea  it  is  possible  by  careful  nursing  to  make  fair 
speed,  watching  the  seas  and  slowing  or  even  stopping  for  a 
moment  as  heavy  seas  are  seen  bearing  down  on  the  boat  If 
the  man  who  is  running  the  engine  has  sufficient  experience  to 
regulate  the  speed  in  this  manner  it  is  convenient  to  leave  this 
to  him  if  he  can  see  ahead.  If  running  more  or  less  across  the 
sea  it  is  well  to  head  up  momentarily  for  a  heavy  wave. 

Towing. 

'Question.  Towing  an  unladen  boat  in  a  smooth  sea,  what  pre- 
cautions should  be  taken  by  the  towing  boat  and  tow? 

Answer.  Towing  boat  passes  clear  of  oars  of  the  tow,  places 
herself  in  line  ahead,  receives  painter  from  tow,  secures  it  to 
ringbolt  in  sternpost,  and  starts  slowly  ahead  as  soon  as  she 
has  hold  of  the  painter.  Bowman  in  the  tow  does  not  give 
towing  boat  his  painter  until  she  is  about  ahead.  He  then 
takes  in  slack  towline,  keeping  a  strain  on  it,  and  gradually 
pays  it  out,  thus  getting  way  on  the  tow  gradually  and  avoiding 
too  sudden  a  strain  on  the  towline  or  stem  of  the  boat. 

Question.  What  precautions  are  taken  in  case  the  tow  is 
heavily  laden  or  the  sea  rough? 

Answer.  Toggle  the  painter  to  a  stretcher  between  the  two 
after  thwarts  of  the  towing  boat  and  to  the  forward  thwart 
of  the  tow.  To  steer,  bear  towline  over  on  the  quarter  toward 
which  you  want  to  turn,  for  the  rudder  will  be  of  little  use. 

Question.  Give  precautions  when  carrying  stores. 

Answer.  Be  careful  of  the  oars,  as  they  may  easily  be  injured 
by  letting  stores  fall  on  them.  Keep  all  casks  hung  up  and 
have  tarpaulins  for  covering  articles  that  might  be  injured  by 
water.  While  loading  bear  in  mind  any  rough  water  that  you 
may  encounter.  Do  not  overload  a  boat ;  you  may  capsize  or  be 
responsible  for  loss  of  life.  When  carrying  treasure  always 
attach  a  buoy  with  a  drift  of  the  line  at  least  equal,  to  lEe 
greatest  depth  of  water  on  the  way  back  to  the  station.  '     ,    , 

Question.  How  would  you  tow  astern  of  a  large  vessel? 

Answer.  When  being  towed  astern  of  a  large  vessel,  use  a 
short  scope,  so  as  to  remain  close  under  the  counter,  with  the 


\gf^       INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Ijft^.jPl^'tly  out  of  water.  In  casting  oft,  when  there  are  other 
boats  towing  astern,  be  careful  before  letting  go  either  to  drop 
clear  qf  them  all  with  your  towline,  or  be  handy  with  your 
days  to  avoid  getting  athwart  the  hawse  of  any  of  them.  When 
towing  astern  the  towline  should  never  be  made  fast,  but 
sf^buld  always  be  tended. 

J  Question.  How  would  you  tow  alongside  of  a  vessel? 

.^^nswer.  If  towing  alongside,  have  the  towline  from  as  far 
fopvard  on  the  towing  vessel  as  possible ;  either  toggle  it  to 
the  forward  thwart  (steadying  it  over  the  stem  with  a  bight 
of  tlie  painter ) ,  or  pass  it  through  the  forward  rowlock  on  the 
side  nearest  the  towing  vessel.  Fay  particular  attention  to  the 
steering. 

Question.  What  precautions  mu^t  be  taken  for  the  manage- 
ment of  a  boat  in  tow? 

Ans\\:er,,  A  boat  should  never  be  towed  without  the  crew 
b'eiiig  in  her^  or  at  least  a  sufficient  number  of  men  to  manage 
l\er  in  the  event  of  her  breaking  adrift,  or  being  compelled  to 
c^st  off  from  the  towing  vessel. 

^'Question.  W^hen  would  you  use  a  drogue  in  being  towed? 

''Answ'er.  A  drogue  is  found  of  great  advantage  when  being 
towed  before  a  heavy  sea  as  it  prevents  the  boat  running 
aheacj  in  frout  of  a  sea  at  risk  of  damage  against  the  towing 
v|$s^J,  an^  keeps  a  more  equable  strain  on  the  towline. 

^  M^sineb's  Compass. 

Question.  What  is  a  compass? 

Answer.  An  instrument  by  which  a  ship  or  boat  may  be 
steered  on  a  given  course  or  by  which  bearings  of  an  object 
may  be.  taken. 

Question.  Describe  the  w^et  or  liquid  compass. 

Answer.  Briefly  it  is  a  magnetic  needle  or  several  parallel 
magnetic  needles  attached  to  a  compass  card,  so  fitted  as  to 
turn  easily  on  a  pivot  in  the  compass  bowl.  The  bowl  is  filled 
with  alcohol  to  keep  the  card  from  w^abbling  or  moving  too 
quickly.  ;The  whole  is  held. in  a  composition  case  called  the 
binnacle.  '  '        * 

Questioji.  Ho\v  is  the  compass  card  gi-aduated? 

Answer.  In  points,  half  points,  quarter  points,  and  degrees. 

Question.  How  many  points  are  there  in  each  quadrant  or 
quarter  of  the  compass  card? 

Answer.  Eight. 


INSTEXTCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GTTARD  STATIONS.        126 

Question.  How  many  points,  are  there  in  the  whole  compass 
card? 

Answer.  Thirty-two. 

Question.  Name  the  cardinal  points  of  the  compass. 

Answer.  Nortli,  south,  east,  and  west. 

Question.  Name  the  semicardinal  points  of  the  compass. 

Answer.  Northeast,  southeast,  southwest,  and  nortliwest. 
These  are  halfway  between  the  cardinal  points. 

Question.  What  are  the  eight  principal  points  of  the  com- 
pass? 

Answer.  The  four  cardinal  points  and  the  foi^r  semicardinal 
points. 

Question.  How  are  the  points  halfway  between  tjie  cardinal 
and  semicardinal  points  named? 

Answer.  The  point  halfway  between  north  and  northeast  is 
named  north-northeast;  the  point  halfway  between  north  and 
northwest  is  named  north-northwest ;  halfway  between  east 
and  northeast  is  named  east-northeast;  halfway  between  east 
and  southeast  is  named  east-southeast,  and  so  on. 

Question.  What  is  meant  by  "  boxing  the  compass  "  ? 

Answer.  By  calling  off  the  points  of  the  compass  in  order. 

Question.  Box  the  compass. 

Answer. — 

North.  South. 

North  by  east.  South  by  west 

North-northeast.  South-southwest. 

Northeast  by  north.  Southwest  by  south. 

Northeast.  Southwest. 

Northeast  by  east.  Southwest  by  west. 

East-northeast.  West-southwest 

East  by  north.  West  by  south. 

East.  West. 

East  by  south.  West  by  north. 

East-southeast  West-northwest 

Southeast  by  east.  Northwest  by  west. 

Southeast.  Northwest      '     • 

Southeast  by  south.  Northwest  by  ttdPthJ 

South-southeast.  North-northwest  ' 

South  by  east.  North  by  west. 

^Question.  Into  how  many  degrees  is  a  compass  card  divided? 
Answer.  Three  hundred  and  sixty. 

Question.  How  many  degrees  are  there  in  a  quadrant  or 
quarter  of  a  circle? 


126        INSTRUCTIONS'  FOE  COAST  •OXrARD  STATIONS. 

Answer.  One-fourth  of  360,  or  ^0. 

Question.  How  many  points  are  there,  in  90°  of  the  compass 
card? 

Answer.  Eight. 

Question.  How  many  degrees  are  there  in  one  point  of  the 
compass? 

Answer.  One-eighth  of  90°,  or  11^. 

Question.  How  many  points  is  it  from  northeast  to  east  by 
north? 

Answer.  Three.  , 

^Question.  How  many  points  is  it  from  northwest:  by  West  to 
southwest  by  south? 

Answer.  Eight. 

Question.  What  point  of  the  compass  is  5  points  east  of  north? 

Answer.  North'east  by  east.  .)  -  .!•:.• 

;  Question.  What  point  is  6  points  to  the  west  Of  south? 
'"lAnswer.  West-southwest. 
'Question.  What  is  the  opposite  bearing  to  east  by  north? 

Answer.  West  by  south. 

Question.  What  is  the  opposite  bearing  to  west-northwest? 

Answer.  East-s6utheast.  '         ■ 

(Questions  similar  to  the  above  should  be  continued  utitil 
perfect  familiarity  is  obtained;  there  is  no  better  way.) 

Question.  Does  the  north  point  of  the  compass  always  point 
to  the  true  north;  and  if  not,  why? 

A.  It  does  not  always  point  to  the  true  north,  becau^er  tH^ 
compass  needle  is  deflected  by  forces  called  variation  arid 
deviation.  : ,    ^ 

Question.  What  is  meant  by  the  compass  bearing  of  an 
object? 

Answer.  Its  direction  by  compass  without  correction  for  vari- 
ation or  deviation. 

Question.  What  is  the  lubber's  point  of  a  compass? 

Answer.  The  vertical  line  on  the  inside  of  a  compass  bowl 
corresponding  with  the  fore-and-aft  line  of  the  ship  or  boat. 

Question.  For  what  is  it  used? 

Answer.  In  steering  this  line  is  made  to ,  coincide  as  nearly 
as  possible  with  the  given  course.  - 

Question.  What  is  a  dumb  compass? 

Answer.  A  circle  marked  with  the  graduations  of  the  com- 
piiss  card,  but  without  a  needle.    It  is  used  for  taking  bearings. 

Question.  How  should  it  be  fixed  in  a  station? 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.      5 127 

Answer.  It  should  be  permanently  fixed  so  that  its  north  and 
south  points  coincide  with  the  north  and  south  points  of  the 
horizon. 

Question.  How  Is  a  dumb  compass  fitted  for  taking  bearings? 

Answer.  It  is  fitted  with  a  movable  sighting  bar  pivoted  at 
the  center  of  the  compass  card.        ^t;  i^'u      •  j.^ 

Rules  of  the  Road  fob  Boats. 

Question.  What  lights  :{u»i'jrequired  to  be  carried  by  row- 
boats?  /  ^     ;  ' 

ill. Answer.  Rowboats,  whether  under  oars  or  sail,  shall  have 
ready  at  hand  a  lantern  showing  a  white  light,  which  shall 
be  temporarily  exhibited  in  time  to  prevent  collision. 

Question.  What  fog  signals  are  required  for  a  power  boai 
underway  on  the  inland  waters  of  the  Atlantic,  Pacific,  and  Gulf 
coasts?  ;*<» 

Answer.  If  under  way  and  not  towing  or  being  towed  it  shall 
sound,  at  intervals  of  not  more  than  one  minute*  on  the  whistle 
a  prolonged  blast.  When  towing  other  vessels  It  shall  sound 
at  intervals  of  not  more  than  one  minute  three  blasts  in  suc- 
cession, namely,  one  prolonged  blast  followed  by  two  short 
blasts.  A  boat  towed  may  give,  at  intervals  of  not  more  than 
one  minute,  on  the  fog  horn  a  signal  of  three  blasts  in  suc- 
cession, namely^  one  prolonged  blast  followed  by  two  short 
blasts,  and  she  shall  not  give  any  other.  A  boat  when  at 
anchor  shall,  at  Intervals  of  not  more  than  one  minute,  ring 
the  bell  rapidly  for  about  five  seconds. 

Question.  When  is  a  power  boat  under  way  within  the  mean- 
ing of  the  rules  of  the  road?  ' 

Answer.  When  she  is  not  anchored  or  made  fast  to  the  shore 
or  to  a  ship  or  aground. 

Question.  What  is  the  definition  of  a  steam  vessel  by  the 
rules  of  the  road? 

Answer.  The  words  "  steam  vessel "  shall  include  any  vessel 
propelled  by  machinery. 

Question.  At  what  speed  should  vessels  proceed  in  a  fog, 
mist,  falling  snow,  or  a  heavy  rain  squall  ? 

Answer.  They  shall  go  at  a  moderate  speed,  having  careful 
regard  to  the  existing  circumstances  and  conditions. 

Question.  What  are  the  sailing  rules  when  one  boat  is  running 
free  and  another  is  close-hauled?  !     m  '       ,  ., 

ui  Answer.  A  boat  which  is  running  free  shall  keep  out  of 
the  way  of  a  boat  which  is  close-hauled.  ;  .    >  ., 


128        INSTRtrCTIONS  FOE  COAST  GTIARD  STATIONS. 

Question.  Two  boats  are  close-hauled  on  opposite  tacks,  which 
shall  keep  out  of  the  way  of  the  other? 

Answer.  A  boat  which  is  close-hauled  on  the  port  tack  shall 
keep  out  of  the  way  of  a  boat  which  is  close-hauled  on  the 
starboard  tack. 

Question.  Two  boats  are  running  free  with  the  wind  on  op- 
posite sides.     Which  shall  keep  out  of  the  way  of  the  other? 

Answer.  The  boat  which  has  the  wind  on  tiie  port  side  shall 
keep  out  of  the  way  of  the  other. 

Question*  Two  boats  are  running  free  with  the  wind  on  the 
same  side.     Which  shall  keep  out  of  the  way  of  the  other? 

Answer.  The  boat  which  is  to  windward  shall  keep  out  of  the 
way  of  the  boat  which  is  to  leeward. 

Question.  Which  has  the  right  of  way— a  boat  under  sail  with 
the  wind  aft,  or  any  other  boat? 

Answer.  A  boat  under  sail  which  has  the  wind  aft  shall  keep 
out  of  the  way  of  any  other  boat  under  sail. 

Question.  What  is  the  rule  of  the  road  about  power  boats  or 
boats  under  oars  meeting  end-on  or  nearly  end-on  so  as  to  in- 
volve risk  of  collision? 

Answer.  Each  shall  alter  her  course  to  starboard  so  that 
each  may  pass  on  the  port  side  of  the  other. 

Question.  In  the  preceding  question,  suppose  the  course  of 
each  power  boat  is  so  far  to  starboard  of  the  other  that  they 
are  not  to  be  considered  as  meeting  end-on,  what  shall  each  do? 

Answer.  Either  boat  should  immediately  give  two  short 
blasts,  W'hich  the  other  boat  should  answer  promptly  by  two 
similar  blasts,  and  they  shall  pass  on  the  starboard  side  of  each 
other. 

Question.  What  is  the  rule  for  power  boats  or  boats  under 
oars  crossing  so  as  to  involve  risk  of  collision? 

Answer.  The  boat  which  has  the  other  on  its  own  starboard 
side  shall  keep  out  of  the  w^ay  of  the  other. 

Question.  Wliat  is  the  rule  for  a  power  boat  or  a  boat  under 
oars  meeting  or  crossing  a  boat  under  sail? 

Answer.  The  boat  under  power  or  oars  shall  keep  out  of  the 
way  of  the  boat  under  sail. 

Question.  Wlien,  under  the  rules,  one  boat  must  keep  out  of 
the  way,  what  shall  the  other  do? 

Answer.  The  other  shall  keep  her  course  and  speed. 

Question.  If  a  boat,  whether  under  oars,  sail,  or  power.  Is 
overtaking  another  boat,  what  shall  the  overtaking  boat  do? 

Answer.  The  overtaking  boat  shali^keep  out  at  the  way  of 
the  overtaken  boat.  ifr  >^4,)li>  -A  iljlu-f  inod  u  jt 


INSTRTJCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.        129 

Question.  What  sound  signals  are  used  by  power  boats  on 
approaching  eacli  other? 

Answer.  Any  power  boat  approaching  another  shall  indicate 
what  course  she  intends  to  take  by  the  following  signals  on 
her  whistle: 

(a)  One  short  blast  to  mean,  "I'itbi  directitig'  my  course  to 
starboard."  '  '^     '*'     ' 

(b)  Two  short  blasts  to  mean,  "I  am  directliig  hay  course  to 

port."  ' ;   ; 

(c)  Three  short  blasts  to  mean,  "My  erigiiie^  ar^  going  full 
speed  astern." 

Question.  Do  the  signals  in  the  preceding  question  also  apply 
to  a  power  boat  approaching  a  steam  vessel?       '  '    / 

Answer.  They  do.  ^  ' 

Question.  To  which  side  of  a  fairway  must  a  boat  ordihairily 
be  kept?  '  '' 

Answer.  In  a  narrow  channel  every  boat  under  power  or 
oiirs  shall,  when  it  is  safe  or  practicable,  keep  to  that  side  of 
the  fairway  or  mid-channel  whicR  lies  on  the  starboard  side  of 
such  boat.  :       i  >  .       ,     . 

Qi^estion.  What  signal  is  given  on  nearing  a  short  turn  or 
benrf?     '     '  . 

Answer.  A  loiig  blast  on  the  S;rh!stle. 

Question.  Suppose  a  long  blast  is  answered  by  a  simitar  bldst 
from  the  far  side  of  a  bend,  what  should  be  done?  .,.     ' 

Answer.  The  usual  signals  for  meeting  and  passing  sft6\ild 
then  be  given  by  both  boats. 

Question.  When  leaving  the  side  of  a  long  dock  or  proceed- 
ing out  of  a  slip,  what  signal  shall  a  power  boat  give'?    '  /  '  V 

Answer.  It  shall  give  the  same  signal  as  in  the  case  of  Ves- 
sels meeting  at  a  bend,  but  immediately  after  clearing  the  dock 
or  slip,  so  as  to  be  fully  in  sight,  it  shall  be  governed  by  the 
steering  and  sailing  rules.  .    , 

Question.  W^hen  two  power  boats  are 'meeting  end  bh,  i^b^ 
does  each  steersman  alter  his  course?  '  '  w     ir  > 

Answer.  Each  puts  his  helm  to  port  so  as  to.  pass  on  the 
port  side  of  the  other.  '  ''  , 

Question.  How  is  this  altering  of  the  ebtrrseJfMlcated? 

Answer.  Each  steersman  blows  one  short  ■'blast  V  on  the 
whistle.  '      .   '  "       , 

Question.  If,  under  the  circumstances,  fh6.  other  blows  one 
lilast  before  you  do,  what  should  you  do? 

Answer.  I  would  answer  With  one  blast  and  put  my  helm  to 
port. 

67385°— 17 9 


130        INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

P  Puestion.  If  you  find  it  is  not  possible  for  her  to  pass  on 
your  port  side,  what  should  you  do?  , 

.,. Answer.  I  should  sound  several  short  and  rapid  blasts,  not 
te^s  tJjan  four,  of  the  whistle,  and  if  the  boats  have  approached 
each  other  within  a  short  distance,  I  should  reduce  speed  to 
bare  steerageway,  or  if  necessary  stop  or,  reverse. 

Question.  You  are  in  charge  of  a  power  boat  running  in  the 
same  direction  as  a  power  boat  ahead  and  wish  to  pa^s  on  her 
starboard  side,  what  should  you  do? 

Answer.  I  would  give  one  short  blast  of  the  whistle,  and,  if 
she  answered  with  one  short  blast,  I  would  port  the  helm  and 
pass  on  her  starboard  side. 

Question.  Suppose  you  wish  to  pass  on  her  port  side? 

Answer.  I  would  give  two  short  blasts,  and,  if  she  an- 
sw^ed  with  two  short  blasts,  I  would  starboard  the  helm  and 
pass  on  her  port  side. 

Question.  Suppose  in  either  case  she  gave  several  short 
blasts  in  answer,  not  less  than  four,  what  would  you  under* 

Answer.  That  she  did  not  consider  it  safe  ror  riie  .tp;  pass 
at  that  point.  , 

Question.  How  long  can  she  keep  you  trailing  behind  her? 

Answer.  Only  so  long  as  there  is  danger  in  passing,  as  in  a 
narrow  or  obstructed  channel  or  fairway.  When  there  is  suffi- 
cient room  she  must  indicate  on  which  side  I  may  pass. 

Question.  What  are  cross  signals? 

Answer.  Answering  one  blast  with  two,  or  two  blasts  with 
one. 

Question.  Are  they  ever  permissible? 

Answer.  No.  ,..,      , 

Question.  What  should  y^u  4o  in  case  another  boat  gives  you 
a  cross  signal  on  meeting?  , 

Answer.  I  should  give  several  short  and  rapid  blasts,  not  less 
than  four,  and  if  necessary  stop  and  reverse. 

Question.  You  are  in  charge  of  a  power  boat,  a  steam  vess^ 
is  approaching  on  your  port  bow  so  as  to  involve  risk  of  col- 
lision, which  boat  has  the  right  of  way  and  what  should  you  do? 

Answer.  My  boat  has  the  right  of  way,  and  I  would  hold  my 
course  and  speed.  ,,    ,     ^r  ,  v  .  ,  . 

Question.  Suppose  the  other  boat  was  on  your  starboard  bow, 
what  would  you  do? 

Answer.  The  other  boat  would  have  the  right  of  way,  and  I 
would  reduce  speed  and  go  under  her  stern,  or  stop  ovjf^f^j;»e. 


INSTRUOTIONS  FOB  COAST  GUAED  STATIONS,        IZl, 

Question.  Suppose  the  boat  is  overhauling  you  anywhere  frj^m 
two  points  abaft  your  beam  to  astern?  .] 

Answer.  I  would  have  the  right  of  way,  and  would  hold,piy 
course  and  speed.  -ii^I 

Question.  Suppose  it  is  a  sailing  vessel  on  your  port  1)6^, 
what  would  you  do?  i  ^iv/ 

Answer.  She  would  have  the  right  of  way,  and  I  would. alter 
my  course  to  clear  her  or  stop  or  reverse. 

Question.  Suppose  a  sailing  vessel  was  coming  up  anywhere 
on  your  starboard  quarter,  close-hauled  and  on  the  starl^p^j;^ 
tack,  which  would  have  the  right  of  way?  '^♦/lioa  l: 

Answer.  I  would  have  the  right  of  way.  ;  t^i ,  ^ 

.Question.  What  is  meant  by  close-haijled ?  j,  .., 

Answer,  A  vessel  or  boat  is  close-hauled  when  she  Is  saillhg 
as  close  as  possible  to  the  wind. 

Question.  \Vhat  is  meant  by  running  free? 

Answer.  A  boat  is  running  free  when  she  is  able  to  lay  her, 
course  with  the  sheets  eased  off.  .1    /,j 

Question.  When  are  you  justified  in  disregarding  the  rule^  of 
the  road? 

Answer.  When  the  dangers  of  navigation,  and  collision,  or 
any  special  circumstances  may  render  a  departure  from  tlie^ 
rules  necessary  in  order  to  avoid  immediate  danger.  ."'^[ 

Question,  What  light  would  you  use  as  an  anchor  light  for  a 
boat?  *  , 

Answer.  An  ordinary  luu^d  lantern,  showing  a  whtte  light. 

■''    MOTOB-BoAT  Laws,  ,', 

Qu^lonl  tTnaer  fii|  law,  what  do  the  words  **  motor  boai " 
mean? 

Answer.  They  mean  every  vessel  propelled  by  machinery,  apd 
not  more  than  65  feet  in  length,  except  tugboats  and  towboats 
propelled  by  steam. 

Question.  ^QW  shall  the  length  of  a  motor  boat  be  deter- 
mined? '.^^ . 
Answer.  By  measuring  from  end  to  end '  over  the  de<;k,  ex- 
cluding sheer.     ,                                                                 '    ''  ■    n 
Question.  Into  how  many  classes  are  motor  boats  divld^'jtj^;'  ^ 
Answer.  Into  three  classes.                                                      ,/ 
Question.  What  motor  boats  are  included  in  class  1?        ^|5: 
Answer.  Those  less  than  26  feet  in  length.                             '*' 
Question.  What  motor  boats  are  inclu^^d.  i|:y,gla|s.2.?  .   ;' ,  '  ^ 


132        INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Answer.  Those  26  feet  or  over  and  less  than  40  feet  in  length? 

Question.  What  motor  boats  are  included  in  class  3  ? 

Answer.  Those  of  40  feet  or  over  and  not  more  than  65  feet  in 
length. 

Question.  What  lights  shall  every  motor  boat  of  class  1  carry 
when  underway  from  sunset  to  sunrise? 

Answer.  (1)  A  white  light  aft  to  show  all  arcrtind  fh^'^hori- 
zon.  (2)  A  combined  lantern  in  the  fore  part  of  the  vessel,  and^ 
lower  than  the  white  light  aft,  showing  green  to  starboard  and 
red  to  port,  so  fixed  as  to  throw  the  light  from  right  ahead  to 
2  points  abaft  the  beam  on  their  respective  sides. 

Question.  W^hat  lights  shall  motor  boats  of  classes  2  and  3 
carry  when  underw^ay  from  sunset  to  sunrise? 

Answer.  (1)  A  bright  white  light,  in  the  fore  part  of  the  ves- 
sel as  near  the  stem  as  practicable,  so  constructed  as  to  show  an 
unbroken  light  over  an  arc  of  the  horizon  of  20  points  of  the 
compass,  so  fixed  as  to  throw  the  light  10  points  on  each  side  of 
the  boat,  namely,  from  right  ahead  to  2  points  abaft  the  beam 
on  either  side. 

(2)  A  white  light  aft  to  show  all  around  the  horizon. 

(3)  On  the  starboard  side  a  green  light  so  constructed  as  to 
show  an  unbroken  light  over  an  arc  of  the  horizon  of  10 
points  of  the  compass,  so  fixed  as  to  throw  the  light  from  right 
ahead  to  2  points  abaft  the  beam  on  the  starboard  side.  On 
the  port  side  a  red  light  so  constructed  as  to  show  an  unbroken 
light  over  an  arc  of  the  horizon  of  10  points  of  the  compass,  so 
fixed  as  to  throw  the  light  from  right  ahead  to  2  points  abaft 
the  beam  on  the  port  side. 

Question.  W^hat  shall  be  the  dimension  of  the  glass  or  lens 
for  the  white  light  in  the  fore  part  of  a  motor  boat  of  class  ^? 

Answer.  Not  less  than  19  square  inches.  '  '^ 

Question.  What  shall  be  the  dimension  of  the  glass  or  lens 
for  the  white  light  in  the  fore  part  of  a  motor  boat  of  class  3? 

Answer.  Not  less  than  31  square  inches. 

Question.  What  shall  be  the  dimension  of  the  glass  or  lens 
for  the  side  lights  of  a  motor  boat  of  class  2? 

Answer.  Not  less  than  16  square  inches.  * 

Question.  What  shall  be  the  dimension  of  the  glass  or  leiiW 
for  the  side  lights  of  a  motor  boat  of  class  3? 

Answer.  Not  less  than  25  square  Inches. 

Question.  What  shall  be  the  character  of  the  glass  or  lens 
for  lights  on  motor  boats  of  classes  2  and  3? 

Answer.  They  shall  be  fresnel  ot  fluted  glass. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.        138 

Question.  With  wJiat  shall  the  ^ide  lights  of  classes  2  and  3 
be  fitted? 

Answer.  They  shall  be  fitted  with  inboard  screens  of  suffi- 
cient height  and  so  set  as  to  prevent  these  lights  from  being 
seen  across  the  bow. 

Question.  What  is  the  length  of   tin'   .^ide-light  screens  for 
boats  of  class  2? 
,(j Answer.  Not  less  than  18  iJ^ches. 

Question.  What   is  the  length  of  the  side-light  screens  for 
l^ats  of  class  3?' 
.  Answer.  Not  less  than  24  Inches. 

Question.  What  liglits  shall  motor  boats  carry  when  pro- 
pelled by  sail  and  machinery,  or  by  sail  alone? 

Answer.  They  shall  carry  the  colored  side  lights  suitably 
screened,  but  not  the  white  lights. 

Question.  With  what  sound-producing  appliance  shall  motor 
boats  be  provided? 

Answer.  With  a  whistle  or  other  sound-producing  mechanical 
appliance  capable  of  producing  a  blast  «}  rvo  seconds  or  more 
in  duration. 

Question:  What  shall  be  deemed  to  bo  a,  prolonged  blast 
within  the  meaning  of  the  motor-boat  law? 

Answer.  A  blast  of  at  least  two  seconds. 

Question.  What  additional  sound-producing  appliances  sliail 
every  motor  boat  of  class  2  or  3  carry? 

Answer.  An  efficient  fog  horn  and  an  efficient  bell. 

Question.  What  shall  be  the  size  of  tlie  bell  on  class  3  motor 
boats? 

Answer.  It  shall  be  not  less  than  8  inches  across  the  mouth. 

Question.  What  life-saving  appliances  sliail  every  motor  boat 
more  than  65  feet  in  length  carry  ? 

Answer.  Either  life  preservers,  or  life  belts,  or  buoyant  cush- 
ions, or  ring  buoys,  or  other  device  sufficient  to  sustain  afloat 
every  person  on  board  and  so  placed  as  to  be  readily  accessible. 

Question.  What  life-saving  appliances  shall  be  provided  on 
all  motor  boats  carrying  passengers  for  hire? 

Answer.  They  shall  carry  one  life  preserver  for  every  pas- 
senger carried.  „ 

Question.  What  is  required  of  the  person  operating  a  motor 
boat  carrying  passengers  for  hire?  ;  ,t, 

AnsAver.  He  is  required  to  be  duly  licensed,  fori  guch  service 
by  the  local  board  of  inspectors.  -     t.  ;♦  ).|<  \ 

Question.  What  are  the  requirements  of  law  regarding  fire* 
extinguishing  appliances  on  motor  boats?  ..,. , 


i»4    INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Answer.  Every  motor  boat  and  also  every  vessel  propelled 
by  machinery  other  than  by  steam,  more  than  65  feet  in  length, 
shall  carry  ready  for  immediate  use  the  means  of  promptly 
and  effectually  extinguishing  burning  gasoline. 

Question.  What  penalty  may  be  imposed  by  proper  authority 
for  violation  of  any  of  the  motor-boat  laws? 

Answer.  A  fine  not  exceeding  $100. 

Question.  What  light  shall  a  vessel  under  150  feet  in  length 
carry  when  at  anchor? 

Answ^er.  It  shall  carry  forward,  where  it  can  best  be  seen, 
but  at  a  height  not  exceeding  20  feet  above  the  hull,  a  white 
light  in  a  lantern  so  constructed  as  to  show  a  clear,  uniform, 
and  unbroken  light  visible  all  around  the  horizon  at  a  distance 
of  at  least  1  mile. 

Question.  Are  motor  boats  required  to  carry  lights  between 
the  hours  of  sunrise  and  sunset? 

Answer.  No. 

Question.  What  should  be  the  position  of  the  after  light  rela- 
tive to  the  forward  light  in  motor  boats  ? 

Answer.  The  after  light  should  be  higher  and  so  placed  as 
io  form  a  range  with  the  forward  light  and  should  be  clear 
of  house  awnings  and  other  obstructions. 

Question.  Does  the  law  specify  the  size  of  the  white  light 
to  be  carried  on  motor  boats  of  class  1? 

Answer.  No. 

Question.  What  sound-producing  appliance  for  motor  boats 
has  been  held  to  be  in  compliance  with  the  law? 

Answer.  A  mouth  whistle  capable  of  producing  a  blast  of 
two  seconds  or  more  in  duration  which  can  be  heard  for  at 
least  one-half  a  mile. 

Question.  Can  foghorns  take  the  place  of  whistles  on  motor 
boats  of  classes  2  and  3? 
^Answer.  No. 

Question.  With  what  life-saving  appliances  shall  every  motor 
boat  not  carrying  passengers  for  hire  be  provided  ? 

Answer.  With  life  preservers  or  life  belts  or  buoyant  cushions 
ot  ring  buoys,  or  other  device,  sufficient  to  sustain  afloat  every 
person  on  board.  This  includes  members  of  the  crew,  children, 
and  babies. 

Question.  Whose  approval  shall  life-saving  appliances  have? 

Answer.  The  board  of  supervising  inspectors  of  th^  Steam- 
boat-Inspection Service. 

*v  Question.  What  qualities  shall  life  preservers  and  buoyant 
cushions  possess? 


INSTRTTCTIONS  FOR  COAST   OTTARD   STATIONS.        135 

Answer.  They  shall  be  capable  of  sustaining  afloat  for  a 
continuous  period  of  24  hours  an  attached  weight  so  arranged 
that  whether  the  said  weight  be  submerged  or  not  there  shall 
be  a  direct  downward  gravitation  pull  upon  such  life  pre- 
server or  cushion  of  at  least  20  pounds.  If  a  buoyant  cushion 
is  furnished  for  more  than  one  person  its  capacity  must  1h» 
proportionately  greater. 

Question.  Is  a  life  preserver  or  buoyant  cushion  stuffed  or 
tilled  with  granulated  cork  or  other  Ux>se  granulated  .material 
permitted?  i  **f^'^  imi-;<rA  .tev^^/iA 

Answer.  No.  .*"f  t*f  ^'Jf^l 

Question.  Are  pneumatic  life  preservers  or  cushions  per- 
mitted? 'fi 

Answer.  No. 

Question.  What  substitntes  for  life-preservers,  life  belts,  ettf*^ 
may  be  used  ? 

Answer.  Wooden  life  floats,  provided  their  dimensions  shall 
not  be  less  than  4  feet  In  length,  14  inclies  in  breadth,  2  inches 
in  thlcljness,  and  of  well-seasoned  white  pine,  or  of  any  other 
wood  not  exceeding  white  pine  in  weight  per  cubic  foot. 

Question.  Would  a  motor  boat  hired  at  a  launch  livery  and 
carrying  a  person  In  addition  to  the  person  operating  it  be  con- 
sidered as  carrying  passengers  for  hire? 

Answer.  Yes. 

Question.  Are  there  any  specific  means  prescribed  tot 
promptly  extinguishing  burning  gasoline?  ' 

Answer.  No.  '  t 

Question.  What  materials  will  serve  the  purpose  of  extlO' 
gulshing  burning  gasoline? 

Answer.  Besides  the  usual  extinguishers  and  suitable 
chemicals,  salt  or  sand  In  sufficient  quantities  will  serve  the 
purpose  in  some  cases.  The  salt  or  sand  (preferably  the  two 
mixed)  should  be  kept  in  a  pall  or  receptacle. 

Question.  What  motor  boats  must  be  documented?  » 

Answer.  All  motor  boats  of  over  5  net  tons  when  engaged  to 
trade  must  be  documented ;  that  is  to  say,  must  be  licensed  by 
collectors  of  customs. 

Question.  Are  vessels  under  5  net  tons  docuraerited? 

Answer.  They  are  not  documented  In  any  case. 

Question.  What  distinction  is  there  between  the  license  of  a 
vessel  and  the  license  of  a  motor-boat  operator?  >r;.| 

Answer.  The  license  of  a  vessel  obtained  from  a  collector  of 
customs  (designated  a  document)  is  additional  to  and  must ^ot 


136        INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

be  confounded  with  the  license  required  for  the  operator  of  a 
motor  boat. 

Question.  How  must  a  documented  vessel  be  marked? 

Answer.  She  must  have  tlie  name  and  home  port  on  the 
stern  and  the  name  on  each  bow.  The  tonnage  mark  and 
ofRciai  number  should  be  deeply  carved  or  otherwise  perma- 
nently marked  on  her  main  beam  or  other  approved  place. 

(Question.  Does  the  law  require  that  the  name  of  an  undocu- 
mented motor  boat  be  displayed? 

Answer.  No;  but  the  Department  of  Commerce  recommends 
that  it  be. 

Question.  Are  motor  boats  required  to  Ixave  copies  of  pilot 
rules  on  board? 

Answer.  Yes;  they  are  required  to  have  on  board  two  copies 
of  the  pilot  rules  to  be  observed  by  them;  ,. 

Question.  What  equipment  is  required  for  motor  boats  of 
class  1  not  carrying  passengers  for  hire? 

Answer.  Combination  light  forward,  white  light  aft,  whistle, 
life  preserver  or  life-saving  devices  for  each  person  on  board, 
means  for  extinguishing  burning  gasoline,  two  copies  of  pilot 
rules. 

Question.  What  equipment  is  required  for  motor  boats  of 
class  1  carrying  passengers  for  hire? 

Answer.  Combination  light  forward,  white  light  aft,  whistle, 
Hfe  preserver  or  life-saving  device  for  each  person  on  board, 
licensed  operator,  means  for  extinguishing  burning  gasoline, 
two  copies  of  pilot  rules. 

Question.  What  equipment  is  required  for  motor  boats  of 
class  2  not  carrying  passengers  for  hire? 

Answer.  White  lights  forward  and  aft  and  colored  side 
lights,  whistle,  bell,  foghorn,  life  preserver  or  life-saving  de- 
vice for  each  person  on  board,  means  for  extinguishing  burning 
gasoline,  two  copies  of  pilot  rules. 

Question.  What  equipment  is  required  for  motor  boats  of 
class  2  carrying  passengers  for  hire? 

Answer.  The  same  equipment  as  when  not  carrying  passen- 
gers for  hire,  with  the  addition  of  a  licensed  operator. 

Question.  What  equipment  is  required  for  motor  boats  of 
class  3  not  carrying  passengers  for  hire? 

Answer.  The  same  as  required  for  class  2  when  not  carrying 
passengers  for  hire. 

Question.  What  equipment  is  required  for  motor  boats  of 
class  3  carrying  passengers  for  hire? 


INSTEUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  aUARD  STATIONS.        137 

Answer.  The  same  as  is  required  for  motor  boats  of  class  2 
carrying  passengers  for  hire. 

Question.  What  is  the  duration  of  the  license  granted  the 
operator  of  a  motor  boat? 

Answer.  Five  years. 

Question.  What  equipment  is  required  for  a  motoy  boat  after 
sunset  wiien  not  being  navigated? 

Answer.  No  equipment,  except  an  anchor  light. 

Boat  Salutes  and  Boat  Etiquette. 

Question.  You  are  in  charge  of  a  pulling  boat.  How  do  you 
salute  a  flag  officer  of  the  Navy  in  another  boat  with  his  flag 
flying? 

Answer.  Toss  oars;  stand  up  and  salute  with  hand;  remain 
at  salute  until  It  is  returned  or  the  flag  officer  has  passed. 

Question.  Who  is  a  flag  officer  of  the  Navy? 

Answer.  Any  officer  of  the  line  of  the  Navy  above  the  rank 
of  captain.  ,  •     j  ,  .  . 

Question.  Suppose  the  officer  to  be  saluted;  Is  a  general  officer 
of  the  Army,  with  his  flag  flying,  how  do  you  salute? 

Answer.  The  same  as  for  a  flag  officer  of  the  Navy. 

Question.  Suppose  you  are  in  charge  of  a  laden  or  of  a* 
towing  boat,  how  would  you  salute  a  flag  officer? 

Answer.  Make  the  hand  salute  only ;  do  not  stand  up. 

Question.  If  you  are  in  charge  of  a  boat  under  sail,  how  do 
you  salute  a  flag  officer? 

Answer.  Make  the  hand  salute  only ;  do  not  stand  up. 

Question.  What  are  the  instructions  for  saluting  when  you 
are  in  charge  of  a  powder  boat? 

Answer.  In  power  boats  the  engines  are  to  be  stopped  in  all 
cases  in  which  pulling  boats  "  toss  "  or  "  lay  on  "  oars. 

Question.  Suppose  a  flag  officer  does  not  have  his  distinctive 
flag  flying,  how  do  you  salute  him? 

Answer.  Stand  up  and  salute  with  hand ;  do  not  "  toss  "  oars. 

Question.  You  are  in  charge  of  a  pulling  boat  How  do  yon 
salute  a  division  commander  or  a  commanding  officer  above  the 
rank  of  first  lieutenant  who  passes  in  another  boat  with  his 
pennant  flying? 

Answer.  Lay  on  oars ;  stand  up  and  salute  with  hand. 

Question.  Suppose  you  are  in  charge  of  a  laden  or  a  towing 
boat  or  a  boat  under  sail,  how  would  you  salute  the  officer 
mentioned  in  the  preceding  question?  ,ij.l 

Answer.  Salute  with  hand;  do  not  stand  up.  j-i 


138        HSrSTRirCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GTTARD  STATIONS. 

Question.  Suppose  the  division  commander  or  commanding 
officer  is  not  flying  his  pennant? 

Answer.  Rise  and  salute  with  hand;  do  not  lay  on  oars. 

Question.  How  would  you  salute  a  senior  captain  without  a 
pennant  flying? 

Answer.  Rise  and  salute  with  hand ;  do  not  lay  on  oars. 

Question.  How  do  you  salute  commissioned  oflicers  below  the 
grade  of  captain?  •      '    •  >■  '  >    •    •      -    i     ^  ' 

Answer.  Rise  and  salute  with  hand.  If  in  charge  of  a  laden 
or  towing  boat  or  boat  under  sail,  do  not  stand  up. 

Question.  How  do  you  salute  a  warrant  oflicer? 

Answer.  Salute  with  hand. 

Question.  You  are  in  charge  of  a  boat  of  any  type,  what  do 
you  do  when  a  commissioned  officer  enters  or  leaves  your  boat? 

Answer.  Rise  and  salute  him. 

Question.  If  you  are  a  passenger  in  the  stern  sheets  of  a 
boat,  do  you  salute  on  these  occasions? 

Answer.  Yes;  rise  and  salute. 

Question.  If  you  are  one  of  the  crew  of  a  boat  but  not  in 
charge,  do  you  salute? 

Answer.  No ;  not  unless  detailed  as  boat  keeper. 

Question.  What  salutes  would  you  render  to  foreign  military 
or  naval  officers,  or  officers  of  the  United  States  Army,  Navy, 
Marine  Corps,  Public  Health  Service,  Naval  Militia,  or  National 
Guard? 

Answer.  Salute  them  in  the  same  manner  as  Coast  Guard 
officers  of  the  same  rank,  or  flag  officers  of  the  Navy,  if  of  cor- 
responding rank. 

Question.  What  is  the  **  Position  of  attention    in  a  boat? 

Answer.  Sitting  erect  on  the  thwarts  or  in  the  stern  sheets. 
•  Question.  What  do  the  members  of  the  crew  do  when  officers 
enter  or  leave  the  boat? 

Answer.  Sit  at  attention.    This  takes  the  place  of  a  salute. 

Question.  You  are  a  passenger  in  a  running  boat  which  con- 
tains officers,  what  must  you  remember? 

Answer.  To  keep  quiet. 

Question.  You  are  outside  the  canopy  of  a  power  boat  that 
sflilutes  another  boat  in  passing,  what  do  you  do? 

Answer.  Stand  at  attention  and  face  the  passing  boat. 

Question.  You  are  In  charge  of  a  power  boat  containing  an 
officer  for  whom  a  salute  is  being  fired,  what  do  you  do? 

Answer.  Stop  engine  at  first  gun  of  salute;  head  boat  up 
parallel  to  saluting  ship ;  see  that  men  outsidQ  of  canopy  stand 
at  attention  and  face  the  saluting  ship.  !  liJr//  oSuiRii  .vj' 


INSTRTTCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.         139 

Question.  You  are  in  charge  of  a  boat  overhauling  another 
boat  that  contains  officers,  what  do  you  do? 

Answer.  Slow  down ;  never  pass  without  asking  permission 
to  do  so.  Always  give  way  to  a  senior  boat  at  a  landing  place 
or  gangway,  unless  otherwise  directed  by  proper  authority. 

Question.  As  keeper  in  charge  of  a  boat,  what  reply  would 
you  give  to  the  quartermaster's  hail  in  going  alongside  a  Coast 
Guard  or  a  naval  ship  at  night?  ^ 

Answer.  "No,  no."  .* 

Question.  Suppose  you  are  passing  such  a  ship  at  night,  what 
answer  would  you  make  to  the  quartermaster's  hail? 

Answer.  **  Passing." 

Question.  What  reply  should  an  enlisted  person  give  to  the 
quartermaster's  hail  in  going  alongside  a  CJoast  Guard  or  a 
naval  ship  at  night? 

Answer.  *'  Hello." 

Question.  Suppose  there  are  officers  or  officials  in  the  boat, 
what  would  be  the  proper  answer  to  the  quartermaster's  hall? 

Answer.  It  would  vary  according  to  the  rank  of  the  senior 
officer  or  official  who  may  be  in  the  boat. 

Question.  Suppose  the  President  of  the  United  States  is  in 
the  boat?  '  ' 

Answer.  The  answer  would  be  "  United  States." 

Question.  Suppose  the  Secretary  or  an  Assistant  Secretary  of 
the  Treasury  was  in  the  boat? 

Answer.  The  ans'wer  w^ould  be  **  Treasury." 

Question.  Suppose  the  Captain  Commandant  of  the  Coast 
Guard  Is  in  the  boat? 

Answer.  The  answer  would  be  "  Coast  Guard." 

Question.  Suppose  other  officers  than  those  above  mentioned 
were  in  the  boat? 

Answer.  If  the  senior  officer  in  the  boat  was  a  division  com- 
mander or  a  senior  captain  the  proper  answer  to  the  hail  would 
be  "  division  " ;  if  the  commanding  officer  of  a  vessel,  the  answer 
would  be  the  name  of  the  vessel  under  his  command ;  any  other 
commissioned  officers  would  answer  "  aye,  aye." 

Question.  You  are  In  charge  of  a  power  boat  approaching  a 
Coast  Guard  or  a  naval  ship  at  night,  or  during  the  day  when 
flag  or  pennant  is  not  displayed  in  the  bow,  or  when  the  rank 
of  the  passengers  can  not  be  distinguished,  how  would  you  indi- 
cate their  rank? 


i40        INSTRTTCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GTTARD  STATIONS. 

Answer.  By  short  blasts  of  the  whistle,  as  follows : 

President  of  the  United  States ^_ 8  blasts. 

Secretary  of  the  Treasury-— ., _: 7  blasts. 

Assistant  Secretory  of  the  Treasury 6  blasts. 

gaptain  Commandant — , ^-, 5  blasts, 
ivision  commander  or  senior  captain ^-  4  blasts. 

Commanding   officer— _-__! _-^^ 3  blasts. 

Other  commissioned  officers _____' 2  blasts. 

All  othei"  persons— -^ ^— — 1  blast. 

Question.  In  what  order  do  officers  and  enlisted  persons  enter 
a  boat? 

Answer.  Juniors  enter  boats  ahead  of  seniors. 

Question  In  what  order  do  officers  and  enlisted  persons  leave 
a  boat? 

Answer.  Juniors  leave  boats  after  seniors.      • 

Question.  Being  In  charge  of  a  boat,  what  is  your  duty  while 
waiting  at  a  shore  landing  or  gangway? 
*'   Answer.  Haul  clear  of  shore  landings  and  gangways. 

Question.  What  Is  your  duty  In  regard  to  the  boat's  crew? 

Answer.  Not  to  permit  the  crew  to  leave  the  boat  except  )by 
proper  authority. 

BUOYS. 

Question.  In  coming  from  seaward,  what  color  buoys  mark 
the  starboard  or  right-hand  side  of  the  channel? 
j^  Answer.  Red.  ,,•.  .  ^  •  v. 

Question.  What  color  buoys  mark  the  port- <cbp  left-hand  side? 

Answer.  Black,         <  .      .  .  '    ^f  i     .. 

Questiotn.  How  are  dangers  and  obstructions  marked? 

Answer.  By  buoys  with  black  and  red  horizontal  stripes. 

Question.  On  which  hand  should  these  buoys  be  left? 

Answer.  They  may  be  left  on  either  hand. 

Question.  How  are  buoys  that  indicate  the  fairway  marked? 

Answer.  With  black  and  white  vertical  stripes.     These  buoys 
.should  be  passed  close-to. 

Question.  How  are  sunken  wrecks  marked? 

Answer.  By  red  and  black  buoys,  horizontal  stripes.     These 
buoys  are  the  same  as  obstruction  buoys. 

Question.  What  color  are  quarantine  buoys? 

Answer.  Yellow. 

Question.  What  are  white  buoys  used  for? 

Answer.  As  they  have  no  special  meaning  they  are  often  used 
for  special  purposes  not  connected  with  navigation. 


INSTRTTCTIONS  FOB  COAST  GTTARD  STATIONS.         141 

Question.  How  are  the  stai^board  and  port  channel  buoys 
numbered  ? 

Answer.  The  numbers  begin  from  the  seaward  end  of  the 
channel.  Back  buoys  have  odd  numbers.  Red  buoys  have  even 
numbers.  ' 

Question.  Why  are  perches  or  balls  or  cages  sometimes  placed 
on  buoys? 

Answer.  Such  buoys  are  at  turning  points.  The  color  and 
the  number  indicate  on  which  side  they  shall  be  passed. 

Question.  What  types  of  buoys  are  in  common  use? 

Answer.  Nun,  can,  and  spar. 

Question.  What  is  the  shape  of  a  nun  buoy? 

Answer.  Conical. 

Question.  Of  a  can  buoy? 

Answer.  Cylindrical. 

Signals. 

Question.  What  methods  of  signaling  are  used  in  the  Coast 
Guard? 

Answer.  The  Dot  and  Dash  Code,  Semaphore  Code,  Interna- 
tional Code,  and  Navy  Flag  Code.  "  "       ' 

Question.  What  does  the  Dot  and  Dash  Code  comprise? 

Answer.  The  alphabet  and  numerals  of  the  International 
Morse  Code  together  with  certain  additional  symbols. 

Question.  In  what  methods  of  signaling  is  th^  Dot  and  Dash 
Code  used? 

Answer.  The  wigwag  and  the  occulting  or  flashing  light 
methods. 

Question.  How  many  positions  and  motions  are  there  in  the 
wigw^ag  method  ? 

Answer.  There  are  one  position  and  three  motions. 

Question.  What  is  position?  ■>.f-v..if     ^ 

Answer.  Position  is  with  the  flag  or  other  signal  appliatice'hfeld 
vertically,  the  signal  man  facing  squarely  toward  the  station 
with  which  it  is  desired  to  communicate. 

Question.  How  are  the  motions  made  with  a  flag?        •      ' 

Answer.  In  the  first  motion  (dot)  the  flag  is  waved  to  lilie 
right  of  the  sender,  and  shall  embrace  an  arc  of  90°,  starting 
from  the  vertical  and  returning  to  it,  and  shall  be  made  in  a 
plane  at  right  angles  to  the  line  connecting  the  two  stations. 
The  second  motion  (dash)  is  a  similar  motion  to  the  left  of  the 
sender.  To  make  the  third  motion  "interval**  (front),  the  flag 
Is  waved  downward  directly  in  front  of  the  sender  and  instantly 
returned  to  "position.**  . 


142        INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Question.  How  should  the  flag  be  waved  to  prevent  it  foul- 
ing: the  staff? 

Answer.  Make  a  scoop  in  making  the  side  motions.  IMake  the 
first  part  of  the  scoop  to  the  front  if  the  wind  is  behind  the 
sender  and  to  tlie  rear  if  the  wind  is  in  front.  Be  careful  not 
to  bring  the  flag  beyond  the  vertical  at  the  end  of  a  motion,  un- 
less the  immediately  succeeding  motion  as  a  part  of  a  symbol 
is  to  the  other  side. 

Question.  What  precaution .  should  be  taken  in  signaling  to 
a  considerable  distance  with  a  hand  torch,  electric  portable, 
or  hand  lantern? 

Answer.  A  footlight  should  be  used  as  a  point  of  reference 
to  the  motions;  otherwise  the  methods  are  the  same  as  for 
the  flag. 

Question.  What  variation  is  permissible  when  using  an  oil 
hand  lantern  in  signaling? 

Answer.  The  lantern  is  more  conveniently  swung  out  and 
upward  by  hand  from  the  footlight  for  "  dot "  and  "  dash  "  and 
raised  vertically  for  "  interval." 

Question.  How  are  the  letters  of  the  alphabet  represented 
in  the  flashing  or  occulting  light  method  of  signaling? 

Answer.  By  dots  and  dashes,  a  short  flash  being  used  for 
"  dot,"  a  long  flash  for  "  dash."  j 

Question.  What  is  the  two-arm  semaphore  method?  1 

Answer.  A  method  of  signaling  in  which  both  arms  of  the 
body  or  two  arms  of  a  machine  are  used.  When  the  arms  of 
the  body  are  used  a  small  flag  called  a  hand  flag,  or  semaphore 
flag,  is  held  in  each  hand.  With  a  machine  a  third  arm,  or 
*'  indicator,"  is  displayed  on  the  right  of  the  sender  to  indicate 
which  is  the  sender's  right  and  which  his  left. 

Question.  Are  there  any  other  differences  between  the  two 
methods? 

Answer.  No.  With  hand  flags  or  the  machine  all  positions 
and  motions  are  the  same -for  both  methods  with  the  exception 
of  "interval." 

Question.  Describe  the  hand  flags  used  in  semaphore  sig- 
naling. 

Answer.  Hand  flags  shall  be  from  12  to  15  inches  square,  of  blue 
with  a  white  square  (similar  to  the  alphabet  flag  **P  "),  or  red 
and  yellow  diagonally  (similar  to  the  alphabet  flag  "O"),  the 
one  to  be  used  depending  upon  the  background;  each  shall  be 
attached  to  a  light  wooden  staff  about  2  feet  in  length. 

Question.  What  can  you  say  of  signaling  by  the  two-aroa 
semaphore  method?  ,<;>. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.        143 

;  Answer.  It  is  the  most  rapid  method  of  sending  spelled-out 
messages.  It  is,  however,  very  liable  to  error  if  the  motions 
are  slurred  over  or  run  together  in  an  attempt  to  make  speed. 

Question.  How  should  the  motions  be  made?  ,  lIx 

Answer.  Both  arms  should  move  rapidly  and  simultaneously, 
but  there  should  be  a  perceptible  pause  at  the  end  of  each 
letter  before  making  the  movements  for  the  next  letter,  and 
care  must  be  taken  with  hand  flags  to  hold  the  staffs  so  aatgi 
form  a  prolongation  of  the  arms. 

Question.  How  should  a  ship  or  station  be  called  by  the 
semaphore  method? 

Answer.  Face  it  squarely  and  make  its  call.  If  there  is  no 
Immediate  reply  wave  the  flags  over  the  head  or  wave  the  arms 
toward  the  upper  vertical  to  attract  attention,  making  the  call 
at  frequent  intervals.  The  ship  or  station  called  answers  by 
making  its  own  call,  if  it  has  one,  or  by  making  "  acknowledg- 
ment." The  calling  ship  or  station  then  makes  its  own  call  or 
makes  "  acknowledgment "  and  proceeds  with  the  message. 
(With  the  machine  this  call  is  left  displayed  until  the  message 
has  l>een  received  and  understood.)  When  the  sender  makes 
*'  end  of  message  "  the  receiver,  if  message  is  understood,  extends 
the  arms  or  flags  horizontally  and  waves  them  until  the  sender 
does  the  same  when  both  leave  their  stations.  /  , 

Question.  How  should  a  ship  or  station  be  called  by  if^f>) 
occulting  or  flashing  light  method? 

Answer.  Make  its  "call"  or  make  "cornet"  (if  no  other 
i^ip  or  station  Is  within  signal  distance)  until  acknowledged. 
The  ship  or  station  called  answers  by  making  its  own  call,  if 
it  has  one,  or  by  making  "acknowledgment."  The  calling  ship 
or  station  then  makes  its  own  call  or  makes  "  acknowledgment," 
which  the  receiving  ship  or  station  repeats.  The  calling  ship 
or  station  then  makes  a  steady  light  until  answered  by  a  steady, 
light  and  then  proceeds  with  the  message.  ,  ,         .^^ 

Question.  How  should  a  ship  or  station  be  called  by  the  wig-^ 
wng  method?  ,',,,^ 

"  Answer.  Face  it  and  make  its  "  call."  If  necessary  to  attracts 
attention,  wave  the  flag  (or  torch),  making  the  call  at  frequfght 
intervals.  The  ship  or  station  called  answers  by  making  its 
own  call,  if  it  has  one,  or  by  making  "acknowledgment";  the 
calling  ship  or  station  then  makes  its  ow^n  call  or  makes  "  ac- 
knowledgment "  and  proceeds  with  the  message. 

Question.  What  is  the  "  call "  of  a  ship  or  station? 

Answer.  A  combination  of  difl*erent  letters  assigned  to  it  for 
the  purpose  of  communication  with  other  units  of  the  same 


144        INSTRTTCTtONlS  fOR  C6 ASt  GtrARl)  ST ATI(5!fs: 

service.  The  "  call  "  of  a  ship  must  not  be  confounded  with  its 
International  signal  letters. 

Question.  How  many  letters  are  there  in  the  "  call  "of  a 
ship  or  station  of  the  Coast  Guard? 

Answer.  At  present  there  are  but  two  letters,  but  the  "  calls  " 
will  be  changed  eventually  to  conform  with  the  Navy  system. 

Question.  Must  both  letters  of  the  "  call "  be  used  when  sig- 
naling another  ship  or  station? 

Answer.  No ;  only  the  last  letter,  unless  that  is  not  sufficient 
to  designate  the  ship  or  station. 

Question.  Where  are  the  "  call  letters  "  assigned  to  ships  and 
stations  of  the  Coast  Guard  to  be  found? 

Answer.  In  the  pamphlet  "  Telegraphic  Instructions  for  the 
United  States  Coast  Guard."  These  call  letters  are  to  be  used 
only  between  units  of  the  Coast  Guard. 

Question.  Where  are  the  signal  letters  assigned  to  vessels  of 
the  Coast  Guard  to  be  found? 

Answer.  In  the  *'  List  of  Merchant  Vessels  of  the  United 
States  "  and  the  "  Seagoing  Vessels  of  the  United  States." 

Question.  What  flags  may  be  used  in  making  these  "  calls  "  ? 

Answer.  Until  the  "  call  flags "  of  the  United  States  Navy 
Flag  Code  are  issued  to  the  Coast  Guard,  the  International 
Code  flags  may  be  used,  provided  the  use  of  the  latter  does  not 
cause  confusion  to  any  vessel  or  signal  station  in  the  vicinity. 

Question.  If  in  the  course  of  a  signal  by  the  wigwag  or  the  Dot 
and  Dash  Code  the  sender  discovers  that  he  has  made  an 
error,  what  should  he  do? 

Answer.  He  should  make  "  interval,",  "error,"  "interval," 
after  which  he  proceeds  with  the  signal,  beginning  with  the 
word  in  which  the  error  occurred. 

Question.  If  in  the  course  of  a  signal  addressed  to  a  ship  or 
station  the  rect?iver  does  not  understand  a  certain  word,  char- 
acter, or  display,  what  should  he  do? 

Answer.  He  should  "brfeak  in"  with  the  characters  corre- 
sponding to  "  Repeat  last  word  " ;  or,  to  have  the  whole  mes- 
sage repeated,  he  should  make  the  displays  which  signify  "  Re- 
peat last  message." 

Question.  Are  abbreviations  used  in  any  of  these  methods  of 
signaling? 

Answer.  No.  The  message  must  be  spelled  out,  unless  pre- 
ceded by  "  Signals,"  in  which  case  it  is  to  be  sought  in  the 
Navy  Signal  Book.  A  return  to  spelling  is  indicated  by 
"letters."  '         .,, 


INSTRTTCTIOIJS  TOR  COAST  THTARD  STATIONS.        145 

Question.  How  may  numbers  be  sent  by  the  wigwag  or  the 
occulting  or  flashing  light  methods? 

Answer.  They  may  be  spelled  out  or  sent  by  Ithe  proper  nu- 
meral signals. 

Question.  How  are  numbers  sent  by  the  semaphore  method? 

Answer.  Numbers  shall  be  spelled  out ;  there  are  no  numerals. 

Question.  What  do  you  understand  by  interval? 

Answer.  It  is  a  signal  indicating  "end  of  word."  '/- 

Question.  What  is  the  "  interval  "  In  the  wigwag  methodt  ^^i<^i 

Answer.  Front. 

Question.  In  the  flashing  or  occulting  light  method? 

Answer.  Dot-dash-dot-dfesh  (.  —  .—).  This  "interval"  is 
not  used  between  Words  in  spelled-out  messages,  a  longer  pause 
than  is  made  between  the  letters  of  a  word  being  used  instead. 
The  dot-dash-dot-dash  "  interval "  is,  however,  used  betw^een 
words  in  code  messages  and  when  transmitting  Navy  Flag  Code 
signals  by  the  flashing  or  occulting  light  method. 

Question.  What  is  the  "interval"  In  the  semaphore  method? 

Answer.  With  hand  flags,  the  interval  "  end  of  word  "  Is  the 
crossing  of  the  flags  in  front  of  the  body,  as  sho^vn  in  the  table. 
With  the  machine,  the  "  interval "  is  the  machine  closed  but 
with  the  indicator  showing. 

Question.  When  may  hand  flags  be  used  and  when  the' 
machine? 

Answer.  Hand  flags  can  be  used  when  signaling  by  day  only. 
The  machine  can  be  used  in  signaling  by  day  or  night,  electric 
lights  being  installed  on  its  arms  for  the  latter  purpose. 

Question.  What  takes  the  place  of  the  third  arm,  or  IndlcatM!^' 
of  the  machine  w^hen  used  in  night  signaling?  "  '! ' 

Answer.  A  red  light,  screened  to  the  reai-,  to  indicate  the 
direction  of  sending.  ;      ;; 

Question.  What  is  the  signal  for  "  end  of  sentence  "  ? 

Answer.  The  double  *'  interval." 

Question.  How  is  it  made  in  the  wigNvag  method? 

Answer.  By  two  front  motions. 

Question.  By  the  flashing  or  occulting  light  method? 

Answer.  v 

Question.  By  the  semaphore  method?  '? 

Answer.  By  hand  flags,  the  "  chop-chop  "  signal  t^viGe ;  with 
the  machine  It  is  the  same. 

Question.  How  is  the  "chop-chop"  signal  made? 

Answer.  By  placing  both  arms  at  the  right  horizontal  and  then 
moving  them  up  and  down  in  a  cutting  motion. 
67385°— 17 10  --   -: 


146        INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Question.  What  is  the  signal  for  "  end  of  message  "  ? 

Answer.  The  triple  interval. 

Question.  How  is  it  made  in  the  wigwag  method? 

Answer.  By  making  "  front "  three  times. 

Question.  In  the  flashing  or  occulting  light  method? 

Answer.    •  —  •  —  • 

Question.  In  the  semaphore  method? 

Answer.  With  hand  flags,  three  successive  "  chop-chop  "  sig- 
nals and  withdrawing  the  flags  from  view;  with  the  machine, 
the  end  of  a  message  (triple  interval)  is  indicated  by  the  clos- 
ing of  both  arms  and  Indicator. 

Question.  What  is  the  signal  separating  **  preamble "  from 
"  address  "  ;  "  address  "  from  "  text  " ;  *'  text  "  from  "  sig- 
nature "  ? 

xlnswer.  In  the  wigwag  and  flashing  or  occulting  light 
methods  it  is  —  •  •  •  —  In  the  semaphore  method  it  is  the 
double  inter\^al.     Signature  is  also  preceded  by  *'  Sig.  interval." 

Question.  What  is  the  signal  for  "  acknowledgment "  ? 

Answer.  •  —  •   (R.)     This  is  the  same  in  the  three  methods. 

Question.  How  is  "acknowledgment"  made  at  night? 

Answer.  The  ship  or  station  called  shall  acknowledge  by 
making  its  own  call  letter;  the  calling  ship  or  station  then 
makes  its  own  call  letter,  which  the  receiving  ship  or  station 
repeats ;  the  calling  ship  or  station  then  makes  "  acknowledg- 
ment "  (•  —  •)  and  proceeds  with  the  message. 

Question.  What  is  the  signal  for  "error"? 

Answer.  In  the  wigwag  and  flashing  or  occulting  light  sys- 
tems it  is In  the  semaphore  it  is  the  letter  *'A" 

(agitated). 

Question.  What  is  the  signal  for  "interrogatory  "  ? 

Answer.  In  the  wigwag  and  flashing  or  occulting  light  sys- 
tems it  is  •  • •  • ;  in  the  semaphore  method  it  is  the  let- 
ter "O"  (agitated). 

Question.  What  is  the  signal  for  "Repeat  after  (word)"? 

Answer.  Interrogatory,  A   (word). 

Question.  For  "  Repeat  last  word  "  ? 

Answer.  Interrogatory  twice. 

Question.  For  "  Repeat  last  message"? 

Answer.  Interrogatory  three  times. 

Question.  For  "  Send  faster ;  "  "  Send  slower ;  "  "  Cease 
sending"? 

Answer.  QRQ  for  "  Send  faster ;  "  QRS  for  "  Send  slower ;  " 
QRT  for  "  Cease  sending." 

Question.  For  "Wait  a  moment"? 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GTTARD  STATIONS.        147 

Answer.  la    the    wigwag    and    flashing    or    occulting    light 

methods  it  is  •  ^ •  •    There  is  no  signal  for  "  Wait  a  moment  " 

in  the  semaphore  method.     Such  a  message  must  be  spelled  out. 

Question.  What  is  the  signal  for  "Execute"? 

Answer.  IX,  IX. 

Question.  For  "  Move  to  your  right ;  "  **  Move  to  your  left ;  " 
"  Move  up ;  '*  **  Move  down  "  ? 

Answer.  MR  for  '*  Move  to  your  right ;  "  ML  for  "  Move  to 
your  left ;  "  MU  for  "  Move  up ;  "  MD  for  "  Move  down." 

Question.  For  "Finished"   (end  of  work)? 

Answer.  In  the  wigwag  and  flashing  or  occulting  light 
methods  it  is  •  •  •  —  •  —  There  is  no  signal  for  this  message 
in  the  semaphore  method: 

Question.  Name  the  additional  symbols. 

Answer.  Cornet;  Letters  (follow);  Signals  (follow);  Code 
Interval  or  Designator. 

Question.  For  what  purpose  in  signaling  is  the  cornet  used? 

Answer.  It  is  a  general  call  to  all  units  of  a  fleet,  division, 
squadron,  or  other  force  to  receive  a  message  in  signals.  ^'^^ 

Question.  What  is  the  cornet  of  the  Dot  and  Dash  Code? 

Answer.  Four  dashes    ( ). 

Question.  Of  the  Semaphore  Code? 

Answer.  Holding  the  arms  of  the  body  or  the  machine  in  the 
position  of  the  letter  "U"  and  agitating  them  (see  table). 

Question.  What  is  the  cornet  of  the  Navy  Flag  Code? 

Answer.  A  rectangular  flag  of  four  equal  sections — blue, 
white,  yellow,  red — the  blue  and  white  next  the  hoist. 

Question.  Where  is  this  flag  hoisted  as  a  general  call  for 
semaphore  or  wigwag  signals? 

Answer.  Half-yardarm  high.  When  the  call  Is  for  semaphore 
signals,  the  semaphore  "  cornet "  above  described  is  made  by 
hand  flags  or  machine  at  the  time  the  flag  cornet  is  hoisted; 
when  the  call  is  for  wigwag  signals,  the  dot  and  dash  "  cornet " 

( )   is  made  by  hand  flag  in  connection  with  the 

flag  "  cornet."  > 

Question.  State  how  a  general  semaphore  or  wigwag  message 
is  sent. 

Answer.  When  the  general  call  is  made,  the  units  called 
hoist  the  answering  pennant  half-yardarm  high.  When  all  the 
units  have  thus  aclinoweldged,  the  message  is  proceeded  with. 
At  the  end  of  the  message,  the  sending  ship  or  station  hoists 
the  "  cornet "  close  up  to  the  yardarm,  whereupon,  if  the 
message  is  understood,  the  receiving  units  run  their  answering 
pennants  close  up  to  the  yardarm.    The  hauling  down  of  the 


148        INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

**  cornet "  by  the  sending  ship  or  station  is  the  acknowledgment 
of  tlie  answers.  When  this  is  done  the  receiving  units  haul 
down  their  answering  pennants. 

Question.  How  is  the  general  call  for  a  flashing  or  occulting 
light  signal  message  made? 

Answer.  By    making    the    Dot    and    Dash    Code    "  cornet " 

( )  until  acknowledged  by  all  units  for  whom  it  is 

iistended. 

Question,  ^ow  is  receipt  acknowledged? 

Answer.  Each  unit  called  acknowledges  by  making  its  own 
call  letter.  The  calling  ship  or  station  makes  its  own  call 
letter,  which  the  receiving  units  repeat.  The  calling  ship  or 
station  then  makes  a  steady  light  until  answered  by  a  steady 
light  and  then  proceeds  with  the  message. 

Question.  How  would  a  call  to  two  or  more  units  of  a  group 
be  made? 

Answer.  By  calling  one  unit  at  a  time  until  all  have  answered. 

Question.  What  is  the  symbol  for  "Letters  (follow)"  and 
when  is  it  used? 

Answer.  The  symbol  is •  and  is  used  when  a  return 

to  spelling  is  to  follow  a  message  sent  by  the  Navy  Flag  Code. 

Question.  What  is  the  symbol  for  "Signals  (follow)"  and 
what  does  it  indicate? 

Answer.  The  symbol  is  •  • and  indicates  that  the  mes- 
sage to  be  sent  is  in  Navy  Flag  Code  signals. 

Question.  What  is  the  symbol  for  code  "  interval "  or  "  desig- 
nator "  and  for  what  purpose  is  it  used? 

Answer.  The  symbol  is  •  —  •  —  and  is  used  to  separate  code 
groups  of  signals.  It  is  also  the  "  interval "  in  the  radio  and 
occulating  or  flashing  light  methods. 

Secondary  meanings. 

Question.  Name  the  secondary  meanings  of  the  semaphore 
alphabet.  -^ 

Answer.  Negative  (K)  —  •  — ;  Preparatory  (Lj'.^^flao  • ;  An- 
nulling letter  (N)  —  •;  Interrogatory  (O)  — ^  '-^  ^ — r  Affirma- 
tive (P)  . 

Question.  How  are  these  secondary  meanings  imparted? 

Answer.  By  holding  the  character  for  an  appreciable  time 
and  agitating  the  arms  or  flags  in  that  position;  or,  as  may 
be  preferable  at  times  with  the  more  important  ones,  the  worS^ 
may  be  spelled  out.  '^ 

Question.  Are  there  any  other  secondary  meanings  of  tW 
semaphore  alphabet? 


INSTRTTCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS,        149 

Answer.  The  *' R "  agitated  signifies  "2."  When  "R*'  is 
used  as  "Acknowledge"  it  is  a  conventional  signal,  not  a  sec- 
ondary meaning,  and  is  not  agitated. 

Question.  Are  there  any  secondary  meanings  to  the  Dot  and 
Dash  Code  in  wigwag  or  occulting  light  signals. 

Answer.  No ;  except  in  transmitting  Navy  Flag  Code  signals 
by  those  methods. 

8-  International  Code  of  Signals. 

(The  International  Code  Signal  Boolv  shall  be  studied  and  con- 
sulted for  complete  detailed  instructions  as  to  the  use  of  the 
International  Code.) 

Question.  What  is  the  International  Code  of  Signals? 
Answer.  A  system  of  signals  which  has  been  adopted  by  all 
nations  in  order  that  all  vessels  may  have  a  metliod  of  signaling 
to  each  other,  each  particular  hoist  having  the  same  meaning 
in  all  languages. 

Question.  Of  how  many  flags  does  the  code  consist? 
^    Answer.  Of  26  flags — one  for  each  letter  of  the  alphabet — 
.^nd  the  code  flag,  which  is  also  used  as  an  answering  pennant. 
Question.  Of  what  shapes  are  these  flags? 
Answer.  There  are  2  swallowtails,  A  and  B ;  5  pennants,  O, 
D,  E,  F,  and  G;  and  19  square  flags,  representing  the  remajji- 
ing  letters  of  the  alphabet.     The  code  flag  is  also  a  pennant.,  o;. 
Question.  Have  these  flags  been  given  other  names  than  the 
.Jetters  they  represent;  and  if  so,  for  what  purpose? 
c-   Answer.  In  the  Navy  and  the  Coast  Guard  each  flag  has  been 
given  a  distinctive  name,  in  order  to  avoid  confusing  the  names 
of  the  various  letters  in  reporting  signals  and  in  calling  out 
signals.     They   must  also  be  used   in  repeating  such   signals 
over  the  telephone. 

Question.  What  are  these  distinctive  names? 
•'.Answer.  They  are  as  follows : 

vA Able       J _Jig  S Sail 

B Boy         K King       T Tare 

C Cast       L Love       U Unit 

D_ Dog        M Mike      V Vice 

E Easy      N Nan        W Wateh 

F Fox        O Oboe       X X-ray 

G George  P Pup        Y_ Yoke 

H -Have      Q Quack    Z Zed 

I Item       R Rush 


160        INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Question.  Into  how  many  parts  is  the  code  book  divided, 
and  what  does  each  contain?  ,  rr 

Answer.  Into  three  parts.  The  first  part  contains  urgent  and 
important  signals,  compass  signals,  the  numeral  table,  and  all 
the  tables  of  moneys,  weiglits,  measures,  barometric  heights, 
etc,  together  with  a  geographical  list  and  a  table  of  phrases 
formed  with  auxiliary  verbs.  The  second  part  is  an  index, 
w^hich  consists  of  a  general  vocabulary  and  a  geographical 
index,  and  is  arranged  alphabetically.  The  third  part  gives 
lists  of  the  United  States  storm  warning,  Coast  Guard,  time 
signal,  radio,  and  radio  time-signal  stations,  and  of  Lloyd's 
signal  stations  of  the  world.  It  also  contains  semaphore  and 
distant  signal  codes,  the  United  States  xlrmy  and  Navy  dot-and- 
dash  and  semaphore  codes,  and  the  Morse  wigwag  code. 

Question.  Explain  the  method  of  signaling  by  the  Interna- 
tional Code. 

Answer.  Suppose  a  ship  wishes  to  signal  a  station:  She 
would  first  hoist  her  ensign  with  the  code  flag  under  it.  The 
station  would  reply  by  hoisting  the  code  flag  at  the  "  dip."  The 
ship  would  then  hoist  the  first  signal  of  her  message,  first  haul- 
ing down  her  code  flag  if  required  in  making  the  signal.  When 
this  signal  is  looked  up  in  the  code  book,  understood,  and  re- 
corded, the  station  will  then  hoist  the  answering  pennant  (code 
flag)  "close  up"  and  keep  it  there  until  the  ship  hauls  her 
signal  down,  when  the  station  will  lower  the  answering  pea- 
nant  to  the  "  dip  "  again  and  await  the  next  signal.  '^l 

Question.  What  do  you  understand  by  the  "dip"? 

Answer.  A  flag  is  at  the  "dip"  when  it  is  hoisted  about  tw6- 
thirds  of  the  way  up ;  that  is,  some  little  distance  below  where 
^  would  be  if  hoisted  "close  up."  ' 

*f" Question.  Where  should  the  answering  pennant  "be'  hoisted? 

Answer.  Where  it  can  best  be  seen. 

Question.  Suppose  the  ship  makes  a  signal  which  is  not  un- 
derstood;  what  would  you  do? 

Answer.  I  would  keep  the  answering  pennant  at  the  "  dip  " 
and  would  hoist  the  signal  "  OWL  "  or  "  WCX  "  or  such  other 
signal  as  would  meet  the  case  and  keep  it  flying  until  the  ship 
has  rectified  or  repeated  her  signal  and  I  understand  it.  I 
would  then  haul  down  the  signal  "  OWL  "  or  "  WCX  "  or  other 
^Sig:nal  used  and  would  hoist  the  answering  pennant  "  close  upi" 

Question.  What  do  the  signals  "OWL"  and  "WCX"  mean? 

Answer.  OWL  means  "  I  can  not  make  out  the  flags ;  hoist 
the  signal  in  a  better  position" ;  WCX  means  "  Signal  not  un- 
derstood, though  the  flags  are  distinguished." 


INSTRTTCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GTJARD  STATIONS.        1-51 

Question.  How  would  you  call  up  a  ship  with  which  you 
wished  to  communicate? 

Answer.  By  hoisting  her  sig:nal  number,  if  known.  If  the 
ship's  signal  number  is  not  known  I  would  make  use  of  one  of 
the  signals  between  "  DI  "  and  "  DQ  "  on  page  37  of  the  code 
book. 

Question.  How  many  flags  are  there  in  each  hoist  of  the 
International  Code? 

Answer.  From  one  to  four. 

Question.  How  many  and  what  are  the  one-letter  signals? 

Answer.  There  are  seven,  as  follows :  B,  C,  D,  L,  P,  Q,  S. 

Question.  What  meaning  has  each  of  the  one-letter  signals?^v/ 

Answer.  B — I  am  taking  in  (or  discharging)  explosives.     ' 

C5 — Yes,  or  affirmative. 

D — No,  or  negative. 

L — I  have  (or  have  had)  some  dangerous  infectious  disease 
on  board. 

P — I  am  about  to  sail ;  all  persons  report  on  board. 

Q — I  have  a  clean  bill  of  health,  but  am  liable  to  quarantine. 

S — I  want  a  pilot.  » 

Question.  Is  the  code  flag  ever  hoisted  over  these  one-letter 
signals;  and  if  so,  does  it  change  the  meaning?  ^n 

Answer.  It  may  be  hoisted  over  any  of  them,  but  does  not 
change  its  meaning. 

Question.  Is  the  code  flag  ever  hoisted  under  a  one-letter  sig- 
nal? 

Answer.  No. 

Question.  Is  the  code  flag  ever  hoisted  over  any  other  one- 
letter  signal  of  the  alphabet  than  the  seven  named  above? 

Answer.  It  may  be  hoisted  over  any  other  letter  of  the  al- 
phabet and  the  signal  thus  made  has  the  meaning  given  it  on 
page  7  of  the  code  book. 

Question.  What  do  you  understand  by  the  term  "code  sig- 
nal"? 

Answer.  A  code  signal  is  any  signal  found  in  the  code  bookj  ^f :t 

Question.  Can  any  other  than  code  signals  be  sent  by  the  In- 
ternational Code? 

Answer.  Yes ;  numbers  or  words  not  in  the  code  book  may  be 
sent  by  special  signals  which  are  not  code  signals. 

Question.  How  are  these  special  signals  known? 

Answer.  They  are  preceded  and  followed  by  signals  known  as 
alphabetical  signals  or  numeral  signals  as  the  case  may  be. 

Question.  Name  the  alphabetical  signals  and  give  their  mean- 
ings. 


162        INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GTTARD  STATIONS. 

Answer.  Code  flag  over  E — Alphabetical  signal  No.  1,  indicat- 
ing that  the  flags  hoisted  after  it  until  alphabetical  signal  No. 
3  or  numeral  signal  No.  1  is  made  do  not  represent  the  signals 
in  tlie  code,  but  are  to  be  understood  as  having  their  alphabet- 
ical meanings  and  express  individual  letters  of  the  alphabet 
which  are  to  form  words. 

..Code  flag  over :F — ^Alphabetical  Signal  No.  2,  indicating  the 
end  of  a  word  made  by  alphabetical  signals  or  a  dot  between 
initials. 

Code  flag  over  G — Alphabetical  signal  No.  3,  indicating  that 
the  alphabetical  signals  are  ended ;  the  signals  which  follow 
will  be  found  in  the  code  in  the  usual  manner. 

Question.  Name  the  numeral  signals  and  give  their  meanings. 

Answer.  Code  flag  over  M — Numeral  signal  No.  1,  indicating 
that  the  flags  hoisted  after  it  until  numeral  signal  No.  3  or  al- 
phabetical si'gnal  No.  1  is  made  do  not  represent  the  signals  in 
the  code,  but  express  figures  as  indicated  in  the  table  on  page 
32,  and  have  the  special  numerical  values  there  given  them. 

Code  flag  over  N — ^Numeral  signal  No.  2,  indicating  tlie  deci- 
mal point. 

Code  flag  over  O — ^Numeral  signal  No.  3,  indicating  that  the 
numeral  signals  are  ended ;  the  signals  which  follow  will  be 
found  in  the  code  in  the  usual  manner. 

Question.  Where  will  a  signal  be  found  in  the  code  book? 

Answer.  If  it  be  a  three-letter  signal  between  "  CXA"  and 
"  ZNT,"  it  will  be  found  in  the  general  vocabulary.  Part  II  of 
the  code  book ;  any  other  code  signal  will  be  found  in  the  proper 
table  in  Part  I  of  the  code  book. 

Question.  How  would  you  proceed  to  find  signals  representing 
the  message  to  be  sent  ? 

Answer.  I  would  look  for  the  message  tinder  its  most  import 
tant  word,  and  if  found  there  I  would  take  the  letters  to  the 
left  and  abreast  the  message  as  the  signal.  For  instance,  in 
the  message  "  I  shall  stand  about  to  see  if  I  can  pick  up  any- 
thing from  the  wreck,"  the  most  important  word  is  "  w^reck," 
and  under  it  I  would  find  the  message,  and  abreast  the  latter 
the  letters  "  ZIT,"  which  would  be  the  proper  signal. 

Question.  Suppose  the  word  you  selected  as  the  most  impor- 
tant did  not  give  you  the  information  desired,  what  would  you 
do? 

Answer.  I  would  look  for  it  under  some  other  word  that  I 
considered  important,  such  as  "  pick "  or  "  stand."  It  would 
be  useless  to  look  for  it  under  such  words  as  "  if,"  "  to," 
"about,"  "from,"  etc.  rM 


INSTlttrCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GTJARD  STATIONS.        163 

Question.  Suppose  the  message  is  *'  Vessel  seriously  damaged ; 
want  immediate  assistance"  and  can  not  be  found  as  a  whole 
under  any  of  its  words,  what  would  you  do? 

Answer.  I  would  look  up  the  signal  for  each  separate  word 
if  necessary. 

Question.  Tell  how  you  would  look  up  the  signal  for  a  word. 

Answer.  I  would  look  through  the  words  at  the  tops  of  the 
pages  in  the  general  vocabulary  until  I  found  the  word  or  the 
word  nearest  to  it  and  would  then  look  down  that  page  until 
the  word  was  found.  Abreast  of  it  to  the  left  would  be  the 
signal.  ' 

Question.  What  is  it  necessary  to  know  in  order  that  signals 
may  be  read  quickly  and  correctly? 

Answer.  It  is  necessary  to  know  the  flags  instantly  and  cor- 
rectly ;  to  know  the  kind  of  signal  by  the  hoist ;  that  Is,  by 
the  number  of  flags  in  it  and  the  upper  flag  (or  the  lower  flag, 
if  the  code  pennant)  ;  and,  thirdly,  it  is  necessary  to  know 
where  in  the  code  book  the  meaning  of  each  class  of  signals 
may  be  found.      ' 

Question.  What  are  two-letter  signals? 

Answer.  Urgent  and  important  signals. 

Question.  What  letters  are  used  for  these  signals? 

Answer.  From  AB  to  ZY. 

Question.  Is  the  code  flag  ever  hoisted  over  or  under  two- 
letter  signals;  and  if  so,  does  it  change  their  meanings? 

Answer.  Yes.  It  may  be  hoisted  either  over  or  under  two- 
letter  signals  and  when  so  hoisted  changes  their  meanings 
entirely. 

Question.  Name  the  kinds  of  signals  which  are  made  with 
the  code  flag  over  two-letter  signals. 

Answer.  Latitude  and  longitude,  divisions  of  time  and  of 
latitude  and  longitude;  barometer  and  thermometer  signals. 

Question.  What  kind  of  signals  are  made  with  the  code  flag 
under  two-letter  signals? 

Answer.  Numeral  table  signals. 

Question.  What  are, three-letter  signals? 

Answer.  Compass  signals,  moneys,  weights,  and  measures  sig- 
nals, decimals  and  fractions,  auxiliary  phrases,  and  general 
signals.  I " 

Question.  What  letters  represent  compass  signals?  jn 

Answer.  From  ABC  to  AQO  are  compass  signals  in  degrees:; 
-and  from  AQD  to  AST  are  compass  signals  in  points  and  half 
points. 


154        INSTRTTCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Question.  What  letters  are  used  for  moneys  and  for  weights 
and  measures  signals? 

Answer.  ASU  to  BGN. 
r>  Question.  What  letters  are  used  in  signaling  decimals  and 
fractions? 

Answer.  From  BCO  to  BDZ. 

Question.  What    letters    are    used    in    signaling    auxiliary 
phrases? 
r  Answer.  From  BPJA  to  CWT. 

Question.  Where  are  the  three-letter  general  signals  found  ? 

Answer.  In  the  general  vocabulary  in  Part  II  of  the  code 
book. 

Question.  Between  what  letters  do  they  occur? 

Answer.  From  CXA  to  ZNT. 

Question.  Is  the  code  flag  ever  hoisted  over  or  under  a  three- 
letter  signal? 

Answer.  No. 

Question.  What  signals  are  made  with  four-letter  hoists? 

Answer.  Geographical  signals,  alphabetical  spelling  table, 
and  vessels'  numbers. 

Question.  How  are  these  signals  distinguished  from  one 
another?  ^ 

Answer.  By  the  upper  flag  of  the  hoist. 

Question.  What  flag  is  uppermost  in  geographical  signals? 

Answer.  Either  of  the  swallowtails,  A  or  B. 

Question.  What  flag  is  uppermost  in  alphabetical  spelling 
table  signals? 

Answer.  The  pennant  C. 

Question.  What  flag  is  uppermost  in  vessels'  numbers? 

Answ^er.  The  pennant  G  for  names  of  Government  vessels; 
any  square  flag  for  names  of  merchant  vessels. 

Question.  At  the  present  time  what  square  flags  are  used  for 
the  upper  flag  of  the  hoist  for  American  merchant  vessels  and 
yachts? 

Answer.  The  letters  H,  J,  K,  and  L. 

Question.  Where  would  you  look  for  ^n  American  merchant 
vessel's  number  if  her  name  is  known? 

Answer.  I  would  look  for  her  official  number  in  the  latest 
"  List  of  Merchant  Vessels  of  the  United  States,"  in  which  the 
names  of  American  merchant  vessels  are  arranged  alphabeti- 
cally under  the  headings:  Sailing,  steam,  and  unrigged  vessels. 

Question.  If  an  American  merchant  vessel's  number  only  is 
known,  where  would  you  look  for  her  name? 


INSTRTTCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GXrARD  STATIONS.       186 

Answer.  In  the  latest  edition  of  the  "  Seagoing  Vessels  of 
the  United  States,"  in  which  the  signal  letters  are  arranged 
alphabetically  under  the  headings :  "  Seagoing  vessels "  and 
"  Yachts." 

Question.  Where  would  you  look  for  the  signal  letters  of 
vessels  belonging  to  the  Government  of  the  United  States? 

Answer.  In  the  latest  edition  of  "  Seagoing  Vessels  of  the 
United  States." 

Question.  What  vessels  of  the  United  States  Government 
have  signal  letters  assigned  them? 

Answer.  Vessels  of  the  Navy;  of  the  Quartermaster  Corps 
and  of  the  Engineer  Corps  of  the  Army;  of  the  Coast  Guard; 
of  the  Lighthouse  Service;  of  the  Coast  and  Geodetic  Survey; 
of  the  Bureau  of  Fisheries;  and  of  the  Bureau  of  Navigation 
of  the  Department  of  Commerce. 

Question.  Since  all  of  these  vessels  have  the  pennant  G  for 
the  upper  flag  of  the  hoist,  how  can  you  tell  at  a  glance  to 
which  service  a  vessel  belongs? 

f>,:  Answer.  By  the  second  or  third  flag  in  the  hoist. 
ftr  Question.  What  flag  have  vessels  of  the  Navy  for  the  second 
letter  of  the  hoist? 

Answer.  Either  the  flags  Q  or  R.  i 

,   Question.  What  flag  have  vessels  of  the  Army  for  the  second 
letter  of  the  hoist? 
.^Answer.  They  have  the  letter  W. 

[)  .Question.  What  flag  have  all  other  Grovernment  vessels  for 
the  second  letter  of  the  hoist?  -.  [.: 

Answer.  They  have  the  letter  V. 

Question.  How  can  you  distinguish  a  vessel  of  the  Coast 
Guard  by  her  signal  letters?  i.  , 

Answer.  She  has  for  the  third  letter  of  the  "hOlst  following 
GV  some  letter  from  B  to  H,  both  inclusi\'e. 

Question.  Where  would  you  look  for  the  radio  call  letters 
of  vessels,  both  Government  and  merchant,  of  the  Uniteii 
States?  .        -    J  r 

Answer.  In  the  publication  "  SeagoijQg  Vessel3  of  the  United 
States." 

Question.  How  many,  geographical  lists  are  in  the  code  book? 

Answer.  Two.     One  in  Part  I ;  the  other  in  Part  IT. 

Question.  When  is  each  used? 

Answer.  When  reading  a  geographical  signal  which  has  been 
made,  the  list  in  Part  I  is  used,  because  the  signal  letters  are 
there  arranged  alphabetically  and  easily  found.    When  signaling 


IBB        IKSTRUCTIONS  J-UK  COAST  GUARD  STATIOKS. 

the  name  of  a  place  the  list  in  Part  II  is  used,  because  there 
the  names  of  the  places  are  arranged  alphabetically. 

Question.  What  kind  of  letters  are  used  in  alphabetical  spell- 
ing-table signals? 

Answer.  Consonants  only  are  used. 

Question.  How  many  letters  does  any  signal  in  the  alpha- 
betical spelling  table  represent? 

Answer.  Each  signal  represents  either  two  or  three  letters, 
which  are  to  be  used  in  forming  a  word. 

Question.  Where  would  you  find  the  code  signal  for  one 
letter? 

, .  Answer.  In  the  general  vocabulary  in  Part  II  of  the  code 
:book.    It  would  be  a  three-letter  signal. 

n(  -Question.  How  are  words  or  names  not  found  in  the  general 
vocabulary  sent  by  signals?  j^ 

tfr  Answer.  They  are  spelled  out. 

Question.  In  how  many  ways  can  words  be  spelled  out  by 
signals? 

Answer.  In  two  ways.  They  can  be  spelled  out  either  by  the 
alphabetical  spelling  table,  which  is  the  old  method,  or  by  the 
new  method,  in  which  the  alphabetical  signals  described  on 
page  13  of  the  code  book  are  used. 

Question.  In  how  many  ways  may  numbers  be  sent  by  the 
International  Code?  '' 

Answer.  In  two  ways.  They  can  be  sent  either  by  the  nu- 
meral table  on  page  33  or  by  the  alternative  method  explained 
on  page  32  of  the  code  book. 

Question.  Suppose  you  saw  a  ship  standing  into  danger,  what 
signal  would  you  hoist? 

Answer.  JD. 
5S*  ^Question.  What  next  would  you  do. 

Answer.  After  she  has  acknowledged  that  signal  or  altered 
her  course  in  obedience  to  it,  I  would  hoist  one  of  the  signals 
on  page  39  (Danger  and  Distress  Signals),  directing  her  how 
to  steer  to  avoid  the  danger. 

Question.  Suppose  you  set  the  signal  **  Steer  more  to  star- 
board (or  to  port),"  how  long  do  you  keep  it  flying? 

Answer.  Until  her  course  is  sufficiently  altered  to  clear  the 
danger,  when  I  would  haul  the  signal  down. 

Question.  If  a  vessel  is  so  far  away  that  the  colors  of  the 
flags  of  the  International  Code  can  not  be  distinguished,  what 
kind  of  signals  w^ould  you  use?  '^ 

Answer.  Distant  signals.  '^ 


INSTRXrCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GTTARD  STATIONS.        157 

Question.  Under  what  other  conditions  would  distant  signals 
be  used? 

Answer.  In  calms,  when  the  flags  hang  up  and  down,  or  when 
the  wind  is  blowing  toward  or  from  the  observer,  or  w^hen  the 
atmosphere  is  not  clear. 

Question.  How  does  a  ship  ordinarily  communicate  by  distant 
signals? 

Answer.  By  hoisting  certain  shapes. 

Question.  What  shapes  are  used? 

Answer.  A  cone,  point  upward. 

A  ball.  ''^ 

A  cone,  point  downward.  ''^ 

A  drum.  '^ 

Question.  What  flags  may  be  substituted  for  these  shapes 
when  weather  conditions  are  favorable? 

Answer.  A  square  flag  may  be  substituted  for  the  cone, 
point  upward. 

A  pennant,  for  the  cone,  point  downward. 

A  pennant,  with  the  fly  tied  to  the  halyards,  or  a  wheft,  for 
the  drum.    A  wheft  is  any  flag  tied  in  the  center. 

There  is  no  flag  substitute  for  the  ball.  /  -^ 

Question.  Is  there  a  table  of  urgent  and  important  distant 
signals  in  the  code  book? 

Answer.  Yes ;  the  table  of  **  Special  Distant  Signals,"  begin- 
ning on  page  533. 

Question.  What  are  the  International  Signals  of  Distress  to 
be  used  in  the  daytime?  '■■'^' 

Answer.  A  gun  or  other  explosive  signal  fired  at  intervals  of 
about  a  minute. 

The  International  Code  Signal  of  Distress  indicated  by  NC. 

The  distant  signal,  consisting  of  a  square  flag,  having  either 
above  or  below^  it  a  ball  or  anything  resembling  a  ball. 

A  continuous  sounding  with  any  fog-signal  apparatus. 

The  distant  signal,  consisting  of  a  cone,  point  upward,  having 
either  above  it  or  below  it  a  ball  or  anything  resembling  a  ball. 
(This  is  purely  a  code  signal  and  not  one  of  the  signals  of 
distress  given  in  the  rules  of  the  road,  the  needless  exhibition 
of  w^hich  entails  penalties  upon  the  master  of  the  vessel  dis- 
playing it.) 

Question.  What  are  the  International  Signals  of  Distress  to 
be  used  at  night? 

Answer.  A  gun  or  other  explosive  signal  fired  at  intervals  of 
about  a  minute. 


158        INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GTTARD  STATIONS. 

Flames  on  the  vessel  (us  from  a  burning  tar  ])arrel,  oil  bar- 
rel, etc.).  id 

Rockets  or  shells  throwing  stars  of  any  color  or  description, 
fired  one  at  a  time  at  short  intervals. 

A  continuous  sounding  with  any  fog-signal  apparatus, 
j  [Question.  Would  the  ensign  hoisted  union  down  be  considered 
a  distress  signal?  ^i 

Answer.  Yes ;  and  when  «o  displayed  it  must  be  investigated, 
and  so  must  any  unusual  or  excited  waving  of  the  arms,  flags, 
or  other  articles  not  readily  and  satisfactorily  explainable  as 
other  signals,  particularly  when  made  from  boats  under  cir- 
cumstances in  which  danger  to  the  persons  on  board  is  immi- 
nent or  probable. 

Question.  May  distress  signals  be  used  together? 

Answer.  Yes ;  they  may  be  used  either  together  or  separately. 

Question.  What  ai*e  the  International  Signals  for  a  pilot  to 
be  used  in  the  daytime? 

Answer.  The  jack,  hoisted  at  the  fore. 

The  International  Code  pilot  signal  indicated  by  PT. 

The  International  Code  flag  S,  with  or  without  the  code  pen- 
nant over  it. 

The  distant  signal,  consisting  of  a  cone,  point  upward,  having 
above  it  two  balls  or  shapes  resembling  balls. 

Question.  What  are  the  International  Code  signals  lor  ;i 
pilot  to  be  used  at  night? 

Answer.  The  pyrotechnic  light,  commonly  known  as  a  blue 
light,  every  15  minutes. 

A  bright  Avhite  light,  flashed  or  shown  at  short  or  frequent 
intervals  just  above  the  bulwarks  for  about  a  minute  at  a  time. 

The  Navy  Flag  Code. 

Question.  What  is  the  United  States  Navy  Flag  Code? 

Answer.  A  special  set  of  signals  adapted  to  the  use  of  the 
United  States  Navy. 

Question.  Of  how^  many  flags  does  the  code  consist? 

Answer.  Of  26  alphabet  flags  (the  same  as  those  of  the  In- 
ternational Code),  a  numeral  flag,  3  repeaters,  and  a  number 
of  special  flags  and  pennants. 

Question.  Name  the  special  flags. 

Answer.  Cornet,  interrogatory,  affirmative,  negative,  annul- 
ling, preparatory,  the  repeaters,  the  numeral  flag,  danger,  and 
designating  flag. 


IM"STB,TrCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.         159 

Question.  What  is  ttie  preparatory  flag  and  what  does  it 
mean? 

Answer.  Tlie  preparatory  flag  is  the  alphabet  flag  L.  When 
hoisted  over  a  signal  it  means :  "  Prepare  to  execute  the  signal 
now  shown  as  soon  as  the  signal  of  execution  is  made."  It  is 
also  hoisted  as  a  single  display  preparatory  to  certain  routine 
ceremonies  and  also  as  a  morning  routine  time  signal. 

Question.  What  is  the  signal  of  execution? 

Answer.  It  is  the  starting  from  its  point  of  hoist  of  the  same 
signal  (without  the  preparatory  flag)  or  of  some  other  signal, 
relating  to  the  same  movement  or  maneuver.  ;!> 

Question.  What  is  the  interrogatory  flag  and  what  does  It 
mean? 

Answer.  The  interrogatory  flag  is  the  alphabet  flag  O.  When 
hoisted  over  a  signal  it  changes  it  into  interrogatory  form. 
When  hoisted  alone  in  answer  to  a  signal  it  means  that  the 
signal  can  not  be  read  or  is  not  understood. 

Question.  What  is  the  affirmative  flag  and  what  does  it 
mean  ? 

Answer.  The  aflSrmative  flag  is  the  alphabet  flag  P.  When 
hoisted  in  answer  to  a  signal  it  means  assent,  consent,  permis- 
sion granted,  or  "  Yes."  When  hoisted  over  a  signal  it  means 
that  the  specific  work  or  service  called  for  by  that  signal  has 
been  completed  or  the  duty  has  been  performed. 

Question.  What  is  the  negative  flag  and  what  does  it  mean? 

Answer.  The  negative  flag  is  the  alphabet  flag  K.  When 
hoisted  in  answer  to  a  signal  it  means :  "  Not  granted,"  or 
"  No."  When  hoisted  over  a  signal  it  means :  "  Do  not."  In 
reporting  soundings,  over  a  number,  it  means:  "No  bottom  at 
feet." 

Question.  What  is  the  annulling  flag  and  what  does  it  mean? 

Answer.  It  is  the  alphabet  flag  N.  It  annuls  all  signals  at 
that  moment  hoisted  on  the  same  mast.  When  hoisted  alone 
it  annuls  the  last  signal  made  or  the  last  hoist. 

Question.  How  is  the  numeral  flag  used? 

Answer.  When  hoisted  over  certain  alphabet  flags  it  indicates 
that  those  flags  are  to  be  interpreted  as  numerals.  .  .  •  ; 

Question.  What  are  the  flags  whose  meanings  cti;er^>tli]as 
changed? 

Answer — 


Q 

R 

S 

1    U 

5   Y 

6   Z 

7 

8 

';  irJ  '^.: 

9 
0 

T 

4   X 

•-i<L^ 

160        INSTRirCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Question.  What  purpose  do  the  repeaters  serve? 

Answer.  They  serve  to  reproduce,  in  numeral  and  vocabulary 
signals  only,  the  alphabet  flags  hoisted  over  them.  The  first 
repeater  reproduces  the  first  alphabet  flag,  the  second  re- 
peater the  second  flag,  and  the  third  repeater  the  third  flag. 

Question.  Where  shall  the  answering  pennant  of  the  is^avy 
Code  be  hoisted? 

Answer.  It  is  to  be  hoisted  where  it  can  be  best  seen — at  the 
truck,  gaff,  or  yardarm — in  answering,  and  kept  there  until  the 
signal  is  hauled  down.  The  answering  pennant  is  used  as  a 
divisional  point  to  represent  the  divisions  of  mixed  quantities 
referred  to  by  a  signal  made  at  the  same  time  or  just  previously. 

Question.  How  many  and  what  are  the  call  flags? 

Answer.  There  are  23  flags,  representing  letters  of  the  alpha- 
bet, except  E,  I,  and  T.  They  are  designed  as  alphabet  flags 
with  *'  flies "  of  distinctive  colors  added  to  prevent  confusion 
with  alphabet  flags.  They  are  used  in  all  calls  by  flags  except 
in  the  case  of  one  vessel  calling  another  of  the  same  group. 

Question.  What  are  the  call  pennants? 

Answer.  They  are  23  pennants,  representing  the  letters  of  the 
alphabet,  except  E,  I,  and  T.  Their  design  is  based  on  the 
Dot  and  Dash  Code,  red  a  dot,  yellow  a  dash,  and  blue  repeat- 
ing the  color  immediately  preceding,  whether  yellow  or  red, 
from  hoist  to  fly.    They  are  used  in  all  calls  made  by  hoist. 

Question.  For  what  are  the  call  fl.ags  and  call  pennants  used? 

Answer.  For  making  a  ship's  call,  which  consists  of  two  let- 
ters, as  AP,  NB,  etc.  The  upper  letter  is  represented  by  the 
proper  call  flag;  the  lower,  by  the  call  pennant.  The  call  flag 
is  always  hoisted  over  the  call  pennant. 

Question.  Are  call  flags  used  for  any  other  purpose? 

Answer.  Yes.  They  are  ,used  in  conjunction  with  special 
flags  called  "  indicator  flags  "  as  the  call  letters  of  squadrons, 
divisions,  etc. 

Question.  What  is  the  numeral  flag? 

Answer.  It  is  a  square  flag  of  four  horizontal  stripes — ^red, 
white,  blue  and  yellow,  the  red  stripe  being  uppermost. 

Question.  What  are  the  "repeaters"? 

Answer.  They  are  three  pennants:  The  first  repeater  is  red, 
with  a  small  rectangular  yellow  section  next  the  hoist;  the 
second  repeater  is  yellow,  with  a  blue  rectangular  section  next 
the  hoist ;  the  third  repeater  is  blue,  with  a  yellow  rectangular 
section  next  the  hoist. 

Question.  What  is  the  powder  flag,  and  tot  what  purpose  is  it 
displayed?  .X   h 


IWSfRtr<CTIONS  FOR  COAST  GTTARD  STATIONS.         161 

Answer.  It  is  the  alphabet  flag  B,  and  is  displayed  at  the  fore 
by  all  vessels  when  taking  on  board  or  discharging  explosives 
or  loaded  shells  or  fuel  oil  or  gasoline  in  large  quantities,  and 
in  the  bows  of  boats  and  lighters  transporting  the  same. 

Question.  What  does  the  cornet  mean  when  hoisted? 

Answer.  When  hoisted  at  the  fore,  or  at  thie  highest  gaff  or 
signal  yard  if  the  foremast  head  can  not  be  used  for  its  display, 
it  is  a  peremptory  order  for  all  officers  and  others  absent  from 
the  ship  to  repair  on  board  at  once.  When  hoisted  at  htdt 
yardarm  high  it  is  a  call  for  the  whole  force  to  receive  a  sema- 
phore or  wigwag  message. 

Resuijcitation  of  t«e  Apparently  t)RO wited. 

Question.  What  would  you  first  do  in  attempting  to  resus- 
citate an  apparently  drowned  person? 

Answer.  I  would  arouse  the  patient. 

Question.  How  would  you  arouse  the  patient? 

Answer.  I  would  not  move  the  patient  unless  in  danger  of 
freezing ;  instantly  expose  the  face  to  the  air,  toward  the  wind, 
if  there  be  any ;  wipe  dry  the  mouth  and  nostrils ;  rip  the 
clothing  so  as  to  exi^ose  the  chest  and  waist ;  give  two  or  three 
quick,  smarting  slaps  on  the  chest  with  the  open  hand. 

Question.  What  do  you  mean  when  you  say  that  you  would 
not  move  the  patient  unless  he  was  in  danger  of  freezing? 

Answer.  I  mean  that  I  would  not  waste  time  by  moving  him 
to  a  distance  or  to  a  place  of  shelter  unless  he  was  in  danger 
of  freezing.  I  would  move  him  a  few  feet  if  necessary  to  get 
him  out  of  the  water  or  to  place  him  so  that  I  could  work  on 
him  to  better  advantage. 

Question.  Why  do  you  take  time  trying  to  arouse  him? 

Answer.  Because  this  might  restore  consciousness  and  render 
further  effort  unnecessary. 

Question.  If  the  patient  does  not  revive  under  the  effort- to 
arouse  him,  what  would  you  do? 

Answer.  I  would  expel  the  water  from  the  stomach  and 
chest. 

Question.  How  would  you  expel  the  water  from  the  stomach 
and  chest? 

Answer.  Separate  the  jaws  and  keep  them  apart  by  placing 

between  the  teeth  a  cork  or  small  bit  of  wood ;  turn  the  patient 

on  his   face,   a  large  bundle  of  tightly   rolled   clothing   being 

placed  beneath  the  stomach;  press  heavily  on  the  back  over 

67385°— 17 11 


j3|62        INSTEirCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

,^.^p  for  half  a  minute,  or  as  long  as  lluids  How  freely  from  the 
.^mouth. 

Question.  After  expelling  the  water  from  the  stomach  and 
chest,  what  would  you  next  do? 

Answer.  I  would  attempt  to  produce  breathing. 

Question.  What  is  the  first  step  in  the  attempt  to  produce 
.^rea  thing? 

Answer.  To  clear  the  mouth  and  throat  of  mucus  by  intro- 
ducing into  the  throat  the  corner  of  a  handkerchief  wrapped 
closely  about  the  fore  finger;  this  should  be  done  before  the 
patient  is  turned  on  his  back. 

Question.  What  is  the  second  step? 

Answer.  To  turn  him  on  his  back,  placing  the  roll  of  clothing 
so  as  to  raise  the  pit  of  the  stomach  above  the  level  of  the  rest 
of  the  body. 

Question.  What  is  done  with  the  tongue? 

Answer.  When  the  mouth  and  throat  are  cleared  of  mucus,  an 
assistant  with  a  handkerchief  or  piece  of  dry  cloth  draws  the 
tip  of  the  tongue  out  of  one  corner  of  the  mouth  and  keeps  it 
projecting  a  little  beyond  the  lips.  '    : 

Question.  What  is  the  purpose  of  this? 

Answer.  To  prevent  the  tongue  falling  back  and  choking  the 
entrance  to  the  windpipe,  which  would  prevent  breathing. 

Question.  What  should  be  done  with  the  patient's  arms? 

Answer.  An    assistant    should    grasp    them    just    below    the 
elbows  and  draw  them  steadily  upward  by  the  sides  of  the 
patient's  head  to  the  ground,  the  hands  nearly  meeting. 
jv^^  Question.  What  is  the  purpose  of  this? 

lit.   Answer.  It  is  to  enlarge  the  capacity  of  the  chest  and  induce 
inspiration. 

Question.  All  these  things  are  being  done  as  quickly  as  possi- 
ble ;  is  anything  else  being  done  at  the  same  time? 

Answer.  Yes;  a  third  assistant  takes  position  astride  the 
patient's  body,  with  his  elbows  resting  upon  his  own  knees,  his 
hands  extended  ready  for  action. 

Question.  What  is  done  next? 

Answer.  The  assistant  at  the  head  will  turn  the  patient's 
arms  down  to  the  sides  of  the  body,  the  assistant  holding  the 
tongue  changing  hands  if  necessary  to  let  the  arms  pass.  .Just 
before  the  patient's  hands  reach  the  ground,  the  man  astride 
the  body  will  grasp  the  body  with  his  hands,  the  balls  of  his 
thumbs  resting  on  either  side  of  the  pit  of  the  stomach,  the 
fingers  falling  into  the  grooves  between  the  short  ribs. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GTTARD  STATIONS.        163 

Question.  What  does  the  man  astride  the  body  do  as  the 
patient's  hands  touch  the  ground? 

Answer.  Using  his  knees  as  a  pivot,  he  will,  at  the  moment 
the  patient's  hands  touch  the  ground,  throw,  not  too  suddenly, 
all  his  weight  forward  on  his  hands,  and  at  the  same  time 
squeeze  the  waist  between  them  as  if  he  wished  to  force  any- 
thing in  the  chest  upward  out  of  the  mouth ;  he  will  deepen  the 
pressure  while  he  slowly  counts  one,  two,  three,  four,  about 
2  to  2^  seconds,  then  suddenly  let  go  with  a  final  push,  which 
will  spring  him  back  to  his  first  position. 

Question.  What  does  this  do? 

Answer.  This  completes  expiration. 

Question.  What  care  should  be  taken  in  placing  the  roll  of 
clothing  under  the  patient's  back? 

Answer.  Care  should  be  taken  that  it  is  so  placed  as  not  to 
project  beyond  the  sides  of  the  body  and  interfere  with  the 
patient's  arms  touching  the  ground  when  turned  down  to  the 
sides  of  the  body,  and  that  it  raises  the  pit  of  the  stomach 
above  the  level  of  the  rest  of  the  body. 

Question.  Where  is  the  pit  of  the  stomach? 

Answer.  It  is  tlie  angle  formed  by  the  short  ribs  just  below 
the  lower  end  of  the  breastbone. 

Question.  How  should  the  arms  be  drawn  upward  and  back- 
ward ? 

Answer.  They  should  describe  an  arc  of  a  circle  in  a  plane 
parallel  to  the  body,  and  should  be  kept  extended  at  all  times  so 
as  to  enlarge  the  capacity  of  the  chest  as  much  as  possible. 

Question.  Of  what  does  breathing  consist? 

Answer.  Of  the  inspiration  and  expiration  of  breath. 

Question.  What  is  inspiration? 

Answer.  It  is  the  drawing  of  air  into  the  lungs,  and  is  ac- 
complished by  the  elevation  of  the  chest  walls. 

Question.  What  is  expiration? 

Answer.  It  is  the  act  or  process  of  breathing  out,  or  forcing 
air  from  the  lungs  through  the  nose  or  mouth.  It  is  the  oppo- 
site of  inspiration. 

Question.  What  is  respiration? 

Answer.  It  is  the  act  of  breathing,  and  consists  of  taking 
air  into  and  forcing  it  out  from  the  lungs.  It  is  the  combina- 
tion of  inspiration  and  expiration. 

Question.  How  should  pressure  be  applied  over  the  lower 
ribs  in  producing  expiration?  ^ 

I '  Answer.  It  should  be  applied  inwatrd  and  uptvard '  and .  not 
downward,  '^ij  ^ai^Ai  .iAt^n'^  i^«ii  ^^liiaa'jiq  ■^LiiiiejiL;^  uiia  £U( 


fW        ^rSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GTJARD  STATIONS. 

-jiil  Question.  Will  it  always  be  found  necessary  to  change  hands 
IB  holding  the  tongue? 

Answer.  No;  after  practice  it  will  not  be  necessary.     The 
tongue  must  not  be  released  in  any  event. 

Question.  How  long  an  interval  is  required  for  inspiration 
and  for  expiration? 

Answer.  From  2  to  2i  seconds  each. 
..     Question.  How  often  should  the  movements  for  inspiration 
, 'jemd  expiration  be  repeated? 

Answer.  The  combined  movements  should  be  repeated  from 
12  to  15  times  in  every  minute. 

Question.  How  would  you  regulate  these  movements? 
Answer.  Either  by  a  watch  or  by  counting  or  by  my  own 
inspiration  and  expiration. 

Question.  When  the  man  astride  the  patient's  body  releases 
the  pressure  and  springs  back  to  his  first  position,  what  is  next 
*>#ne? 

^r.  Answer.  The  man  at  the  patient's  head  again  draws  the  arms 
steadily  upward  to  the  sides  of  the  patient's  head,  as  before, 
the  assistant  holding  the  tongue,  again  changing  hands  to  let 
the  arms  pass  if  necessary,  holding  them  there  from  2  to  2^ 
seconds. 

.  .  Question.  If  natural  breathing  be  not  restored  after  about 
ifour  minutes,  what  would  you  do? 

..  .Answer.  If  natural  breathing  be  not  restored  after  a  trial 
.of  the  bellows  movement  for  a  space  of  about  four  minutes, 
turn  the  patient  a  second  time  on  the  stomach,  as  directed  in 
Rule  II,  rolling  the  body  in  the  opposite  direction  from  that  in 
which  it  was  first  turned,  for  the  purpose  of  freeing  the  air 
passages  from  any  remaining  water. 

Question.  How  long  should  artificial  respiration  be  continued? 
Answer.  From  one  to  four  hours,  or  until  the  patient  breathes. 
Question.  What  would  you  do  upon  the  appearance  of  re- 
,  turning  life? 

., \,  j,  4^nswer.  Carefully  aid  the  first  short  gasps  by  artificial  res- 
piration until  deepened  into  full  breaths. 

Question.  In  addition  to  the  artificial  respiration  what  other 
aids  should  be  applied? 

Answer.  Drying  and  rubbing  should  be  unceasingly  practiced 
from  the  beginning  by  assistants,  taking  care  not  to  interfere 
^,^i.th  the  means  employed  to  produce  breathing. 

Question.  How  should  the  limbs  of  the  patient  be  rubbed? 
^^,,  Answer.  Always  in  an  upward  direction  toward   the  body, 
with  firm  grasping  pressure  and  energy,  using  the  bare  hands. 


INSTRXrCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.         166 

dry  flannels,  or  handkerchiefs,  continuing  the  friction  under 
blankets  or  over  dry  clothing. 

Question.  How  may  the  warmth  of  the  body  be  promoted? 

Answer.  By  the  application  of  hot  flannels  to  the  stomach'>«ij 
and  armpits,  bottles  or  bladders  of  hot  waiter,  heated  bricks]  ^J 
etc.,  to  the  limbs  and  soles  of  the  feet.  ^" 

Question.  How  should  a  child  or  delicate  person  be  handled?    '' 

Answer.  More  gently  than  a  robust  patient. 

Question.  What   after-treatment   should  be  employed   exter- 
nally? ,  ■  .-*'•• 

Answer.  As  sodn  as  breathing  is  established,  the'  pfetienlT 
should  be  stripped  of  all  wet  clothing,  wrappe<l  in  blankets  only, 
put  to  bed  comfortably  warm,  but  with  a  free  circulation  of 
fresh  air,  and  left  to  perfect  rest. 

Question.  What  after-treatment  should  be' given  internally? 

Answer.  Give   aromatic   spirits   of  ammonia,   or  hot  tea   or 
coffee,  in  doses  of  a  teaspoonful  to  a  tablespoonful,  according 
to  the  weight  of  the  patient,  or  other  stimulant  at  hand,  every 
10  or  15  minutes  for  the  first  hour,  and  as  often  thereafter  a^* 
may  seem  expedient.  ,  '^^ 

Question.  What  danger  is  thel^  to  the  patient  after '.reaction^ 
is  established?  "  ''    •     '     '"^;'^ 

Answer.  There  is  great  danger  of  congestion  of  the  lungs,  ancF  -^^^ 
if  perfect  rest  is  not  maintained  for  at  least  48  hours  it  some- 
times occurs  that  the  patient  is  seized  with  great  difficulty  of  ^^"^ 
breathing,  and  death  is  liable  to  follow  unless  immediate  relief  j 
is  afforded.  - 

Question.  What  would  you  do  in  such  cases?  '^^ 

Answer.  Apply  a  large  mustard  plaster  over  the  breast,     li- 
the patient  gasps  for  breath  before  the  mustard  takes  effect,'*^^f 
assist  the  breathing  by  carefully  repeating  the  artificial  respl-^ . 
ration.  /  '•      '  '  ''   * 

Question.  What  outside  assistance  would  you  call  ■\rp(M'''m^ 
resuscitating  the  apparently  drowned?  /^"^ 

Answer.  Always   send   for   or   call    a   physician,    if   one   b^* 
available.  ;^^^ 

Question.  If  no  assistance  is  at  hand  and  you  have  to  work- 
alone,  what  is  the  first  thing  you  would  do  in  attempting  to'^'^^ 
resuscitate  an  apparently  drowned  person?  ;''^" 

Answer.  I  would  arouse  the  patient  as  prescribed  in  Rule  I.    -' 

Question.  What  would  you  next  do  ?  '^^ 

Answer.  I  would  expel  the  water  from  the  stomach  and  chest '^'^ 
as  prescribed  in  Rule  II. 


166        INSTETTCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GTJARD  STATIONS. 

Question.  After  expelling  the  water  from  the  stomach  and 
chest  what  would  you  do  before  attempting  artificial  respiration? 

Answer.  I  would  clear  the  mouth  and  throat  of  mucus,  draw 
the  tip  of  the  tongue  out  of  one  corner  of  the  mouth  as  directed ^ 
in  Rule  III,  and  turn.    If  the  lower  jaw  be  lifted,  the  teeth  may  , mi 
be  made  to  hold  the  tongue  in  place.     It  may  be  necessary  to 
pass  a  handkerchief  under  the  chin  and  tie  it  over  the  head  to 
keep  the  tongue  protruded. 

Question.  How  would  you  produce  artificial  respiration  work- 
ing alone? 

Answer.  Having  secured  the  tongue,  I  would  take  position 
astride  the  patient ;  grasp  the  arms  just  below  the  elbows  and 
raise  them  steadily  upward  by  the  sides  of  the  patient's  head 
to  the  ground,  holding  them  there  from  2  to  2|  seconds;  then 
raise  and  lower  the  arms  to  the  sides ;  grasp  the  body  with  the 
hands  and  apply  pressure  over  the  lower  ribs  from  2  to  2^ 
seconds  as  directed  in  Rule  III.  Repeat  these  movements  de- 
liberately and  perseveringly  12  to  15  times  in  every  minute. 

Question.  If  natural  breathing  is  not  restored  after  a  space  of 
about  four  minutes,  w^hat  w^ould  you  do? 

Answer.  Turn  the  patient  a  second  time  on  Jiis  stomach,  as 
directed  in  'Rule  II,  for  the  purpose  of  freeing  the  air.  passages 
of  any  remaining  water.  .        -  .    !. 

Question.  When  working  alone,  how  long  -^CB^ld^  artificial 
respiration  be  continued?  •     -  ^r  :  r 

Answer.  From  one  to  four  hours,  or  until  the  patient  breiithes. 

Question.  In  practicing  Rule  II  how  would  you  keep  the 
patient's  mouth  out  of  the  sand? 

Answer.  Place  his  face  on  his  forearm  so  as  to  keep  the 
mouth  and  nose  free. 

Question.  What  precautions  should  be  taken  to  insure  a  free 
circulation  of  fresh  air? 

Answ^er.  Prevent  witnesses  crowding  around,  especially  on 
the  weather  side  of  the  patient. 

Question.  What  should  be  taken  from  the  station  when  pro- 
ceeding to  the  place  where  an  apparently  drowned  person  is? 

Answer.  Medicine  chest,  roll,  piece  of  wood  with  lanyard  at- 
tached, hot-water  bottles,  flannel,  handkerchief,  blanket,  bricks, 
and  bucket  of  hot  water  if  the  place  is  near. 

Question.  Where  should  these  articles  be  kept? 

Answer.  In  a  handy  place,  neatly  stowed,  where  they  would 
be  instantly  accessible  at  all  times. 

Question.  Give  Rule  I  for  resuscitating  the  apparently 
drowned. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.         167 

Answer.  See  directions  for  restoring  the  apparently  drowned. 

Question.  Give  Rule  II  for  resuscitating  the  apparently 
drowned. 

Answer.  See  directions  for  restoring  the  apparently  drowned. 

Question.  Give  Rule  III  for  resuscitating  the  apparently 
drowned. 

Answer.  See  directions  for  restoring  the  apparently  drowned. 

Question.  Give  Rule  IV  for  resuscitating  the  apparently 
drowned. 

Answer.  See  directions  for  restoring  the  apparently  drowned. 

Question.  Give  the  rules  for  restoring  the  apparently  drbwncf^'^ 
when  one  person  must  work  alone.  "■\ 

Answer.  See  directions  for  restoring  the  apparently  drowned. 

Saving  Drowning  Persons. 

Question.  What  assurance  should  you  give  a  drowning  per- 
son on  approaching  him? 

Answer.  Assure  him  in  a  loud  and  firm  voice  that  he  is  safe. 

Question.  What  preparation  should  you  make  before  jumping 
in  to  save  a  drowning  person?  '        i 

Answer.  I  should  divest  myself  as  far  and  as  quickly  as 
possible  of  all  clothes.  Tear  them  off  if  necessary;  but  if 
there  is  not  time  loose  nt  all  events  the  foot  of  the  drawers,  if 
they  are  tied,  as,  if  I  do  not  do  so,  they  will  fill  with  water 
and  drag  me  down. 

Question.  If  a  drowning  person  is  struggling  in  the  wate^ 
what  should  you  do?  ' '  ?r 

Answer.  I  should  not  seize  him  then,  for  it  would  be  a  great- i  • 
risk  to  do  so,  but  keep  off  for  a  few  seconds  until  he  gets  quicftt 

Question.  After  the  drowning  person  is  quiet  what  ^Mialdo^ 

you  dO?^-     ■  ■•  ■  ■      ■'■   '     ^  :..^-    '::-.,(;   .r      •  ,  .-^;/. 

Answer.  Get  close  to  him  and  take  fast  hold  of  the  hair  of 
his  head,  turn  him  as  quickly  as  possible  onto  his  back,  give 
him  a  sudden  pull,  as  this  will  cause  htm  to  float,  then  throw 
myself  on  my  back  also  and  swim  for  the  shore,  both  hands 
having  hold  of  his  hair,  I  on  my  back  and  he  also  on  his,  and  hl^ 
back  to  my  stomach.  In  this  way  I  will  get  sooner  and  safeDt't 
ashore  than  by  any  other  means. 

Question.  What  one  great  advantage  has  this  method? 

Answer.  It  enables  the  rescuer  to  keep  his  head  up  and  also 
to  hold  the  head  of  the  drowning  person  up. 

Question.  What  is  of  primary  importance  in  attempting  a 
res:cue?  .ori*.;  I  u-jsoui  (^ai 


16$        INSTEtrCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS. 

Answer.  That  the  rescuer  take  fast  hold  of  the  hair  of  the 
drowning  person  and  tlirow  both  himself  and  such  person  on 
their  backs.     The  rescuer  in  this  position  can  float  nearly  as  long  /) 
as  he  pleases. 

Question.  Is  there  such  a  thing  as  a  death  grip? 

Answer.  It  is  believed  tliat  there  is  no  such  thing,  but  it  i8,[> 
dangerous  to  allow  a  struggling  person  to  take  hold  of  you. 

Question.  What  happens  to  a  drowning  person  as  he  begins 
to  lose  consciousness?  ,}) 

Answer.  He  begins  to  slacken  his  hold  until  he  quits  it  alto- 
getlier,  if  he  has  gripped  you. 

Question.  What    may   be   necessary   to   loosen    the   so-called  n 
death  grip? 

Answer.  It  may  in  some  cases  be  necessary  to  stop  the 
drowning  person's  breathing  by  pinching  his  nose  and  closing 
his  mouth  with  your  hand  or  by  putting  his  head  under  water. 

Question.  How  may  the  position  of  the  body  of  a  drowning 
person  which  has  sunk  to  the  bottom  be  located?  i,>a 

Answer.  By  the  air  bubbles  which  will  occasionally  rise  to 
the  surface,  allowance  being  made  for  the  motion  of  the  water, 
if  in  a  tideway  or  stream,  which  will  have  carried  the  bubbleSf^l 
out  of  a  perpendicular  course  in  rising  to  the  surface. 

Question.  How  may  a  body  be  rec^overod  from  the  bottom?     ^ 

Answer.  By  diving  for  it  in  the  direction  of  the  bubbles.  ii 

Question.  In  rescuing  a  person  from  the  bottom  how  should  ft 
he  be  brought  to  the  surface?  iu 

Answer.  Seize  the  hair  of  the  head  with  one  hand  only  and 
use  the  other  hand  and  the  feet  in  raising  him  and  myself  tQiif 
the  surface. 

Question.  If  in  the  sea,  with  the  tide  setting  out,  what  should?  Hi 
you  do?  «a 

Answer.  I  should  float  until  help  comes  and  not  exhaust  my- 
self by  attempting  to  swim  against  the  current. 

Treatment  of  Frostbites. 

Question*  What  things  should  be  avoided  in  the  treatment  of 
frostbites? 

Answer.  The  person  should  not  be  taken  near  the  fire,  nor 
should  the  frostbitten  parts  be  bathed  in  warm  water. 

Question.  What  should  you  first  do  in  treating  a  frostbite? 

Answer.  If  snow  be  on  the  ground,  or  accessible,  taken  a 
woolen  cloth,  place  a  handful  of  snow  upon  it,  and  gently  rub 
the  frozen  part  until  the  natural  color  is  restored. 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GUARD  STATIONS.        169 

Question.  If  there  be  no  snow  at  hand  what  would  you  do? 

Answer.  Bathe  the  frozen  parts  gently  with  a  woolen  cloth 
in  the  coldest  fresh  water  obtainable — ice  water  if  practicable. 

Question.  What  would  you  do  if  the  frostbite  was  old? 

Answer.  If  the  frostbite  was  old  and  the  skin  had  turned 
black  or  begun  to  scale  off,  do  not  attempt  to  restore  vitality 
by  friction,  but  apply  boracic  acid  vaseline  on  gauze  or  absorbent 
cotton.    After  this  I  would  wrap  the  parts  loosely  in  bandages. 

Question.  What  would  you  do  as  soon  as  vitality  had  been 
restored? 

Answer.  I  would  in  all  cases  apply  boracic  acid  vaseline. 

Question.  In  case  of  a  person  apparently  dead  from  exposure 
to.  the  cold,  what  would  you  do? 

Answer.  Apply  friction  to  the  body  and  lower  extremities 
and  artificial  respiration  as  practiced  in  the  resuscitation  of  the 
apparently  drowned.  As  soon  as  circulation  appears  to  be  re- 
stored, give  aromatic  spirits  of  ammonia,  hot  coffee,  or  tea,  at 
intervals  of  15  or  20  minutes  until  the  flesh  feels  natural.  Even 
if  no  signs  of  life  appear,  friction  should  be  kept  up  for  a  long 
period,  as  instances  are  on  record  of  recovery  after  several 
hours  of  suspended  animation. 


ARTICLES  IN   COAST  GUARD   REGULATIONS  RELA- 
TIVE TO  STATIONS. 


Articles. 

Abuses,   correction  of 1900-2 

Allotments 551-556 

Appointment,   district   superintendent 209-212 

Appointment,     keeper 213,  4301-4304 (b) 

Beach-apparatus    drill 1858 

Bedding,   care   of 1761 

Boards,  investisration  loss  of  life 2373-2379 

Boards   of   survey 2306-d-3,  2511-2526 

Boats -- 1707-1713 

Boat    courtesies ^-™J^_____ 3062-3064 

Boat    drill ^__1_________ 1852 

Boat   flags 3093 

Boat    hails   and    answers 3051 

Boat   salutes 3052-3061 

Books  and    blanks 3020 

Care    of    stations 2659-2660 

Cartage,  freight,  etc 3344 

Charges  and  specifications—. __4^4._4^^44^Mi«^  2011-2020 

Clothing,  credit  for 541-545 

Colors ^*-v«,i — 3065-1 

Commuted   rations 1" ^ 531-532 

Complaints —1-^. -  1915-1917 

Conduct   grades -^^ 759 

Correspondence 3201-3242 

Crews'   quarters ^u^^ 2727-2 

Daily    routine,   reports,   etc *- 1771 

Deaths   and   burials ».  2851-2856 

Desertions 399-417 

Discharges 369-386 

Discipline „^  1901-1911 

Drills  and  exercises ., 1S01-d-1802 

Emergent    expenditures 3341-4,  3341-6 

Enforcement    of   laws 3501-3504 

Enlisted  persons,  duties  of 1589 

Enlistments 301-323,  341-346 

Enlistment  contract  and  record ^ 349-354 

Fire    drill 1848 

Flags,  boat ' u— ,•. . 3093 

Flags,  sizes  of 1 3106 

Flag    ceremonies . J I -4.-^^ 3095-3096- 

Funeral   ceremonies :__ ^,^^ 3181-3138 

Gasoline T ^.^ 3317-2 

General    muster^ 1818-c 

Gratuities ':. 546 

Holidays  and  anniversaries- _"__ 3121-3122 

Imprisonment : 2251-2255 

Inflammables 1703 

Invoices 3375-3380 

Keepers,  duties  of ___!, ^^-»«u«^^*^^-  1415-1458 

Keyg,  custodian    of -V...-.._i).3n,io,hof,  j^hj-^-ux-  •       1729» 

ilhi    Ur^.x^-^uj    '     . 


172        OrSTRTTCTIONS  FOR  COAST  GTTARD  STATIONS. 

r ,       Artlcjles.  .  * 

Key  posts lJ_i— _ >-L_J^_l._         1760  ^^ 

Laws,  enforcement  of -1 3501-3504 

Leaves  of  absence 701-743 

Letters,    forms    of 3204-3207,3218-2 

Liberty , 765-784 

Lights 1699 

Loss  of  life,  investigation  of _____  2373-2379 

Medals ^__r  ____„____._ 2691 

Mess  bill _Il:L^rii'I{?_:]r_ 2720-2,  2721 

Mess   treasurer . _^::jr_::r^_:r_ 2713-2 

Messing  hours ____- :._:l_^-:.--___ ^^ 2732—2 

Mineral    oils .z—^ „— —     3317-2 

Oath  of  office ^^ '-..U:-^!!.^'!!].!.,  221-224 

Offenses ; ___-r_r_J__  1941-2001 

Offenses,   reports   of 1921-1933 

Orders,  procedure  under 1631-1653 

Painting 2677 

Pay   and   allowances 501-546 

Pay    rolls 561-578 

Pay  rolls  and  pay  vouchers 579-583 

Property,   transfer  of 3375-3380 

Proposals 3303-3309 

Punishments 2031-2043 

Punishments,    limitations   to 2221-2224 

Quarters,    crews' . 2727-2 

Ratings,   acting  warrant   officers' 355,  356 

Ratings,  petty  officers' 357-365 

Rations,    commuted 531-532 

Redress    of    wrongs 1935,  1936 

Reenlistments 324-340 

Regulations,    observance   of 1601 

Repairs    in    general 2667-2676 

Reports  and  returns 3401-3419 

Requisitions 3311,  3315 

Resignations 270-272 

Resuscitation    drill 1856-1857 

Retirements _: 280-282 

Salutes,    personal :__,__  3043-3048 

Sanitary    measures «_         1697 

Schedule  of  expenditures 3343-3 

Sickness  and   medical   treatment . 3801-3806 

Signal    drill a. 1853-1855 

Smoking ^ 1705 

"Star-Spangled    Banner" 3042 

Stations,   care  of 2659,  2660 

Stations    and    districts 41,  42 

Station    log»- 1690-1695 

Stationery 3321 

Telegrams 3231-3234,  3239-3242 

Transfers 389-395 

Transfer    of   property : 3375-3380 

Travel    expense 591-605 

Uniforms 2901-2937 

Vouchers 3351-3372 

Warrant    officers,   appointment    of r-— ^-  213.  , 

Warrant  officers,  how  addressed .ll_ij_  811  - 

Watch  and  patrol  bill 1751-2 


.zTfffrr 


INDEX. 


,  „ ,  Articles. 

TuA-ddressing  enlisted  men,  manner  of 14 

Adjacent  stations : 

to  assist  at  wreck 31 

to  be  notified  by  telephone 32  (1) 

Ta-      without  telephone,  notified  how ^ 32  (2) 

Accident  to  buildings,  equipment,  or  boats  to  be  reported 5 

Apparatus  to  be  used  at  wreck ; 35 

Assistance  from  outside,  employment  of 6 

Barns  and  stables  to  be  kept  clean  and  in  repair 98 

Beach  apparatus,  care  of 107 

Boarding  a  vessel  stranded  or  afloat  in  heavy  sea 251 

Boat-s : 

care  of  bottoms  and  bilges 143 

equipment w^^jiL_i.'iJi::i.i1«  161-165 

houses  to  be  kept  in  repair j^.ill:i:l_liiil':i/ 99 

keepers 150 

kept  in  water,  care  of 144 

number  plates 178 

returning  from  service  or  drill,  care  of 142 

thwarts,  how  designated 148 

to  be  kept  clean  and  equipped 141 

wagon,  instructions  for  handling 155 

Boats  in  a  surf,  management  of 243-250 

beaching  or  landing  through  a  surf 243  (III) 

drogue-s — 

boat  sail  bent  to  yard)  used  as 249 

description  of 247 

holding  rope,  marked  how 250 

purpose  of 245 

sizes  of 246 

uses  of 248 

landing  in  a  heavy  surf  in  power  surfboat 244 

173 


174  INDEX. 

Boats  In  a  surf — Continued.  Articles. 

rowing  to  seaward 243  (I) 

running  before  a  broken  sea,  or  surf,  to  the  shore 

(flat  beach) 243  (II) 

Brass  work  to  be  kept  bright 179 

Brushes,  paint,  use  and  care  of — 137 

Buildings: 

changes  in,  forbidden 91 

not  now  painted,  not  to  be  painted 122 

to  be  aired  frequently 100 

Cargo  landed  or  drifted  ashore  to  be  cared  for 27 

Charge  of  powder  for  line-throwing  gun , 38 

Communication  with  wreck  by  line-throwing  gun 37 

Customs  inspector : 

duties  of  keeper  as 24^27 

for   foreign   merchandise   cast   ashore   or   cargo   of 

stranded  vessel— 24 

Drill-s : 

beach  apparatus 371-411 

conducted  how 371 

details  of  drill - 377^11 

hawser  cutter 374 

life  car  used  occasionally 373 

schedule  of 372 

senior  petty  officer  and  No.  2  surfman  conduct 

drill  occasionally 375 

words  of  command 376 

boat — 

capsizing  and  righting 214,  225 

definition  of , 211 

during     December,     January,     February,     and 

March 215 

explanations  and  purposes  of  special  commands-      225 

going  alongside  a  vessel,  official  occasion 222  (3) 

leaving  station  for  drill  or  service 222  (1) 

leaving  vessel  after  official  visit,  oars  boated 222  (4) 

leaving  vessel  for  the  beach^ ^t^j«.i 222  (2) 

self -bailing  pulling —  «}..f 

on   boat   carriage   at   station  'with   inclined 
launching  ways 224 


INMX.  dim 

Drlll-s — Continued, 
boat — continued. 

self-bailing  pulling — continued.  Articles, 

on  boat  wagon 218-221 

unloading  to  be  practiced 220 

unloading  wben  weather  not  suitable  for 

launching 221 

valves,   ventilators,   and  hatches  closed 

before  unloading 218 

water    ballast    admitted    after    boat    i^;,,     } 

afloat - .il;      219 

senior  petty  officer  and  No.  2  surfman  to  con- 
duct occasionally -r      213 

under  sail 226-242 

general   rules   for«, — . — ,v 242 

power  lifeboat — . 235 

to  douse  sail . . 241 

to  get  underway  from  heave  to 239 

to  heave  to 238 

to  reef  sail 240 

to  tack ^ 236 

to  wear 237 

when  not  to  be  recorded^ 212 

days,  afternoons  of 197 

fire 201-206 

;r        muster . 421-422 

i         not  held  on  Saturday  and  Sunday 192-193 

resuscitation 351--355 

held  weekly 351 

how  conducted 353 

medicine  chest,  uses  of  remedies  in 355 

positions 352 

recitation 354 

routine ■,.^-_-,^. 191 

time  for ^,w«^ 194 

variation  of  schedule ^^-^i_lj_'_ ..195 

wreck  duty,  omitted ntji^hi^u  i  ^x^SdQ 

Drowned  persons :  •    . '  .^•: 

articles  found  on  bodies 44 

bodies  of 43 

Dutiable  cargo  of  stranded  vessels  forwarded,  correct  ao^jvUi^f 
count  to  be  kept ,^z  oi    26 


^^179  INDEX. 

Articles. 

Ebgines,  gasoline,  for  boats  and  other  purposes^. 181-187 

"'       care  of . 182 

circulating  water  for  running  in  boathouse 180 

electrical  connections 181 

laying  up  for  winter 187 

precautions  in  operating 183 

to  stop L 184 

•'I-       troubles/ ; 185 

.  Equipment,  self-bailibg' power : 

^f^'      lifeboat i^.. 165 

surfboat ^ i:^LJI^l!l^_ 164 

^'Jlfield  assistant: 

-'*       assistance  to,  by  members  of  crew 106 

construction  and  repair  work  recommended  by 105 

Floor  oil ^ 125 

Floors  to  be  kept  cleaii----'-r-- 94 

Fog:  '  in  oil  \ 

sound  signals  for -^ .: 261 

speed  in . ._._: 262 

Foreign  merchandise  stranded,  collector  <>f  customs  to  be 

notified ^jIL.li 25 

Foundation  of  buildings  to  be  examined i-J—j-iLJllfli 92 

Frostbites,  treatment  of— —1 -i±-l-  365 

Gasoline  and  oils  for  power  boats ^^__-^__. i_i  4 

General  instructions . ^^-u.-^-^---: 1-15 

boats --.^-SlCJiaiidj. 141-150 

Gutters  and  downspouts : 

painting  of 128 

to  be  kept  cleaned  out 93 

Hand  signal  torch,  care  of 109 

Hawser  cutter 411 

Horses,  carts,  or  tugs : 

employment  of 7  (1) 

payment  for 7(2) 

"  In  commission,"  definition  of 3 

Instructions : 

have  force  and  effect  of  regulations 1 

self-bailing  pulling  surfboat  with  boat  wagon 155-156 

-^                sand  in  tank 156 

Labor  on  stranded  vessel  not  in  danger,  to  be  subordinated 

to  regular  station  duties L.^ nL-^ -  41 


Articles. 
Launch  ways,  launching  carriages,  etc.,  to  be  kept  in  work- 
ing order 101 

Life  preservers : 

how   marked 147 

to  be  worn  in  boats 14(5 

where  and  how  kept . . 145 

Loading  beach  cart 401-404 

Locks,  knobs,  etc.,  to  be  kept  set  up 96 

Lookout : 

impressions  to  be  made  on  time  detector 57  (1) 

manner  of  performing  duty 81 

record  of  passing  vessels  to  be  kept 81 

where  stood 52 

Loss  of  life,  no  immediate  danger  of,  procedure 39 

Loss,  theft,  or  destruction  of  articles  of  value 102 

Names  and  residences :  ,    - 

of  crew,  kept  in  log  book__i_l_« 18 

of  next  of  kin,  kept  in  log  book 13 

Navy  Flag  Code 348 

Oars,  how  numbered 149 

Operations  at  wreck,  officer  in  charge  of 34 

"  Out  of  commission,"  definition  of 3 

Paint,  instructions  for  applying 134 

Painting : 

boats 171-176 

bottoms  of  boats 176 

markings  on  boats ■- 177 

parts  finished  bright  in  all  boats 1 175 

plastered  walls,  preparation  for 132 

power  lifeboats 172 

power  surfboats   (open) 174 

power  surfboats   (self -bailing) 173 

preparations  for 130 

stations 121-137 

Paints : 

care  of ._  135 

to  be  used __^ 121 

Patrols  and  lookouts _-___:^i:;___ 51-T^ 

records  of __i^!:_li._;!:i.  j__^  *  55 

^''^''.l^f*',  "'"'V* --^rms^-simr ®2. 

67d85°— 17— 12 


Its  index. 

Patrol  clocks  A  v,|.|7j  4rfr>r  Amcies. 

care  and  preservation  of -rTfm-^  ^^» 

winding  of _-.,.i-,;*,;^^»»^^.  (M 

Patrols:  .>,, - 

during  daylight ^^}-'^^«^ 54 

failure  to  find  cheek  at  halfway  post^^f«^J-t 60 

impressions  to  be  made  on  time  detector- 57  (2) 

in  two  directions , „ ^ 51 

manner  of  making , _. ^«  ,  ..67 

manner  of  performing  duty i ., ,1-..  56 

not  to  retire  until  relief  is  dressed^ , ^J^-.  68 

procedure    upon    discovering    vessel    standing    into 
danger — 

at  night  >-.; 71 

during  the  day . ^  ,72 

procedure  upon  discovery  of  wreck ^^,»5^^.. .1,^,70 

report  by  telephone  from  halfway  house—. ^-.I»^-.  \  61 

route ^. _^— , 67 

two  or  more  stations  within  communicating  distance-  58 

what  should  be  carried  on ___. 69 

when  patrol  limits  join ^^^;_^*.-uu— ; 59 

where  entire  beach  between  stations  is  not  covered-^  ,,  ,  58 

Permanent  equipment,  transfer  forbidden .^  ,.10 

Personal  service  for  keeper  forbidden —  ?  15 

Preservation  of  life  takes  precedence I_   ;  30 

Proficiency  of  crew,  keeper  responsible  for_^_^_____ 2 

Promotion,  application  for _____j^j-^^^ 12 

Property,  care  and  preservation  bf-"-^^"^^-^^ Ul-109 

Property  cast  ashore,  report  of .^.^^^,^,^^4.^.^^^,,^^  9 

Puttying,  preparation  for . ^^^^^^^u-^^^^ ^.:  131 

Repainting :_1-._>__^_1_^1_ _  '  123 

Rescuing  people  from  drifting  wreck  at  sea 254 

Restoring  the  apparently  drowned,  directions  for 361 

Resuscitation,  report  of . 8 

Roofs  to  be  inspected 97 

Sashes  to  be  kept  in  condition ^ ..  95 

Saving  drowning  persons  by  swimming  to  their  relief 362 

Screens  to  be  looked  after __. . _  104 

Scruljbing  and  cleaning 129 

Shingles — 124 

Shot  line,  hawser,  and  whip  to  be  measured  periodically.,  .  103 


INDEX.  179 

Articles. 
Signal-s 271-348 

conventional - —  *  286 

dot  and  dash  code — ^ 285 

drills 276 

accuracy  essential-^ 283 

message  how  received 282 

message  how  recorded 281 

to  he  held  out  of  doors 280 

for  assistance  at  night 33 

for  use  at  wrecks 331-336 

answers  used  from  wreck 332 

one  red  and  one  white  lantern  carried  on  beach 

cart - 336 

staffs  for  flags  on  beach  cart 333 

torches  on  beach  cart 334 

two  torches  used  together 335 

international  code 321-327 

drills — 

out  of  doors  only  to  be  recorded . 325 

to  be  held  out  of  doors_ 322 

to  be  held  weekly  between  stations  within 

signal   distance 323 

schedule  of 321 

standards  of — 

expertness 327 

proficiency .326 

temporary  pole  used  for  answering  pennant 324 

international  Morse  code  used _' 275 

intervals 288 

methods  between  units  of  Coast  Guard . 272 

method  used  with  merchant  vessels .  273 

occulting  or  flashing  light  method 301-304 

dot  and  dash  code  used ,301 

night  signaling  to  be  practiced-^. 303 

standard  of  proficiency  and  expertness 304 

to  call  a  ship  or  station 302 

practice 277 

proficiency   required 278 

proficiency  tests 279 

secondary  meanings 287 


18G  INDEX. 

,j^igiial-s — Continued.  Articles. 

,»  •    semapliore  method 305-3ir) 

end  of  word,  sentence,  and  message _.f^j^***^^^  310 

general  instructions  same  as  for  wigwu|f*^4^^_^  313 

hand  flags -__.__!..c.^;  ^  30G 

hand  flags  or  machine  used *^1^,^^*^I»>t.^__  30.") 

numbers  to  be  spelled  out ___^ ^__  309 

positions  and  motions 307 

precautions . 314 

preceded   by   "signals,"   foum^.in   N^vy    Signal 

Book —^^^^ ^_,  311 

secondary  meanings . ^ 308 

standards  of  proficiency  and  expertness 315 

to  call  a  ship  or  station ; _^ 312 

system,  Coast  Guard,  comprises  what  methods 271 

wigwag — 

background 294 

error   290 

method,  applicable  to 291 

position  and  motions 293 

spelled-out  messages 292 

standards  of  proficiency  and  expertness 297 

to  call  ship  or  station 29.") 

Station  placed  out  of  commission 108 

Steering  and  sailing  rules 263 

Storm  warning  signals 341 

Surfmen 80-82 

to  reside  at  station 80 

Time  detectors,  care  of 63 

Varnishing 136 

Vessel  stranded,  wrecked,  or  in  distress,  to  be  reported 82 

Visitors  at  station 11 

AVashes,  preparation  for ^ 133 

Watchman's  clock,  records  of 65 

Whitewash 126 

Window  sashes,  puttying  of 127 

Working  party  on  wreck,  upon  approach  of  bad  weather.,  42 

Wrecks,  action  at 31-44 

Wrecking  company  employed,  keeper's  responsibility 40 

o 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 
STAMPED  BELOW 


AN  INITIAL  FINE  OF  25  CENTS 

WILL  BE  ASSESSED  FOR  FAILURE  TO  RETURN 
THIS  BOOK  ON  THE  DATE  DUE.  THE  PENALTY 
WILL  INCREASE  TO  50  CENTS  ON  THE  FOURTH 
DAY  AND  TO  $1.00  ON  THE  SEVENTH  DAY 
OVERDUE. 


OJiML 


SEP    2    1938 


MAY   9    1943 


YB  7832 


Q9Q 


LIBRARY  USE 

RETURN  TO  DESK  FROM  WHICH  BORROWED 


LOAN  DEPT. 

THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  BEFORE  CLOSING  TIME 
ON  LAST  DATE  STAMPED  BELOW 

LIBRARY  USE 

^ 

DEC?   'SAum 

L.^  LD 

riFP      7'fiZl-QPM 

Ulu       /  DH    Jy  r  Iff 

1 

1 

